Home

Spec - Seashore Builders, Inc.

1. c Interface Device An addressable device which interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog addressable system d Fire Alarm Control Unit A control panel remote from the fire alarm control panel that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices may supply power to detection devices and interface devices may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel e Fire Alarm Control Panel FACP A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm control unit and to which fire alarm control units are interconnected The panel has central processing memory input and output terminals P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 302 of 367 f Terminal Cabinet A steel cabinet with locking hinge mounted door in which terminal strips are securely mounted 2 2 2 System Operation The system shall be a complete supervised noncoded analog addressable fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72 The system shall have an interconnected riser loop or network having Style 6 supervision that shall not be located in the same room or shaft The return portion of the loop shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device The system shall remain in the alarm mode until i
2. Collect and place scrap waste debris in containers Promptly dispose of scrap waste debris Do not allow scrap waste debris to accumulate on site transport scrap waste debris from government property and legally dispose of them P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 198 of 367 3 12 WARRANTY 3 12 1 MANUFACTURER S WARRANTY Submit all manufacturers signed warranties to Contracting Officer prior to final commissioning and acceptance 3 12 2 CONTRACTOR S WARRANTY for INSTALLATION Submit contractor s warranty for installation to the Contracting Officer prior to final commissioning and acceptance End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 199 of 367 SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE 11 09 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Plumbing System G Detail drawings consisting of schedules performance charts instructions diagrams and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections dimensions for roughing in foundation and support points schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation Where piping and equipment are to be supported oth
3. P N 05 C05124 Page 47 of 367 220000 24 Fixtures G O 242 Flush valvewaterclosets O 24 3 Flush valveurinals O 24 4 Wallhunglavatories O 245 Servicesinks O 24 6 Drinking water coolers O 24 7 Plastic shower units O 28 Waterheaters o Z o o O 25 Backflow preventers O 262 ShowerFaucets O ee egalecans mE qualifications 230700 2 3 Pipe Insulation Systems O 3 3 Duct Insulation Systems oo O 233113 13 Material Equipment and Fixture List Z O Z o o ooo O I3 Records of Existing Conditions Z o Z oO o O 933 DuctSupports O 211 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials O Z o Z o O 2 1 2 Mill Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials 221 Round sheet metal ductfitings 24 Tuming Vanes OOOO S 26 Flexible Connects O Oo o 229 Fiexible Duct Materias O O S2211 Power Operated Dampers O O S2210 Manual Volume Dampers O O S41 Ductwork Leakage Tests Sid SSCS 233715 2 1 Materials Equipment and Fixture Lit for Records of Existing Conditions O or Fabrication Drawings OOOO 1 installation Drawings OoOO 238202 13 Draws SSS O pis Spare Pats I 1 Verification of Dimensions O S2511 Coil Corrosion Protection SSCS 5 System Performance Tests O O oO o 54 Refrigerant Tests Chargin
4. Provide finish of slabs as specified 3 7 10 Bonding Surfaces of set concrete at joints except where bonding is obtained by use of concrete bonding agent must be roughened and cleaned of laitance coatings loose particles and foreign matter Roughen surfaces in a manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance loosened particles of aggregate nor damaged concrete at the surface Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows At joints between footings and walls or columns between walls or columns and the beams or slabs they support and elsewhere unless otherwise specified roughened and cleaned P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 80 of 367 surface of set concrete must be dampened but not saturated immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete At joints in exposed to view work at vertical joints in walls at joints near midpoint of span in girders beams supported slabs other structural members in work designed to contain liquids the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but not saturated and covered with a cement grout coating Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of portland cement and fine aggregate by weight with not more than 6 gallons of water per sack of cement Apply cement grout with a stiff broom or brush to a minimum thickness of 1 16 inch Deposit fresh concrete before cement grout has attained its initial set Bonding of fresh concrete t
5. 3 1 1 Steel Surfaces P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 113 of 367 Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or if sandblasting is impractical or would damage finish work scraping and wire brushing Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue free solvent 3 1 2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with sealant When masking tape is used as a protective coating remove tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application For removing protective coatings and final cleaning use nonstaining solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the item s containing aluminum or bronze surfaces 3 1 3 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds oil or other such materials remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing Remove laitance efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity 3 2 SEALANT PREPARATION Do not add liquids solvents or powders to the sealant Mix multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 APPLICATION 3 3 1 Joint Width To Depth Ratios a Acceptable Ratios JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH Minimum Maximum For metal or other nonporous surfaces 1 4 inch minimum 1 4inch 1 4 inch over 1 4 inch 1 2 of Equal to width width For concrete or masonry 1 4 inch minimum 1 4 inch 1 4 inch Over 1 4 inch to 1 2 inch 1 4 inch Equal to widt
6. E mail info asse plumbing org Internet http www asse plumbing org P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 22 of 367 AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver CO 80235 Ph 800 926 7337 Fax 303 347 0804 Internet http www awwa org AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY AWS 550 N W LeJeune Road Miami FL 33126 Ph 800 443 9353 305 443 9353 Fax 305 443 7559 E mail info aws org Internet http www aws org ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME Three Park Avenue M S 10E New York NY 10016 Ph 212 591 7722 or 800 843 2763 Fax 212 591 7674 E mail infocentral asme org Internet http www asme org ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL AABC 1518 K Street NW Washington DC 20005 Ph 202 737 0202 Fax 202 638 4833 E mail info aabc com Internet http www aabchq com ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM 100 Barr Harbor Drive P O Box C700 West Conshohocken PA 19428 2959 Ph 610 832 9500 Fax 610 832 9555 E mail service astm org Internet http www astm org BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION BHMA 355 Lexington Avenue 17th Floor New York NY 10017 Ph 212 297 2122 Fax 212 370 9047 E mail assocmgmt aol com P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 23 of 367 Internet http www buildershardware com CSA AMERICA INC CSA AM 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road Cleveland OH 44131 5575 Ph 216 524 4990 Fax 216 520 8979 E mail cathy rake csa america org Internet ht
7. Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable Rectangular ducting 36 inches and larger shall be supported by trapeze hangers Ducts situated in unconditioned areas and required to have insulation with a vapor sealed facing shall be supported on trapeze hangers Hangers shall be spaced far enough out from the side of the duct to permit the duct insulation to be placed on the duct inside the trapeze Duct hangers shall not penetrate the vapor sealed facing Where trapeze hangers are used the bottom of the duct shall be supported on angles sized as follows WIDTH OF DUCT INCHES MINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE INCHES 30 and smaller 1 1 4 by 1 1 4 by 1 8 31 to 48 1 1 2 by 1 1 2 by 1 8 49 to 72 1 1 2 by 1 1 2 by 3 16 73 to 96 2 by 2 by 1 4 97 and wider 3 by 3 by 1 4 P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 254 of 367 Ducting when supported from roof purlins shall not be supported at points greater than one sixth of the purlin span from the roof truss Load per hanger shall not exceed 400 pounds when support is from a single purlin or 800 pounds when hanger load is applied halfway between purlins by means of auxiliary support steel provided under this section When support is not halfway between purlins the allowable hanger load shall be the product of 400 times the inverse ratio of the longest distance to purlin to purlin spacing When the hanger load exceeds the above limits provide reinforcing of purlin s or additional support beam s W
8. Representative Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 325 specifications Maintain structural stability of frame during erection Clean and roughen concrete and masonry bearing surfaces prior to setting plates Clean bottom surface of plates Align and adjust structural framing before permanent bolt up and connections Perform necessary adjustments and alignment to compensate for changes or discrepancies in elevations Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing in accordance with AISC 360 3 4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 195 of 367 Provide metal wall panels of full length from sill to eave as indicated unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place in accordance with MBMA MBSM Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings the printed instructions and safety precautions of the metal building manufacturer Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading abuse or undue impact Do not install bent chipped or defective sheets Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical edges of the building securely anchored and with the indicated eave and sill Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel movement of the building structure and to provide p
9. 732 981 0060 Fax 732 981 1712 E mail customer services ieee org Internet http www ieee org INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS IAPMO 5001 E Philadelphia St Ontario CA 91761 Ph 909 472 4100 Fax 909 472 4150 E mail iampo iampo org Internet www iampo org INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL ICC 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier CA 90601 Ph 562 699 0541 Fax 562 699 9721 E mail webmaster iccsafe org Internet www iccsafe org MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 25 of 367 127 Park Street NE Vienna VA 22180 4602 Ph 703 281 6613 Fax 703 281 6671 E mail info mss hq com Internet http www mss hq com MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE MPI 2800 Ingleton Avenue Burnaby BC CANADA V5C Ph 888 674 8937 Fax 888 211 8708 E mail info paintinfo com Internet http www paintinfo com mpi METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION MBMA 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland OH 44115 2851 Ph 216 241 7333 Fax 216 241 0105 E mail mbma mbma com Internet http www mbma com MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION MICA 16712 elm Circle Omaha NE 68130 Ph 800 747 6422 Fax 402 330 9702 E mail info micainsulation org Internet http www micainsulation org NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION NASA Publication s Available From Superintendent of Documents U S
10. A2111 NRP 4 5 INCHES X 4 5 INCHES 630 TYPE 1 F03 630 19211 I C 626 C2021 PT C D G amp H 689xTBGN J102 10 INCHES LDW 630 J35100 x LGT REQD AS SPECIFIED L03011 A2111 NRP 4 5 INCHES X 4 5 INCHES 630 TYPE 1 F03 630 E19211 LC 626 C2021 PT C D G amp H 689xTBGN J102 10 INCHES LDW 630 L03011 A2112 4 5 INCHES X 4 5 INCHES 630 4000 G 1 F82 630 C02011 OR 2021 PT4C 689xTBGN J102 10 INCHES LDW 630 L02041 626 L03011 P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 142 of 367 HW 4 3 EACH HINGES 1 EACH PUSH PLATE 1 EACH PULL PLATE 1 EACH CLOSER 1 EACH KICK PLATE 1 EACH FLOOR STOP 3 EACH SILENCERS HW 5 3 EACH HINGES 1 EACH PRIVACY SET 1 EACH CLOSER 1 EACH KICK PLATE 1 EACH FLOOR STOP 3 EACH SILENCERS BHMA A2112 4 5 INCHES X 4 5 INCHES 630 BHMA J301 630 BHMA J405 630 BHMA C02011 PT4C 689xTBGN BHMA J102 10 INCHES x 2 INCHES LDW 630 BHMA L02041 626 BHMA L03011 BHMA A2112 4 5 INCHES X 4 5 INCHES 630 BHMA 4000 GRI F76 626 BHMA C02011 PT4C 689xTBGN BHMA J102 10 INCHES LDW 630 BHMA L02041 626 BHMA L03011 End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 143 of 367 SECTION 09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR GYPSUM BOARD 01 08 PART 1 GENERAL Not used PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating ASTM A 653 A 653M G 60 aluminum coating ASTM A 463 A 463M T1 25 or a 55 percent aluminum zinc coating 2 1 1 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum
11. ASTM E 84 2 4 4 Repair Of Finish Protection Repair paint for color finish enameled metal panel must be compatible paint of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the metal panel manufacturer conforming to ASTM A 780 2 5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING 2 5 1 General Cold formed metallic coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 653 A 653M 2 5 2 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing Refer to the following paragraph FASTENERS 2 6 FASTENERS 2 6 1 General Type material corrosion resistance size and sufficient length to penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates in accordance with the metal panel manufacturer s and ASCE 7 05 requirements 2 6 2 Exposed Fasteners P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 191 of 367 Fasteners for metal panels to be corrosion resistant coated steel aluminum stainless steel or nylon capped steel compatible with the sheet panel or flashing and of a type and size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements and design loads Fasteners for accessories to be the manufacturer s standard Provide an integral metal washer matching the color of attached material with compressible sealing EPDM gasket approximately 3 32 inch thick 2 6 3 Screws Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel aluminum and or stainless steel being the type and size recommended by the
12. Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 Ph 202 783 3238 NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS NAAMM 800 Roosevelt Road Bldg C Suite 312 Glen Ellyn IL 60137 Ph 630 942 6591 Fax 630 790 3095 E mail naamm gss net Internet http www naamm org P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 26 of 367 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA 1300 North 17th Street Suite 1752 Rosslyn VA 22209 Ph 703 841 3200 Fax 703 841 5900 E mail webmaster nema org Internet http www nema org NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU NEBB 8575 Grovemont Circle Gaithersburg MD 20877 Ph 301 977 3698 Fax 301 977 9589 Internet http www nebb org NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02169 7471 Ph 617 770 3000 Fax 617 770 0700 E mail webmaster nfpa org Internet http www nfpa org NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY NIST 100 Bureau Drive Stop 2100 Gaithersburg MD 20899 2100 Ph 301 975 NIST Internet http www nist gov Order Publications From Superintendent of Documents U S Government Printing Office GPO 732 North Capitol Street NW Washington DC 20401 Ph 888 293 6498 or 202 512 1530 Fax 202 512 1262 E mail gpoaccess gpo gov Internet http www gpoaccess gov or National Technical Information Service NTIS 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Ph 703 605 6585 Fax 703
13. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy Include in the data a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2 1 1 Standard Products Provide Materials and equipment that are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products which are of a similar material design and workmanship The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturer s catalogs or brochures Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer s factory tests can be shown Products shall be supported by a service organization System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locati
14. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be 3 gallons 2 8 1 Automatic Storage Type Heaters shall be complete with control system temperature gauge and pressure gauge and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve 2 8 1 1 Electric Type Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating elements Each element shall be 4 5 KW The elements shall be wired so that only one element can operate at a time 2 9 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to AWWA C700 Cold water meters 2 1 2 inches and larger shall be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701 Meter register may be round or straight reading type as provided by the local utility Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories 2 10 ELECTRICAL WORK Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors motor starters and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide high efficiency type single phase fractional horsepower alternating current motors including motors that are part of a system corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11 Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to dr
15. Unitary Equipment Components The remote unit shall be as specified in paragraph REMOTE CONDENSER OR CONDENSING UNIT Evaporator or supply fans shall be double width double inlet forward curved backward inclined or airfoil blade centrifugal scroll type Condenser or outdoor fans shall be the manufacturer s standard for the unit specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal scroll type Fan and condenser motors shall have totally enclosed enclosures 2 2 1 Air to Refrigerant Coil Coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes of 3 8 inch minimum diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes Coil shall be protected in accordance with paragraph COIL CORROSION PROTECTION Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided Coils shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 15 amp 34 at the factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the installed system Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging Each unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a holding charge Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field charged Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor circuit 2 2 2 Compressor Compressor shall be direct drive semi hermetic or hermetic reciprocating or scroll type capable of operating at partial load conditions Compressor shall be
16. Waste and Storm Drain P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 221 of 367 B Aboveground Soil Waste Drain In Buildings C Underground Vent D Aboveground Vent E Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground F Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground Hard Temper TABLE II PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS 1 Malleable iron threaded fittings X X X a Galvanized ASME B16 3 for use with Item 4a b Same as a but not galvanized for use with Item 4b 2 Steel pipe X X X a Seamless galvanized ASTM A 53 A 53M Type S Grade B b Seamless black ASTM A 53 A 53M Type S Grade B 3 Bronze flanged fittings X X X ASME B16 24 for use with Items 5 and 7 4 Seamless copper pipe ASTM B 42 X X X 5 Wrought copper and bronze solder joint X X X pressure fittings ASME B16 22 for use with Items 5 6 Polyethylene PE plastic pipe X X Schedules 40 and 80 based on outside diameter ASTM D 2447 7 Butt fusion polyethylene PE plastic X X P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 222 of 367 pipe fittings ASTM D 3261 for use with Items 14 8 Polyethylene PE plastic tubing ASTM D 2737 9 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC plastic hot and cold water distribution system ASTM D 2846 D 2846M 10 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC plastic pipe Schedule 40 and 80 ASTM F 441 F 441M 11 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC plastic pipe SDR PR ASTM F 442 F 442M 12 Threaded chl
17. and designed for use on openings as indicated 1 2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 2 1 Wind Loading Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind loading pressure of at least 30 pounds per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1 120 of the opening width Provide test data showing compliance with ASTM E 330 Sound engineering principles may be used to interpolate or extrapolate test results to door sizes not specifically tested Complete assembly must meet or exceed the requirements of ASCE 7 05 1 2 2 Operational Cycle Life All portions of the door hardware and operating mechanism that are subject to movement wear or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a minimum number of 10 cycles per day One complete cycle of door operation is defined as when the door is in the closed position moves to the fully open position and returns to the closed position 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with hardware and framing details Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies of this section SD 03 Product Data P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 127 of 367 Submit manufacturer s catalog data for overhead coiling doors and accessories SD 05 Design Data Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in accordance with the
18. and type optional with the Contractor for cement used in concrete cradle concrete encasement and thrust blocking 2 2 3 Portland Cement Concrete Portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C 94 C 94M compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days except for concrete cradle and encasement or concrete blocks for manholes Concrete used for cradle and encasement shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi minimum at 28 days Concrete in place shall be protected from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 353 of 367 2 3 REPORTS Submit Test Reports Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION 3 1 1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled Special Requirements 3 1 1 1 Location The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the building Where possible do not lay sewer line closer horizontally than 10 feet to a water main or service line Install pressure sewer lines beneath water lines only with the top of the sewer line being at least 2 feet below bottom of water line Where sanitary sewer lines pass above water lines encase sewer in concrete for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing Where sanitary
19. doors and frames to receive finish hardware Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI DOOR A250 8 and SDI DOOR A250 6 For additional requirements refer to ANSI BHMA A156 115 Drill and tap for surface applied hardware at the project site Build additional reinforcing for surface applied hardware into the door at the factory Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI DOOR A250 8 as applicable Punch door frames to receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors Set lock strikes out to provide clearance for silencers 2 5 FINISHES 2 5 1 Factory Primed Finish All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned chemically treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in SDI DOOR A250 8 or paintable A25 galvannealed steel without primer Where coating is removed by welding apply touchup of factory primer 2 5 2 Electrolytic Zinc Coated Anchors and Accessories Provide electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel in accordance with ASTM A 879 A 879M Commercial Quality Coating Class A Phosphate treat and factory prime zinc coated surfaces as specified in SDI DOOR A250 8 P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 13 Page 119 of 367 2 6 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid neat in appearance and free from defects wave
20. once a day nor less than once for each 160 cubic yards of concrete nor less than once for each 5400 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls For the entire project take no less than five sets of samples and perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed Each strength test result must be the average of two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 87 of 367 If the average of any three consecutive strength test results is less than f c or if any strength test result falls below f c by more than 450 psi take a minimum of three ASTM C 42 C 42M core samples from the in place work represented by the low test cylinder results and test Concrete represented by core test is considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of fc and if no single core is less than 75 percent of f c Retest locations represented by erratic core strengths Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete Repair core holes with nonshrink grout Match color and finish of adjacent concrete 3 11 2 4 Air Content ASTM C 173 C 173M or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete and ASTM C 173 C 173M for lightweight concrete Test air entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests 3 11 2 5 Strength of Concrete Structure Compliance with the following is considered deficient if it fails to mee
21. provided bends are made in suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed 2 5 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework such as lintels sill angles miscellaneous mountings and frames Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as required to support wall loads over openings Provide with connections and welds Provide angles and plates ASTM A 36 A 36M for embedment as indicated Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A 123 A 123M 2 6 SAFETY NOSINGS FOR CONCRETE TREADS Provide safety nosings of cast aluminum or cast iron with abrasive surfaces or extruded aluminum with abrasive inserts Nosing to be at least 4 inches wide and 1 4 inch thick and for metal pan cement filled treads extending the full length of the tread and for platforms and landings Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded a minimum of 3 4 inch in the concrete and with tops flush with the top of the traffic surface 2 7 STEEL STAIRS Provide steel stairs complete with stringers metal pan concrete filled treads landings columns handrails and necessary bolts and other fastenings Steel stairs and accessories to be shop painted 2 7 1 Design Loads Design stairs to sustain a live load of not less than 100 pounds per square foot or a concentrated load of 300 applied where it is most critical Conform to AISC 360 or
22. urinals and water closets Flushing and faucet systems shall consist of solenoid activated valves with light beam sensors Flush valve for water closet shall include an override pushbutton Flushing devices shall be provided as described in paragraph FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 206 of 367 2 4 2 Flush Valve Water Closets ASME A112 19 2 white vitreous china siphon jet elongated bowl floor mounted floor outlet Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches except 17 to 19 inches for wheelchair water closets Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve Provide white solid plastic elongated open front seat Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed1 0 gallons per flush Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control stop valve vacuum breaker tail pieces slip nuts and wall plates exposed to view components shall be chromium plated or polished stainless steel Flush valves shall be nonhold open type Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls Provide solenoid activated flush valves including electrical operated light beam sensor to energize the solenoid 2 4 3 Flush Valve Urinals ASME A112 19 2 white vitreous china wall mounted wall outlet siphon jet integral trap and extended side shields Provide urinal with
23. 05 C05124 Section 23 05 93 Page 231 of 367 SECTION 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 11 09 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 General Provide field applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein factory applied insulation is specified under the piping duct or equipment to be insulated 1 1 2 Surface Burning Characteristics Unless otherwise specified insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84 NFPA 255 or UL 723 Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to ASTM E 2231 Insulation materials located exterior to the building perimeter are not required to be fire rated 1 1 3 Recycled Materials Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable provided that the materials meets all other requirements of this section The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight Fiberglass 20 25 percent glass cullet by weight Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS Submit the three SD types SD 02 Shop Drawi
24. 150 of 367 2 2 WALL BASE Conform to ASTM F 1861 Type TP thermoplastic rubber or Type TV thermoplastic vinyl Style B coved installed with resilient flooring Provide 4 inch high and a minimum 1 8 inch thick wall base Provide preformed corners in matching height shape and color 2 3 MOULDING Provide tapered mouldings of vinyl or rubber and types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for both edges and transitions of flooring materials specified Provide vertical lip on moulding of maximum 1 4 inch Provide bevel change in level between 1 4 and 1 2 inch with a slope no greater than 1 2 2 4 ADHESIVES Provide adhesives for flooring base and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards 2 5 POLISH FINISH Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to ASTM D 4078 for polish 2 6 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 2 7 MANUFACTURER S COLOR PATTERN AND TEXTURE Provide color pattern and texture for resilient flooring products Provide flooring in any one continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous area from same production run with same shade and pattern PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SURFACE PREPARATION In accordance with manufacturer s recommendations 3 2 PLACING VINYL COMPOSITION TILES Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer s pr
25. 2 1 3 Fasteners 2 1 3 1 Screws ASTM C 1002 Type S steel drill screws ASTM C 954 steel drill screws for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0 033 to 0 112 inch thick 2 1 4 Accessories ASTM C 1047 Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed for intended use Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not acceptable Flanges shall be free of dirt grease and other materials that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment Provide prefinished or job decorated materials 2 1 5 Water Provide clean fresh and potable water PART3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION 3 1 1 Framing and Furring P N 05 C05124 Section 09 29 00 Page 147 of 367 Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board Do not proceed with work until framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board 3 2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified 3 2 1 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840 System VIII or GA 216 3 2 2 Floating Interior Angles Minimize framing by floating corners with single studs and drywall clips Locate the attachment fasteners adjacent to ceiling and wall intersections in accordance with ASTM C 840 System XII or GA 216 for single ply and two ply applicat
26. 2 4 5 Service Sinks ASME A112 19 2 white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger supports minimum dimensions of 22 inches wide by 20 inches front to rear with two supply openings in 10 inch high back Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P trap and stainless steel rim guards as P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 207 of 367 recommended by service sink manufacturer Provide back mounted washerless service sink faucets with vacuum breaker and 0 75 inch external hose threads 2 4 6 Drinking Water Coolers AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger wall hung bubbler style air cooled condensing unit 4 75 gph minimum capacity stainless steel splash receptor and basin and stainless steel cabinet Bubblers shall be controlled by push levers or push bars front mounted or side mounted near the front edge of the cabinet Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin Spouts shall direct water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit Provide ASME A112 6 1M concealed steel pipe chair carriers 2 4 7 Plastic Shower Units IAPMO Z124 1 2 four piece white solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced plastic shower units Units shall be scratch resistant waterproof and reinforced Showerhead water flow rate shall not exceed 1 5 gpm whe
27. 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure Use fittings for solvent cement jointing conforming to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467 2 1 3 Insulating Joints Provide between pipes of dissimilar metals a rubber gasket or other approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling to effectively prevent metal to metal contact between adjacent sections of piping 2 1 4 Accessories Provide flanges connecting pieces transition glands transition sleeves and other adapters as required 2 1 5 Flexible Flanged Coupling Provide flexible flanged coupling applicable for sewage as indicated Use flexible flanged coupling designed for a working pressure of 350 psi 2 2 VALVES AND OTHER PIPING ACCESSORIES 2 2 1 Gate Valves in Valve Vault AWWA C500 and AWWA C509 Valves conforming to AWWA C500 shall be outside screw and yoke rising stem type with double disc gates and flanged ends Valves conforming to P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 361 of 367 AWWA C509 shall be outside screw and yoke rising stem type with flanged ends Provide valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem Bolt and construct stuffing boxes to permit easy removal of parts for repair Use valves from one manufacturer 2 2 2 Check Valves Less Than 4 Inch Diameter Neoprene ball check valve with integral hydraulic sealing flange designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175
28. 23 4 1 Insulating Gass oS 083523 1 4 Installation Drawings DO o oO o o1 Overhead Coiling Doos o O E SSCSC C S s iSSC CSC E SSCS 23 Counterbalancing Mechanism p4 Electric Door Operators O O oO o i4 Operation and Maintenance Manuais 087100 1 2 Hardware Schede ooo o o o SoS P25 Keying System SSCS C 2 Hardware tems OOOO SSS p43 __ KeyBiting SCS SSCS 092900 2 1 Asbestos Free Materials Oo oS 21 Material Safety Data Sheets O O o 09 6500 2 7 Resilient Flooring Products SSCS C I Surface Preparation OOOO 099000 21 Coins 21 Manufacturer s Technical Data Sheets Pa e OOCOCOCOCOCCCC dY M2 Applicators Qualifications O Oo 02113 __ Toilet Partition System o o f6 CoorsandFimishes O OOOO 02813 2 12 Finishes o oS C p2 Accessoryltems SSCS 104416 21 Fire Extinguishers O oOo o Ppa Accessories O O O SS C Ps Wabes OO OOOO SSS B21 Replacement Paris OSS 33419 1 5 2 Manufacturer s Qualifications o OO I Detail Drawings O OSS 243 Manufacturer s color charts and chips 151 installation of Roof and Wall Panels SSS 1 6 Shipping Handling and Storage lt BDI Manufacturer s Warranty O O o D2 Contractors Warranty for Installation
29. 273 requires that electric lamps including incandescent fluorescent neon and high intensity discharge mercury vapor high low pressure sodium metal halide lamps that are no longer of use be recycled or treated as hazardous waste The Contractor shall not dispose of any used electric lamps as solid waste The Contractor shall recycle all waste electric lamps generated as a result of this work only at a licensed recycling facility 3 METALS Unless noted otherwise scrap metal shall not be land filled or treated as hazardous waste Recycle all scrap metal by smelting or any other acceptable recycling process Scrap metal includes ductwork light fixture housings pipe mechanical and electrical equipment doors and frames etc 4 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer with signed and fully executed originals of all hazardous waste profiles test results hazardous waste manifests and or other shipping papers electric lamp disposal documents and all other required documentation Maximum payment retention shall be withheld until this documentation is received End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 56 90 Page 41 of 367 SECTION 01 62 00 STAGING AREAS AND ACCESS 1 LOCATION The Contractor shall store materials and operate equipment within the confines of the staging area identified by the Government Storage of materials outside of the staging area will not be permitted 2 COORDINATION Two weeks
30. 3 Aggregates ASTM C 33 C 33M Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0 08 percent at 16 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C 1260 Should the test data indicate an expansion of 0 08 percent or greater reject the aggregate s or perform additional testing using ASTM C 1567 using the Contractor s proposed mix design In this case include the mix design low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials 1 GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious 2 Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of a 30 percent if Si02 AI203 Fe203 is 65 percent or more b 25 percent if Si02 A1203 Fe203 is 70 percent or more c 20 percent if Si02 A1203 Fe203 is 80 percent or more d 15 percent if S102 A1203 Fe203 is 90 percent or more If a combination of these materials is chosen the minimum amount must be a linear combination of the minimum amounts above Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 0 08 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1567 Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C 295 2 4 3 1 Aggregates Combined Aggregate Gradati
31. 31 16 Page 331 of 367 3 3 2 Verification Before work starts verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree 3 3 3 Foundation Exterior Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of foundation walls grade beams and similar structures 3 3 4 Utilities and Vents Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts and vents water and sewer lines and plumbing have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application 3 3 5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application 3 3 6 Application Plan Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the specified treatment 3 4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT 3 4 1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application calibration tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating within the manuf
32. 5 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1 2 2 5 1 Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Steel UL 360 2 2 6 Fittings for Metal Conduit EMT and Flexible Metal Conduit UL 514B Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium or zinc coated in accordance with UL 514B 2 2 6 1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Threaded type Split couplings unacceptable P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 278 of 367 2 2 6 2 Fittings for EMT Steel compression type 2 2 7 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit NEMA TC 3 for PVC and UL 514B 2 3 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS UL 514A cadmium or zinc coated if ferrous metal UL 514C if nonmetallic 2 4 CABINETS JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES Volume greater than 100 cubic inches UL 50 hot dip zinc coated if sheet steel 2 5 WIRES AND CABLES Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation jacket and conductor specified or indicated Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used 2 5 1 Conductors Conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid except that conductors for remote control alarm and signal circuits classes 1 2 and 3 shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper unless indicated otherwise All conductors shall be copper 2 5 1 1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements Wh
33. 84 Enclose insulation completely within slat faces on interior surface of slats 2 1 2 Insulated Curtains Form Curtains from manufacturer s standard shapes of interlocking slats Supply slat system with a minimum R value of 4 when calculated in accordance with ASHRAE FUN IP Slats to consist of a urethane or polystyrene core not less than 11 16 inch thick completely enclosed within metal facings Exterior face of slats must be the same gauge as specified for curtains Interior face must be not lighter than 0 0219 inches The insulated slat assembly is to have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke development factor of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 1 3 Curtain Bottom Bar Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer s standard steel stainless and aluminum extrusions not less than 2 0 by 2 0 inches by 0 188 inch Steel extrusions must conform to ASTM A 36 A 36M Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666 Type 304 Aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or ASTM B 221M Galvanize angles P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 129 of 367 and fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653 A 653M and ASTM A 924 A 924M Coat welds and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780 2 1 4 Locks Provide end and or wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27 A 27M Grade B galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 A 653M ASTM A 153 A 153M and ASTM A 924 A 924M and secure
34. 900 except high efficiency particulate air filters of 99 97 percent efficiency by the DOP Test Method shall be as listed under the label service and shall meet the requirements of UL 586 2 4 5 Coil Frost Protection Each circuit shall be provided with a coil frost protection system which is a manufacturer s standard The coil frost protection system shall use a temperature sensor in the suction line of the compressor to shut the compressor off when coil frosting occurs Timers shall be used to prevent the compressor from rapid cycling 2 4 6 Mixing Boxes Mixing boxes shall match the base unit in physical size and shall include equally sized flanged openings each capable of full air flow Arrangement shall be as indicated 2 4 7 Cabinet Construction Casings for the specified unitary equipment shall be constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum structural members Minimum thickness of single wall exterior surfaces shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or 0 071 inch thick aluminum on units with a capacity above 20 tons and 20 gauge galvanized steel or 0 064 inch thick aluminum on units with a capacity less than 20 tons Casing shall be fitted with lifting provisions access panels or doors fan vibration isolators electrical control panel corrosion resistant components structural support members insulated condensate drip pan and drain and internal insulation in the cold section of the casing Where doubl
35. AISC 350 with the design and fabrication of steel stairs other than a commercial product 2 7 2 Materials Provide steel stairs of welded construction except that bolts may be used where welding is not practicable Screw or screw type connections are not permitted P N 05 C05124 Section 05 50 00 Page 103 of 367 a Structural Steel ASTM A 36 A 36M b Support metal pan for concrete fill on angle cleats welded to stringers or treads with integral cleats welded or bolted to the stringer Close exposed ends c Before fabrication obtain necessary field measurements and verify drawing dimensions d Clean metal surfaces free from mill scale flake rust and rust pitting prior to shop finishing Weld permanent connections Finish welds flush and smooth on surfaces that will be exposed after installation PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Install items at locations indicated according to manufacturer s instructions The Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before fabrication 3 2 WORKMANSHIP Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles and true curves Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces Welding shall be continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted Exposed connections of work in place shall not be tack welded Exposed welds shall be ground smooth E
36. BUILT DRAWINGS 1 GENERAL Maintain one full size set of contract drawings to record variations from the original design All deviations shall be neatly and clearly marked in RED on these drawings to show work and or materials actually provided As Built drawings shall be updated as work progresses and kept at the work site for the duration of the contract These drawings shall be available for Contracting Officer Technical Representative review upon request 2 DISCOVERED UTILITIES Indicate the exact location of any underground utility lines discovered in the course of the work on the As Built drawings 3 PERMITTED VARIATIONS As Built drawings shall reflect the actual construction and materials provided when alternative materials or work methods are allowed in the specifications and or drawings or if the scope is altered by award of bid items subsequent changes or modifications 4 STANDARDS Variations shown on As Built drawings shall be neat clear and in conformance with standard drafting practices Mark ups shall include supplementary notes legends and details necessary to convey the exact representation of construction actually provided To comply with Computer Assisted Design CAD practices only full size AS BUILT Drawings are acceptable 5 SUBMITTAL Submit As Built drawings for Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Acceptance upon completion of the contract Final payment will not be made until all requir
37. Building Systems Manual Chapter IV Section 9 Fabrication and Erection Tolerances 2 3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING 2 3 1 General Clean all framing members to remove loose rust and mill scale Provide 1 shop coat of primer to an average dry film thickness of 1 mil according to SSPC SP 2 Balance of painting and coating procedures must conform to SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC A 2 3 2 Primary Framing Manufacturer s standard structural primary framing system includes transverse and lean to frames rafter rakes and canopy beams sidewall intermediate end wall and corner columns and wind bracing designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements Provide frames with attachment plates bearing plates and splice members Provide frame span and spacing indicated Shop fabricate framing components by welding or by using high strength bolts to the indicated size and section with base plates bearing plates stiffeners and other items required Cut form punch drill and weld framing for bolted field erection a Rigid Clear Span Frames I shaped frame sections fabricated from shop welded built up steel plates or structural steel shapes Interior columns are not permitted for building frame support b Frame Configuration One directional sloped d Exterior Column Type Uniform depth e Rafter Type Uniform depth 2 3 3 Secondary Framing Manufacturer s standard secondary framing members including purlins girts eave struts flange bra
38. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM P7825 1 5 1 1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM P7825 Where the terms listed or approved appear in this specification they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825 The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement 1 5 1 2 Testing Services or Laboratories Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir UL Electrical Constructn or FM P7825 1 5 2 Standard Products Provide materials equipment and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as UL or FM and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification Select material from one manufacturer where possible and not a combination of manufacturers for any particular classification of materials 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather humidity and temperature variation dirt and dust and other contaminants 1 7 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS 1 7 1 Spare Parts Furnish the following spare parts and accessories a 2 audiovisual devices of each type installed b 4 fuses for each
39. Framing Clean all exposed structural framing at completion of installation Remove metal shavings filings bolts and wires from work area Remove grease and oil films excess sealants handling marks contamination from steel wool fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents creases waves scratch marks solder or weld marks and damage to the finish coating 3 10 2 Metal Panels Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation Remove metal shavings filings nails bolts and wires from work area Remove protective coverings films grease and oil films excess sealants handling marks contamination from steel wool fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents creases waves scratch marks solder or weld marks and damage to the finish coating 3 10 3 Touch Up Painting After erection promptly clean prepare and prime or re prime field connections rust spots and abraded surfaces of prime painted structural framing and accessories Clean and touch up paint with manufacturer s touch up paint 3 11 WASTE MANAGEMENT Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan placing copper materials ferrous materials and galvanized sheet metal in designated areas for reuse Close and seal tightly all partly used adhesives and solvents store protected in a well ventilated fire safe area at moderate temperature
40. INSTALLATION Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements bracing supports framing gasketing sealing and fastening to provide rigid construction and freedom from vibration airflow induced motion and noise and excessive deflection at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by a rigid sheet metal collar and sealed to building construction with elastomers for complete air tightness Provide outside air intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with soldered watertight joints Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with the building construction piping or equipment Make plenum anchorage provisions sheet metal joints and other areas airtight and watertight by calking mating galvanized steel and concrete surfaces with a two component elastomer 3 3 APPLICATION 3 3 1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ducts P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 249 of 367 Weld angle iron frames at corners and ends whenever possible Angle iron reinforcements shall be riveted or welded to ducts not more than 6 inches on center with not less than two points of attachment Spot welding where used shall be 3 inches on center Standard seam joints shall be sealed with an elastomer compound to comply with SMACNA 1966 Seal Class A B or C as applicable Crossbreaking shall be limited to 4 feet and shall be provided on all ducts 8 inches wid
41. Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or sanding b Metal and Other Non Porous Surfaces Remove excess sealant with a solvent moistened cloth End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 116 of 367 SECTION 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Doors G Frames G Show elevations construction details metal gages hardware provisions and installation details SD 03 Product Data Doors G Frames G Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature for doors and frames Include data and details on door construction panel internal reinforcement insulation and door edge construction When custom hollow metal doors are provided in lieu of standard steel doors provide additional details and data sufficient for comparison to SDI DOOR A250 8 requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS SDI DOOR A250 8 except as specified otherwise Prepare doors to receive door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00 Undercut where indicated Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water intrusion Doors shall be 1 3 4 inch thick unless otherwise indicated 2 1 1 Classification Level Performance M
42. Lamp diameter code T 4 T 5 T 8 T 12 tube configuration twin quad triple base type and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires b Lamp type wattage bulb type ED17 BD56 etc and coating clear or coated for HID luminaires c Start type preheat rapid start instant start for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires d ANSI ballast type M98 M57 etc for HID luminaires e Correlated color temperature CCT and color rendering index CRI for all luminaires All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs 2 11 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein 3 1 1 Lamps Lamps of the type wattage and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated
43. Measurement Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate Application Equipment A listing of equipment to be used Warranty Copy of Contractor s warranty SD 07 Certificates Qualifications Qualifications and state license number of the termiticide applicator 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor s licensing certification and record keeping Maintain daily records using Pest Management Maintenance Record DD Form 1532 1 and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative These forms may be obtained from the main web site http www dtic mil whs directives infomegt forms ddforms 1500 1999 htm P N 05 C05124 Section 31 31 16 Page 328 of 367 Upon completion of this work submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532 identifying target pest type of operation brand name and manufacturer of pesticide formulation concentration or rate of application used 1 2 1 Qualifications For the application of pesticides use the services of a subcontractor whose principal business is pest control The subcontractor shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control 1 2 2 Safety Requirements Formulate treat and dispose of te
44. N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 346 of 367 wood blocks or bulkheads Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 2 1 2 feet 3 1 1 4 Installation of Tracer Wire Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations 3 1 1 5 Connections to Existing Water Lines Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped 3 1 1 6 Penetrations Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided with ductile iron wall sleeves Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic 3 1 1 7 Flanged Pipe Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in valve pits 3 1 2 Installation of Water Service Piping 3 1 2 1 Location Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed Where building service has not been installed terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building line at the points indicated such w
45. NFPA 90A and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations 2 2 6 Electric Power 2 2 6 1 Primary Power Provide primary power for the FACP from the normal AC service to the building where shown on the drawings Power shall be 120 VAC service transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of circuits and devices Make the service connection for the FACP at the a main distribution panel where shown Provide appropriate equipment to protect against power surges Provide a separate NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure for the circuit breaker The circuit breaker enclosure shall be painted red marked FIRE ALARM SYSTEM provided with a red and white engraved plastic sign permanently affixed to the face of the switch and provided with a lockable handle or cover 2 2 7 Emergency Power Supply Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure Transfer from normal to auxiliary secondary power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm 2 2 7 1 Batteries Provide sealed maintenance free lead calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the
46. Officer s Technical Representative so that conflicts may be reconciled before placing concrete Anchors and embedded items must be positioned and supported with appropriate accessories Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete and as follows Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and sufficiently heavy to carry the reinforcement they support and in accordance with ACI MCP 4 and CRSI 1OMSP Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire Wire must be black soft iron wire not less than 16 gage With the exception of temperature reinforcement tied to main steel approximately 24 inches on center reinforcement must be accurately placed securely tied at intersections with 18 gage annealed wire and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers chairs or other approved supports Point wire tie ends away from the form Unless otherwise indicated numbers type and spacing of supports must conform to ACI MCP 3 Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted only as specified in and ACI MCP 4 3 5 10 Spacing of Reinforcing Bars Spacing must be as indicated If not indicated spacing must be in accordance with the ACI MCP 3 Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid int
47. P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 130 of 367 2 2 1 Guides Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer s standard angles or channels of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain to allow curtain to operate smoothly and to withstand loading Slot bolt holes for track adjustment 2 2 2 Equipment Supports Fabricate door operating equipment supports from the manufacturer s standard steel shapes and plates conforming to ASTM A 36 A 36M galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 A 653M and ASTM A 924 A 924M Size the shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards for the size weight and type of door installation 2 3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer s standard mechanism with an adjustable tension steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings Use grease sealed or self lubricating bearings for rotating members 2 3 1 Brackets Provide the manufacturer s standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold rolled steel with one located at each end of the counterbalance barrel conforming to ASTM A 48 A 48M 2 3 2 Counterbalance Barrels Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer s standard hot formed structural quality welded or seamless carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53 A 53M of sufficient diameter
48. Page 121 of 367 Structural calculations for deflection G SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Windows frames and glazing Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation adjustments cleaning and maintenance 1 3 QUALITY CONTROL 1 3 1 Shop Drawing Requirements Drawings shall indicate elevations of windows and frames full size sections thickness and gages of metal fastenings proposed method of anchoring size and spacing of anchors details of construction method of glazing mullion details method and materials for weatherstripping material and method of attaching subframes trim installation details and other related items 1 3 2 Sample Requirements 1 3 2 1 Finish Sample Requirements Submit color chart of standard factory finish color coatings 1 4 WARRANTY 1 4 1 System Warranty Manufacturer shall provide a Standard two year warranty on thermal framing against failure resulting from the following Longitudinal or transverse thermal barrier shrinkage Thermal barrier cracking Structural failure of the thermal barrier material Loss of adhesion or loss of prescribed edge pressure on the glazed material resulting in excessive air and water infiltration 1 4 2 Warranty for Insulating Glass Units Standard Warranty insulating glass units against development of material obstruction to vision such as dust fogging or film formation on the inner glass surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal other tha
49. Page 181 of 367 Sheet Metal Accessories Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to the design dimensions metal and other characteristics of item indicated a Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems b End Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat lock seams Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer Rivet joints for additional strength c Sealed Joints Form non expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards d Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view e Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA or by metal building system manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured 1 5 10 Finishes Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes Appearance of Finished Work Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast 1 6 SHIPPING HANDLING AND STORAGE 1 6 1 Delivery Package and deliver components sh
50. Plastic Piping with Elastomeric Gasket Joints P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 343 of 367 Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure unless otherwise shown or specified c Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Piping with Solvent Cement Joints Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure 2 1 1 2 Insulating Joints Joints between pipe of dissimilar metals shall have a rubber gasketed or other suitable approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling which will effectively prevent metal to metal contact between adjacent sections of piping 2 1 2 Water Service Line Appurtenances 2 1 2 1 Gate Valves Smaller Than 3 Inch Size in Valve Pits MSS SP 80 Class 150 solid wedge inside screw rising stem Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections with a union on one side of the valve and a handwheel operator 2 1 2 2 Curb Boxes Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop Curb boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the stop on which it is to be used Provide a round head Cast the word WATER on the lid Each box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint 2 1 2 3 Valve Boxes Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping Val
51. Provide a panel clearance of not more than 1 2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile joints Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall brackets Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane Equip each door with hinges one door latch and one coat hook and bumper Align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors a Secure panels to hollow plastered walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1 4 20 screws of the length required for the wall thickness Toggle bolts must have a load carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor b Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow concrete masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1 4 20 screws of the length required for the wall thickness Toggle bolts must have a load carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor c Secure panels to solid masonry or concrete with lead or brass expansion shields designed for use with not less than 1 4 20 screws with a shield length of not less than 1 1 2 inch Expansion shields must have a load carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor 3 3 FLOOR ANCHORED PARTITIONS Secure pilaster
52. Requirements 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition Store and handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion deformation and other types of damage Do not use P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 94 of 367 decking for storage or as working platform until units have been fastened into position Exercise care not to damage material or overload decking during construction Must not exceed the design live load The maximum uniform distributed storage load Stack decking on platforms or pallets and cover with weathertight ventilated covering Elevate one end during storage to provide drainage Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust Repair deck finish using touch up paint Replace damaged material 1 4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR DECKS 1 4 1 Properties of Sections Properties of metal deck sections must comply with engineering design width as limited by the provisions of AISI SG 913 1 4 2 Allowable Loads Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2 1 1 Steel Sheet Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality thickness not less than indicated meeting the requirements of AISI SG03 3 except as modified herein 2 1 2 Steel Coating ASTM A 653 A 653M designation G90 galvanized or ASTM A 792 A 792M designation AZ55 aluminum zinc alloy Apply coating to both sides of sheet Conform to UL
53. SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 07 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section 1 2 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100 b Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions c Total harmonic distortion THD is the root mean square RMS of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS Data drawings and reports shall employ the terminology classifications and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB 9 as applicable for the lighting system specified SD 03 Product Data Fluorescent lighting fixtures G Fluorescent electronic ballasts G Fluorescent lamps G High intensity discharge HID lighting fixtures G HID ballasts G Metal halide lamps G Photocell switch G P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 291 of 367 Exit signs G Energy Efficiency SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 73 00
54. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Submit Material Equipment and Fixture Lists and Records of Existing Conditions in accordance with paragraph entitled General Requirements of this section SD 02 Shop Drawings Duct Supports Submit the following in accordance with paragraph entitled Drawings of this section Connection Diagrams Record Drawings SD 03 Product Data Submit manufacturer s catalog data for the following items Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials Mill Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings Turning Vanes P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 244 of 367 Flexible Connectors Flexible Duct Materials Power Operated Dampers Manual Volume Dampers SD 06 Test Reports Ductwork Leakage Tests SD 07 Certificates Submit certificates showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section for Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials Mill Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings Turning Vanes Dampers Flexible Connectors SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Power Operated Dampers 1 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of Contractor s survey of work area conditions and features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing cond
55. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Wood cellulose fiber mulch Fertilizer Include physical characteristics and recommendations SD 07 Certificates State certification and approval for seed 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 4 1 Delivery 1 4 1 1 Seed Protection Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery on site storage and handling 1 4 1 2 Fertilizer and Lime Delivery Deliver to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer s chemical analysis name trade name trademark and indication of conformance to state and federal laws Instead P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 335 of 367 of containers fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information 1 4 2 Storage 1 4 2 1 Seed Fertilizer and Lime Storage Store in cool dry locations away from contaminants 1 4 2 2 Topsoil Prior to stockpiling topsoil treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non selective herbicide Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil 1 4 2 3 Handling Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles 1 5 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS 1 5 1 Restrictions Do not plant when the ground is frozen snow covered muddy or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit 1 6 TIME LIMITATIONS 1 6 1 Seed Apply seed within twenty four hours after see
56. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement If cast iron water closet floor flanges are used the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1 1 2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed 3 1 4 3 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 216 of 367 Where pipes fixture drains floor drains cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing a groove 1 4 to 1 2 inch wide by 1 4 to 3 8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe fitting or drain The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified 3 1 4 4 Pipe Penetrations Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air insects and vermin 3 1 5 Supports 3 1 5 1 General Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignmen
57. Training O O 024100 152 Existing Conditions J O o o f7 Demolition Plan SSS 131 Notifications SSCS SSCS 033000 15 1 2 Reinforcing Steel SCS SSCS P P47 Materials for curing concrete SOSCS idCSCSC CSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSC C S Peat cement OSC iSSSOSOSOSOSOSCSCSC S 2 413 Portland Cement SSCS 2 32 Ready MixConerete SS S SSCS 2 46 VaporBarer OOOO O S 233 Concrete Curing Materias JO O OOo s Remtoremem O O O S TS Reinforcement Materials oO o 31 Concrete Mix Design SSCS SSCS 3 11 23 Compressive Strength tes O O O o 31124 Arcom O oS 2410 Biodegradable Form Release Agent SSCS 052119 142 Welder Qualification O oO P T42 Material Safety Data She OOOO Ai SteelJoist Framing OOOO O OO pai Acessories o o OOOO T42 Centfication of Compliance Sid O s300 22 Accessories SSS S O PIS Galvanizing Repair Pam O OSS 226 Mechanical Fasteners O O O i22 Welding Procedures SCS SSCS 055000 27 Steels SoS Poa Handrails S SS S S SC r 072116 2 1 Blanket Insulation P N 05 C05124 Page 46 of 367 078400 2 1 Firestopping Materials OOOO 0792 00 2 1 Seams I SSCS 22 Primes SSS 23 Bond Breakers J o a Baksos O OSS 081113 2 1 Dos O Too oS 23 Fams SSCS SOS 081116 1 31 Windowsand Frames DO Oo oS T321 FimishSampe o oOo ooo
58. allow form deflection or do not spall concrete upon removal Portion of form ties remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts must be at least 1 1 2 inches back from concrete surface Provide form ties that are free of devices that leave a hole larger than 7 8 inch or less than 1 2 inch in diameter in concrete surface Form ties fabricated at the project site or wire ties of any type are not acceptable 3 3 9 Tolerances for Form Construction Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior to patching and finishing of formed surfaces provide concrete surfaces in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI MCP 1 and ACI MCP 2 3 4 FORMED SURFACES 3 4 1 Preparation of Form Surfaces Coat contact surfaces of forms with form coating compound before reinforcement is placed Provide a commercial formulation form coating compound that does not bond with stain nor P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 73 of 367 adversely affect concrete surfaces and impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces that entails bonding or adhesion nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds Do not allow excess form coating compound to stand in puddles in the forms nor to come in contact with concrete against which fresh concrete is placed Make thinning of form coating compound with thinning agent of the type in the amount and under the conditions recommended by form coating compound manufacturer s prin
59. and fasteners shall be approved for the application Hardened high carbon spring steel fasteners fitted onto beams and miscellaneous structural steel are acceptable upon prior approval of each proposed application and upon field demonstration of P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 253 of 367 conformance to specification requirements Fasteners shall be made from steel conforming to AISI Type 1055 treated and finished in conformance with SAE AMS 2480 Type Z zinc phosphate base Class 2 supplementary treatment A 72 hour load carrying capacity shall be verified by a certified independent laboratory Hanger spacing shall provide a 20 to 1 safety factor for supported load Maximum load supported by any two fasteners shall be 100 pounds Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable Ductwork and equipment shall not be hung from roof deck piping or other ducts or equipment Maximum span between any two points shall be 10 feet with lesser spans as required by duct assemblies interferences and permitted loads imposed There shall be not less than one set of hangers for each point of support Hangers shall be installed on both sides of all duct turns branch fittings and transitions Hangers shall be sufficiently cross braced to eliminate sway vertically and laterally Rectangular ducts up to 36 inches shall be supported by strap type hangers attached at not less than three places to not less than two duct surfaces in different planes
60. and spatter from surfaces immediately after welding Exposed screws or bolts will be permitted only in inconspicuous locations and shall have countersunk heads Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place 2 3 3 Anchors On the backs of subframes provide anchors of the sizes and shapes required for securing subframes to adjacent construction Place anchors near top and bottom of each jamb and at points not more than 12 inch apart 2 3 4 Glazing 2 3 4 1 Insulating Glass Unit Two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated 1 2 inch airspace filled with argon and hermetically sealed Glazed systems including frames shall be Energy Star labeled products as appropriate to climate zone and as applicable to window type with a whole window Solar Heat Gain Coefficient SHGC maximum of 0 31 determined according to NFRC 200 procedures Glazed panels and curtain walls shall have a U factor maximum of 0 22 Btu per square foot x hr x degrees F in accordance with NFRC 100 Glazing shall meet or exceed a luminous efficacy of 1 0 Glazed panels shall be rated for not less than 30 Sound Transmission Class STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413 Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR 1200 The units shall meet CBA Grade requirement when tested in accordance with ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774 Class A Spacer shall be black roll formed steel reinforced butyl rubber with be
61. and wall thickness to support rolled up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0 03 inch per foot of span under full load 2 3 3 Spring Balance One or more oil tempered heat treated steel helical torsion springs installed within the barrel capable of producing sufficient torque to assure easy operation of the door curtain Provide and size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast steel barrel plugs 2 3 4 Torsion Rod for Counter Balance Fabricate rod from the manufacturer s standard cold rolled steel sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 131 of 367 2 4 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70 Electric door operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities recommended and provided by the door manufacturer for specified doors Assemblies must be complete with electric motors and factory prewired motor controls starter gear reduction units solenoid operated brakes clutch remote control stations manual or automatic control devices and accessories as required for proper operation of the doors Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the limit switch adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary oper
62. authorize field adjustments Field adjustments are those alterations that do not affect time price or intent of the contract documents All field adjustments shall be documented in the Daily Reports and on the As Built Drawings End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 04 10 Page 12 of 367 SECTION 01 06 30 BUILDING PERMITS 1 NO BUILDING PERMITS from state or local governments are required for work performed on federal property Courtesy permits may be obtained at the Contractor s option No payment will be made to the Contractor for any permit cost Design changes to obtain courtesy permits even at no cost will not be allowed without written approval of the Contracting Officer End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 06 30 Page 13 of 367 SECTION 01 06 70 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS l Unless directed by other sections of this specification the Contractor will not be responsible for obtaining environmental permits End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 06 70 Page 14 of 367 SECTION 01 20 00 PROJECT MEETINGS 1 LOCATION Project meetings will be conducted either on site or with a conference call The following meetings may be held 1 1 Pre Construction Conference After award of a contract the Coast Guard will arrange a conference with the contractor and necessary Coast Guard personnel The purpose of this conference is to orient the Contractor to Government procedures for wage rates contractual and
63. be approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative before being posted 2 2 9 11 Walk Test The FACP shall have a walk test feature When using this feature operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer but no other outputs occur 2 2 9 12 History Logging P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 308 of 367 In addition to the required printer output the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log These events shall be stored in a battery protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory 2 2 9 13 RS 232 C Output Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type cathode ray tubes CRTs printers and or modems The output shall be paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS 232 C connection with a baud rate of 1200 or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT printer or modem 2 2 10 Amplifiers Any amplifiers digitalized voice generators and other hardware necessary for a complete operational textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm control unit terminal cabinet or in the fire alarm control panel The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers
64. bearing of adequate size to withstand imposed loads Oil lubricate bearings 2 3 5 Pump and Motor Use pump and motor assembled on a single stainless steel shaft in a heavy duty cast iron shell Use free standing pump support legs of cast iron providing enough clearance for the solids to get into the grinder 2 4 PUMP MOTOR Provide submersible sewage pumps in wet well NEMA MG 1 3450 RPM 208 volt 3 phase and 60 Hz cycle and for submersible pumps Motor horsepower shall be not less than pump horsepower at any point on the pump performance curve Fit motors with lifting eyes capable of supporting entire weight of pump and motor 2 5 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM Provide a sealed mercury float switch control system as indicated Automatically alternate operation from one pump to the other and start second pump in the event first pump cannot handle incoming flow Provide manual on off switch for each pump Provide independent P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 363 of 367 adjustable high and low water level switches Provide floats supports and alarm Metal parts if used shall be of bronze or equivalent corrosion resistant material 2 5 1 Float Assembly Description Use a direct acting float switch consisting of a normally open mercury switch enclosed in a float Use pipe mounted float assembly Use float molded of rigid high density polyurethane foam color coded and coated with a durable water and corrosion resistant jacket of clear ur
65. duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of concrete mix Do not start placing of concrete in supporting elements until concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic and has been in place a minimum of 2 hours 3 7 9 Placing Concrete Slabs Place and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation within the limits of approved construction joints until placing of panel or section is completed During concrete placing operations consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs and against bulkheads of slabs on ground by mechanical vibrators as specified Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds roller pipe screeds or other approved method Limit consolidation operations to time necessary to obtain consolidation of concrete without bringing an excess of fine aggregate to the surface Concrete to be consolidated must be as dry as practical and surfaces thereof must not be manipulated prior to finishing operations Bring concrete correct level with a straightedge and struck off Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface leaving it free of humps or hollows Sprinkling of water on plastic surface is not permitted
66. equipment ducts crossing building expansion joints and fan inlets and outlets shall be connected to upstream and downstream components by treated woven cloth connectors Connectors shall be installed only after system fans are operative and vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted When system fans are operating connectors shall be free of wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan reaction Width of surface shall be curvilinear 3 3 2 Round Sheet Metal Ducts 3 3 2 1 Duct Gages Joints And Reinforcement Sheet metal minimum thickness joints and reinforcement between joints shall be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 Longitudinal duct joint shall be manufactured by machine with spiral lockseams to and including 60 inch diameters and to dimensional tolerances compatible with fittings provided Ducts shall have supplemental girth angle supports riveted with solid rivets 6 inches on center to duct Girth angles shall be located as follows P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 252 of 367 DIAMETER INCHES REINFORCEMENT MAXIMUM SPACING INCHES 25 to 36 1 1 4 by 1 1 4 1 8 thick 72 inches on center 37 to 50 1 1 4 by 1 1 4 1 8 thick 60 inches on center 51 to 60 1 1 2 by 1 1 2 1 8 thick 48 inches on center Draw band girth joints are not acceptable Slip joints shall be made up by coating the male fitting with elastomer sealing materials exercising care to
67. event of the failure of primary power 2 2 7 2 Capacity Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under supervisory and trouble conditions including audible trouble signal devices for 60 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 30 minutes Batteries to be located in bottom of cabinet fire alarm panel or separate battery storage 2 2 7 3 Battery Chargers Provide a solid state fully automatic variable charging rate battery charger The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge In the event the batteries are fully discharged the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 305 of 367 2 2 8 System Field Wiring 2 2 8 1 Wiring Within Cabinets Enclosures Boxes Junction Boxes and Fittings Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box enclosure or cabinet Conductors which are terminated spliced or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure cabinet mounting or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diag
68. fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets For vertical surfaces protect forms from direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set 3 7 7 Follow up Check concrete within 24 hours of placement for flatness levelness and other specified tolerances Adjust formwork and placement techniques on subsequent pours to achieve specified tolerances 3 7 8 Placing Concrete in Forms Deposit concrete placed in forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches P N 05 C05 124 Section 03 30 00 Page 79 of 367 Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached elevation of spreaders Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading rodding or tamping Design vibrators to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete and maintain a speed of not less than 9 000 impulses per minute when submerged in concrete Provide vibrating equipment adequate in number of units and power of each unit to properly consolidate concrete Vibration of forms and reinforcement is not permitted Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than visible effectiveness of machine Do not insert vibrator into lower courses of concrete that have begun to set At each insertion limit
69. form an effective barrier against the spread of flame smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls partitions floors and ceiling floor assemblies including through penetrations and construction joints and gaps Through penetrations include the annular space around pipes tubes conduit wires cables and vents Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion contraction wind or seismic movement firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the joint Gaps requiring firestopping include the gaps between the top of fire rated walls and the roof or floor deck above PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured asbestos free noncombustible products FM P7825a approved or UL listed for use with applicable construction and penetrating items complying with the following minimum requirements 2 1 1 Fire Hazard Classification Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723 Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory P N 05 C05124 Section 07 84 00 Page 108 of 367 2 1 2 Toxicity Material shall be nontoxic to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions 2 1 3 Fire Resistance Rating Firestop systems sha
70. from the building System shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer Belts shall be tightened to proper tension Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions 3 4 REFRIGERANT TESTS CHARGING AND START UP 3 4 1 Contractor s Responsibility Take steps at all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere The steps shall include but not be limited to procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government including material labor and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment material or installation 3 5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS Before each refrigeration system is accepted conduct tests to demonstrate the general operating characteristics of all equipment by a registered professiona
71. hydrostatic testing The amount of leakage on ductile iron pipelines with mechanical joints or push on joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA C600 no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method Test PVC plastic water mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI B 3 for pressure and leakage tests The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA UNI B 3 except that at joints made with sleeve type mechanical couplings no leakage will be allowed Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing No leakage will be allowed at plastic pipe joints flanged joints and screwed joints P N 05 C05 124 Section 33 11 00 Page 348 of 367 3 2 3 Special Testing Requirements For pressure test use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the system except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours Prior to the pressure test fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours For leakage test use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system Leakage test may be performed at the
72. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements as specified SD 03 Product Data Materials and Equipment P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 260 of 367 Manufacturer s standard catalog data at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase or installation of a particular component highlighted to show material size options performance charts and curves etc in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements Data shall include manufacturer s recommended installation instructions and procedures If vibration isolation is specified for a unit vibration isolator literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators provided meet the manufacturer s recommendations Data shall be submitted for each specified component Spare Parts Spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified Posted Instructions Posted instructions at least 2 weeks prior to construction completion including equipment layout wiring and control diagrams piping valves and control sequences and typed condensed operation instructions The condensed operation instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system The posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and be posted where indicated by the Con
73. including but not limited to mechanical equipment rooms electrical equipment rooms hospitals power plants missile magazines and other such areas 2 Do not use above grade except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise 3 Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 1 3 3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 1 3 4 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance Plastic coated rigid steel plastic coated steel IMC PVC Type EPC 40 Convert nonmetallic conduit other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 to plastic coated rigid or IMC steel conduit before rising through floor slab Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor 3 1 3 5 Conduit Support Support conduit by pipe straps wall brackets hangers or ceiling trapeze Fasten by wood screws to wood by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick and by machine screws welded threaded studs or spring tension clamps on steel work Threaded C clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one fourth proof test load
74. installation with relation to the building construction 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1 1 D1 1M Use procedures materials and equipment of the type required for the work PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2 1 1 Structural Carbon Steel ASTM A 36 A 36M 2 1 2 Structural Tubing ASTM A 500 2 1 3 Steel Pipe ASTM A 53 A 53M Type E or S Grade B P N 05 C05124 Section 05 50 00 Page 100 of 367 2 1 4 Fittings for Steel Pipe Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47 A 47M 2 1 5 Anchor Bolts ASTM A 307 Where exposed shall be of the same material color and finish as the metal to which applied 2 1 5 1 Expansion Anchors or Adhesive Anchors Provide minimum 1 2 inch diameter expansion anchors or adhesive anchors Minimum concrete or masonry embedment shall be 4 inches Design values listed shall be as tested according to ASTM E 488 2 1 5 2 Lag Screws and Bolts ASME B18 52 1 type and grade best suited for the purpose 2 1 5 3 Toggle Bolts ASME B18 52 1 2 1 5 4 Bolts Nuts Studs and Rivets ASME B18 2 2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307 2 1 5 5 Powder Driven Fasteners Follow safety provisions of ASSE A10 3 2 1 5 6 Screws ASME B18 52 1 ASME B18 6 2 and ASME B18 6 3 2 1 5 7 Washers Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18 22 1 Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels square or rectangular tapered in thickness and smooth Provide lock washers to conform
75. life has been used Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 297 of 367 to turn over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer 3 1 2 Lighting Fixtures Set lighting fixtures plumb square and level with ceiling and walls in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures and secure in accordance with manufacturers directions and approved drawings Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70 Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall mounted fixtures Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and where applicable after coordinating with the type style and pattern of the ceiling being installed Recessed and semi recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3 4 inch metal channels spanning and secured to th
76. limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable 3 12 2 3 Porous Fill Testing Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to gradation specified in ASTM C 33 C 33M 3 12 2 4 Density Tests Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 When ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests are used verify density test results by performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 tested as specified herein Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the start of the job and for every 10 ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests thereafter Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of pavement subgrade in cut Include density test results in daily report a Bedding and backfill in trenches One test per 50 linear feet in each lift End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 327 of 367 SECTION 31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Termiticides Manufacturer s label and Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS for termiticides proposed for use Verification of
77. manufacturer to meet the performance requirements 2 6 4 Rivets Rivets to be closed end type corrosion resistant coated steel aluminum or stainless steel where watertight connections are required 2 6 5 Attachment Clips Fabricate clips from steel hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 A 653M or Series 300 stainless steel Size shape thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and design load criteria specified 2 7 FRAMES AND MATERIALS FOR OPENINGS 2 7 1 Coiling Doors Coordinate with coiling door manufacturer to provide necessary framing for doors beyond the standard framing provided by the door manufacturer 2 8 ACCESSORIES 2 8 1 General All accessories to be compatible with the metal panels sheet metal flashing trim metal closure strips caps and similar metal accessories must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the metal panels Exposed metal accessories finishes to match the panels furnished except as otherwise indicated Molded foam rib ridge and other closure strips to be non absorbent closed cell or solid cell synthetic rubber or pre molded neoprene to match configuration of the panels 2 8 2 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties Aluminum or Steel ventilators wall louvers and other miscellaneous roof and wall equipment or penetrations conforming to AAMA ASTM and UL P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 192 of 367 2 8 3 Insulation Faced Glass Fiber Bla
78. materials delivered to site for damage Unload and store with minimum handling Store materials in enclosures or under protective covering Store rubber gaskets not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight Do not store materials directly on the ground Keep interior of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris 1 3 2 Handling Handle pipe fittings valves and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition Carry pipe to the trench do not drag it 1 4 EXCAVATION TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Provide in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL except as specified herein PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPE AND FITTINGS Provide pressure piping air release valves and related accessories for force main piping outside the sewage wet well in accordance with Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS 2 1 1 Ductile Iron Pipe AWWA C151 thickness Class 52 2 1 1 1 Flanged Pipe AWWA C115 ductile iron 2 1 1 2 Fittings AWWA C110 flanged Provide flanged joint fittings within wet well and valve vault as indicated Provide mechanical joint fittings outside valve vault enclosure as indicated Use fittings with pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe 2 1 1 3 Joints AWWA C115 for flanged joints Use bolts nuts and gaskets for flanged connections recommended in the Appendix to AWWA C115 Flange for setscrewed flanges shall be of ductile iron ASTM A 536
79. of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government The standard warranty must provide that if within the watranty period the metal building system shows evidence of deterioration resulting from defective materials and or workmanship correcting of any defects is the responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while metal building system is under warranty are to be performed within 32 hours after notification unless additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Failure to perform repairs within 32 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs performed by others and will not void the warranty 1 9 2 Roof System Weather Tightness Warranty Furnish manufacturer s standard no dollar limit warranty for the metal panel system The warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the roof panel system shows evidence of corrosion perforation rupture lost of weather tightness or excess weathering due to deterioration of the panel system resulting from defective materials and correction of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials
80. of exterior surfaces when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square or octagonal except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations as approved Boxes for use in masonry block or tile walls shall be square cornered tile type or standard boxes having square cornered tile type covers Provide gaskets for cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided Support boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and with machine screws or welded studs on steel In open overhead spaces cast boxes threaded to P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 287 of 367 raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers Where bar hangers are used attach bar to raceways on o
81. on a 120 volt 60 hertz normal building power supply Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure internal component placement and operation Visual indication of alarm supervisory or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters of which at least 32 are field changeable 2 2 9 1 Cabinet Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate Lettering on the nameplate shall say Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall not be less than one inch high Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps circuits meters fuses and switches The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing complete with back box hinged steel door with cylinder lock and surface mounting provisions 2 2 9 2 Control Modules Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm supervisory or trouble condition The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw type terminals with each terminal marked for identification Locate diodes and relays if any on screw terminals in the FACP C
82. paragraph entitled General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines of this section with the requirements of AWWA C605 for laying of pipe joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and setting of hydrants valves and fittings and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23 Chapter 7 Installation a Pipe Less Than 4 Inch Diameter 1 Threaded joints shall be made by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by applying an approved thread lubricant then threading the joining members together The joints shall be tightened with strap wrenches which will not damage the pipe and fittings The joint shall be tightened no more than 2 threads past hand tight 2 Push On Joints The ends of pipe for push on joints shall be beveled to facilitate assembly Pipe shall be marked to indicate when the pipe is fully seated The gasket shall be lubricated to prevent displacement Care shall be exercised to ensure that the gasket remains in proper position in the bell or coupling while making the joint 3 Solvent weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer s instructions b Pipe anchorage Provide concrete thrust blocks reaction backing for pipe anchorage Size and position thrust blocks as indicated Use concrete conforming to ASTM C 94 C 94M having a minimum compressive strength of 2 000 psi at 28 days or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement 2 1 2 parts sand and 5 par
83. psi 2 2 3 Identification Tags and Plates Provide valves with tags or plates numbered and stamped for their usage Use plates and tags of brass or nonferrous material and mounted or attached to the valve 2 2 4 Pipe Support Use pipe support schedule 40 galvanized steel piping conforming to ASTM A 53 A 53M Provide either ANSI B16 3 or ANSI B16 11 galvanized threaded fittings 2 2 5 Miscellaneous Metals Use stainless steel bolts nuts washers anchors and supports for installation of equipment 2 2 6 Quick Disconnect System with Hydraulic Sealing Flange Use quick disconnect system consisting of a steel base plate for supporting the pumps a hydraulic sealing flange pump guide rails and the discharge pipe supports Use two guide rails of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 123 A 123M Provide a steel lifting chain for raising and lowering the pump in the basin Build guides onto pump housing to fit the guide post to assure perfect alignment between pump and guide rails 2 2 7 Wet Well Vent Galvanized ASTM A 53 A 53M pipe with insect screening 2 3 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE GRINDER PUMPS Provide submersible sewage pumps with grinder units as shown on the drawings Provide submersible centrifugal sewage pumps of the non clogging type with passageways designed to pass 3 inch diameter spheres without clogging and grinder units capable of grinding all materials found in normal domestic sewage including plastics rubber sanitary napkins di
84. reduction units with either ball or roller bearings P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 33 23 Page 132 of 367 Equip bearings in motors 1 2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service fittings Fit lubrication fittings with color coded plastic or metal dust caps In any motor bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty periods do not need to be lubricated for a given number of operating hours Display this information on an appropriate tag or label on the motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance 2 4 4 Motor Starters Controls and Enclosures Each door motor must have a factory wired unfused disconnect switch a reversing across the line magnetic starter with thermal overload protection 120 volt operating coils with a control transformer limit switch and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as specified herein Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2 Provide adjustable switches electrically interlocked with the motor controls and set to stop the door automatically at the fully open and fully closed position 2 4 5 Control Enclosures Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for oil tight and dust tight NEMA Type 13 2 4 6 Transformer Provide starters with 230 460 to 115 volt control transformers with one secondary fuse when it is required to reduce the voltage on control circuits to 120 volts or less Provide transformer that conforms to NEMA ST 1 2 4 7 Sa
85. relief element of a P amp T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input The temperature element of a P amp T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity Relief valves shall be rated according to CSA AM Z21 22 Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 200 000 Btuh shall have 3 4 inch minimum inlets and 3 4 inch outlets Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200 000 Btuh shall have 1 inch minimum inlets and 1 inch outlets The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet 2 3 2 Thermostatic Mixing Valves Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets Mixing valves thermostatic type pressure balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes The control element shall be of an approved type The body shall be of heavy cast bronze and interior parts shall be brass bronze corrosion resisting steel or copper The valve shall be equipped with necessar
86. shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 262 of 367 Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8 1 2 by 11 inch booklets listing step by step procedures required for system startup operation abnormal shutdown emergency shutdown and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training course The booklets shall include the manufacturer s name model number and parts list The manuals shall include the manufacturer s name model number service manual and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8 1 2 by 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures possible breakdowns and repairs and a trouble shooting guide The manuals shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Because of the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required Carefully investigate the plumbing fire protection electrical structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange such work accordingly furnishi
87. specified to conform to the requirements of ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dland ASME BPVC SEC IX the design fabrication and installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and ASME BPVC SEC IX 3 2 1 Equipment Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ASHRAE 15 amp 34 Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment appurtenances and pipe as required including frames or supports for compressors pumps cooling towers condensers and similar items Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure If mechanical vibration isolators are not provided vibration absorbing foundations shall be provided Each foundation shall include isolation units consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings together with intermediate isolation material Isolators shall be selected and sized based on load bearing requirements and the lowest frequency of vibration to be isolated 3 2 2 Field Painting Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 269 of 367 3 3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING Equipment shall be wiped clean with all traces of oil dust dirt or paint spots removed Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction and new filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed
88. surface mounted electronic multi tone horns that produce a minimum of four distinct sounds suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit Horns shall have a rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet when tested in accordance with UL 464 while emitting a slow whoop tone Output from the horn shall be three pulse temporal pattern Where horns and strobes are provided in the same location they may be combined into a single unit 2 2 13 3 Connections Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification 2 2 14 Automatic Transmitters 2 2 14 1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels Provide radio transmitter with antenna that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm supervisory and trouble conditions via a single transmitter Provide transmitters in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72 Federal Communications Commission FCC 47 CFR 90 Protect the antenna from physical damage Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation which conforms to NFPA 72 Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time 2 2 14 2 Signals To Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station a Manual pull stations b Duct smoke detectors 2 3 NAMEPLATES Major components of equipment shal
89. system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications 1 7 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install concealed valves expansion joints controls dampers and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible through access doors PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 202 of 367 Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II 2 1 1 Pipe Joint Materials Grooved pipe and hubless cast iron soil pipe shall not be used underground Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following a Coupling for Cast Iron Pipe for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74 AWWA C606 For hubless type CISPI 310 b Coupling for Steel Pipe AWWA C606 c Flange Gaskets Gaskets shall be made of non asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16 21 Gaskets shall be flat 1 16 inch thick and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber SBR or Nitro Butadiene Rubber NBR Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR d B
90. termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT Once termiticide application has been completed measure tank contents to determine the remaining volume The total volume measurement of used contents for the application shall equal the established application rate for the project site conditions Provide written verification of the measurements 3 2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the technical representative shall be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites and may be present during treatment application The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be contacted prior to starting work 3 3 SITE PREPARATION Site preparation shall be in accordance with specification covering earthwork and landscaping Work related to final grades landscape plantings foundations or any other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils shall be coordinated with this specification 3 3 1 Ground Preparation Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes form boards and scrap lumber from the site before termiticide application begins P N 05 C05124 Section 31
91. test and all other test for cement aggregates and admixtures in the laboratory test reports Provide maximum nominal aggregate size gradation analysis percentage retained and passing sieve and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size Submit test reports along with the concrete mix design Obtain approval before concrete placement 1 6 CONCRETE SAMPLING AND TESTING Testing by the Contractor must include sampling and testing concrete materials proposed for use in the work and testing the design mix for each class of concrete Perform quality control testing during construction Sample and test concrete aggregate materials proposed for use in the work in accordance with ASTM C 33 C 33M Sample and test portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150 Sample and test air entraining admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 233 Testing must be performed by a Grade I Testing Technician PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS Provide wood plywood or steel Use plywood or steel forms where a smooth form finish is required 2 1 1 Wood Forms Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue and groove boards free of raised grain knotholes or other surface defects Provide plywood that complies with PS1 B B concrete form panels or better or AHA A135 4 hardboard for smooth form lining 2 1 1 1 Concrete Form Plywood Standard Rough Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1 B B concrete form not less than 5 8 inch thick P N 05 C05
92. that the Contractor completes the Daily Report in accordance with Paragraphs 1 and 2 above Any items of dispute or other notes the On Site Representative feels appropriate shall be added to the Daily Report The On Site Representative is also responsible for informing the COTR when the contractor fails to submit daily reports End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 37 00 Page 19 of 367 SECTION 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 REFERENCES Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work These references are identified in each section by document number date and title The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization e g ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings However when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes 1 2 ORDERING INFORMATION The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization that information is also provided Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by num
93. the steel deck manufacturer as approved by the Contracting Officer 2 2 7 Miscellaneous Accessories Furnish the manufacturer s standard accessories to complete the deck installation Furnish metal accessories of the same material as the deck and with the minimum design thickness as follows saddles 0 0474 inch welding washers 0 0598 inch cant strip 0 0295 inch other metal accessories 0 0358 inch unless otherwise indicated Accessories must include but not be limited to saddles welding washers fasteners cant strips butt cover plates under lapping sleeves and ridge and valley plates 2 3 FABRICATION Furnish one sample of each type of Metal Floor Deck Units used to illustrate the actual cross section dimensions and configuration 2 3 1 Deck Conform to ASTM A 792 A 792M or ASTM A 1008 A 1008M for deck used in conjunction with insulation and built up roofing Fabricate roof deck units of 0 0295 inch design thickness or the thicker of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and galvanized 2 3 1 1 Metal Closure Strips for Decks Fabricate strips from the specified commercial quality steel sheets not less than nominal 0 0359 inch thick before galvanizing Provide strips from the configuration required to provide tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of steel roof decking PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION Prior to installation of decking units and accessories examine worksite to verify that as built structur
94. with UL test requirements or GA requirements Seal penetrations through rated partitions and ceilings tight in accordance with tested systems 3 6 PATCHING Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth uniform appearance ready to receive finishes End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 09 29 00 Page 149 of 367 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 02 09 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Resilient Flooring Products G Manufacturer s descriptive data SD 04 Samples Resilient Flooring Products G Samples of manufacturer s standard colors for selection including color and type of flooring base mouldings and accessories Provide a minimum 2 1 2 by 4 inch flooring samples SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Surface Preparation G Manufacturer s printed installation instructions for all flooring materials including preparation of substrate and recommended adhesives 1 2 WARRANTY Provide manufacturer s standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year period PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE Conform to ASTM F 1066 Class 2 through pattern tile Composition 1 asbestos free 12 inch square and 1 8 inch thick Provide color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout the thickness of the tile Tile shall contain a minimum of 90 percent recycled material P N 05 C05124 Section 09 65 00 Page
95. 1 5 1 1 Exterior Painting Includes new surfaces 1 5 1 2 Interior Painting Includes new surfaces 1 5 2 Painting Excluded Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise a Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards fixed ductwork machinery and equipment fixed in place b Surfaces in concealed spaces Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings furred spaces attic spaces crawl spaces elevator shafts and chases c Steel to be embedded in concrete d Copper stainless steel aluminum brass and lead except existing coated surfaces e Hardware fittings and other factory finished items 1 5 3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces a Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following items unless indicated otherwise 1 Exposed piping conduit and ductwork 2 Supports hangers air grilles and registers 3 Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings 1 5 4 Exterior Painting of Site Work Items Field coat the following items New Surfaces Existing Surfaces a Steel Pipe Bollards P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 154 of 367 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3 Submit manufacturer s technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINT
96. 1 A5 1M AWS D1 1 D1 1M and AWS D1 3 D1 3M 1 5 6 Structural Steel Comply with AISC 325 AISC 350 and AISC 360 for design requirements and allowable stresses 1 5 7 Cold Formed Steel Comply with AISC AISI 121 and AISI SG03 3 for design requirements and allowable stresses 1 5 8 Surface Burning Characteristics Provide metal panels having insulation and vapor barrier material with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 bya qualified testing agency Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency showing a Flame Spread Index 25 or less b Smoke Developed Index 450 or less 1 5 9 Fabrication Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible by manufacturer s standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements Comply with indicated profiles with dimensional and structural requirements Provide metal panel profile including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs if any for full length of panel Aluminum and aluminum alloy sheet and plate must conform to ASTM B 209 Fabricate metal panel side laps with factory installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal to metal contact in a manner that will seal weather tight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19
97. 124 Section 03 30 00 Page 60 of 367 2 1 2 Steel Forms Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities dents or sags 2 2 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES The use of wire alone is prohibited Provide form ties and accessories that do not reduce the effective cover of the reinforcement 2 3 CONCRETE 2 3 1 Contractor Furnished Mix Design ACI MCP 1 ACI MCP 2 and ACI MCP 3 except as otherwise specified Indicate the compressive strength f c of the concrete for each portion of the structure s and as specified below f c ASTM C 33 C 33M Maximum Min 28 Maximum Range Water Day Comp Nominal of Cement Air Strength Aggregate Slump Ratio Entr Location psi Size No inches by weight percent All areas 3500 11 2 3 4 0 48 5 Maximum slump shown above may be increased 1 inch for methods of consolidation other than vibration Slump may be increased to 8 inches when super plasticizers are used Provide air entrainment using air entraining admixture Provide air entrainment within plus or minus 1 5 percent of the value specified 2 3 1 1 Mix Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete Trial design batches mixture proportioning studies and testing requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified are the responsibility of the Contractor Base mixture proportions on compressive strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192 C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39 C 39
98. 2 2 Cleaning Clean all surfaces of the work and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a result of the work Remove from the site all construction equipment tools surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 44 16 Page 173 of 367 End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 44 16 Page 174 of 367 SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 01 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 Structural Performance Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within the limits and conditions indicated 1 1 1 1 Engineering Design metal building systems conforming to procedures described in MBMA MBSM 1 1 1 2 Design Loads Conform to the requirements of MBMA MBSM ASCE 7 05 and the building code applicable to the project geographical location 1 1 1 3 Live Loads Include all vertical loads induced by the building occupancy indicated on the drawings as well as loads induced by maintenance workers materials and equipment for roof live loads 1 1 1 4 Roof Snow Loads Include vertical loads induced by the weight of snow as determined by 50 year Mean Recurrence Interval MRI ground snow load at the project site of Atlantic Beach NC Allow for unbalanced and drift loads 1 1 1 5 Wind Loads Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding to a 10 year mean recurrence interval at Project site
99. 2 3 2 Stops and Beads Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel Provide for glazed and other openings in standard steel frames Secure beads to frames with oval head countersunk Phillips self tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and fasteners Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center Miter molded shapes at corners Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at corners 2 3 3 Interior Window Openings Fabricate frames for interior window openings of same material gage and assembly as specified for metal door frames 2 3 4 Anchors P N 05 C05124 Section 08 11 13 Page 118 of 367 Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction Provide steel anchors zinc coated or painted with rust inhibitive paint not lighter than 18 gage 2 3 4 1 Wall Anchors Provide at least three anchors for each jamb For frames which are more than 7 5 feet in height provide one additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 2 5 feet or fraction thereof a Masonry Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 3 16 inch diameter steel wire adjustable or T shaped b Completed openings Secure frames to previously placed masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI DOOR 111 and 2 3 4 2 Floor Anchors Provide floor anchors drilled for 3 8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each jamb member 2 4 HARDWARE PREPARATION Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI DOOR A250 6 Drill and tap
100. 2 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser Waste Receptacle PTDWR Provide recessed or semi recessed dispenser receptacle with a minimum capacity of 400 sheets of C fold single fold or quarter fold towel Design waste receptacle to be locked in unit and removable for service Provide tumbler key locking mechanism Provide waste receptacle minimum capacity of 12 gallons Fabricate a minimum 0 30 inch stainless steel welded construction unit with all exposed surfaces having a satin finish Provide waste receptacle that accepts reusable liner standard for unit manufacturer 2 2 3 Sanitary Napkin Disposer SND Construct a Type 304 stainless steel sanitary napkin disposal with removable leak proof receptacle for disposable liners Provide fifty disposable liners of the type standard with the manufacturer Retain receptacle in cabinet by tumbler lock Provide disposer with a door for inserting disposed napkins surface mounted 2 2 4 Shower Curtain Rods SCR Provide Type 304 stainless steel shower curtain rods 1 1 4 inch OD by 0 049 inch minimum straight to meet installation conditions 2 2 5 Soap Dispenser SD P N 05 C05124 Section 10 28 13 Page 169 of 367 Provide soap dispenser surface mounted liquid type consisting of a vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid ounces with a corrosion resistant all purpose valve that dispenses liquid soaps lotions detergents and antiseptic soaps 2 2 6 Soap and Grab Bar Comb
101. 2 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor Wall hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 42 inches above floor Wall hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim 28 inches above the floor Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117 1 3 3 3 Shower Outfits The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing 3 3 4 Fixture Supports Fixture supports for off the floor lavatories urinals water closets and other fixtures of similar size design and use shall be of the chair carrier type The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall Support plates in lieu of chair carrier shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor mounted chair carrier to the floor slab 3 3 4 1 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions Chair carrier shall be used The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design and feet bases shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright Wall plates in lieu of floor anchored chair carriers shall be used only if adjo
102. 20 Type II and with a curing time to ensure the sealant s plasticity at the time of field erection 2 8 6 3 Field Applied Sealant for field applied caulking must be an approved gun grade non sag one component polysulfide or two component polyurethane with an initial maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25 and conforming to ASTM C 920 Type IL Color to match panel colors 2 8 6 4 Tape Sealant P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 193 of 367 Pressure sensitive 100 solid with a release paper backing permanently elastic non sagging non toxic and non staining as approved by the metal panel manufacturer 2 9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2 9 1 Fabrication Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim including gutters and downspouts where practicable to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design dimensions metal and other characteristics of item indicated Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning buckling and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges folded back to form hems Gutters and downspouts shall be aluminum with factory finish color as selected from manufacturer s standard colors 2 10 FINISHES 2 10 1 General Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes 2 10 2 Appearance of Finished Work Variations in appearance of abutting or adjac
103. 209 for coating on decking provided as wire raceways 2 1 3 Mixes 2 1 3 1 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Floor Decks Provide a high zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 780 A 780M 2 1 4 Galvanized Steel Angles for Decks Provide hot rolled carbon steel angles conforming to ASTM A 36 A 36M merchant quality Grade Designation SAE AISI 1023 or SAE AISI 1025 and hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 A 123M P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 95 of 367 2 1 5 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Decks Provide a high zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel and shall conform to ASTM A 780 A 780M 2 2 ACCESSORIES Provide accessories of same material as deck unless specified otherwise Provide manufacturer s standard type accessories as specified 2 2 1 Adjusting Plates Provide adjusting plates or segments of deck units of same thickness and configuration as deck units in locations too narrow to accommodate full size units Provide factory cut plates of predetermined size where possible 2 2 2 End Closures Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer Provide end closures minimum 0 028 inch thick to close open ends at exposed edges of floors end walls and openings through deck 2 2 3 Sheet Metal Collar Where deck is cut for passage of pipes ducts columns etc and deck is to remain exposed provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar t
104. 3 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 3 1 1 3 Pipe Laying and Jointing Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings Before placing in position clean pipe fittings valves and accessories and maintain in a clean condition Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe fittings valves or any other water line material into trenches Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted Lay bell and spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying Grade the pipeline in straight lines avoid the formation of dips and low points Support pipe at proper elevation and grade Secure firm uniform support Wood support blocking will not be permitted Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding excavate recesses to accommodate bells joints and couplings Provide anchors and supports where necessary for fastening work into place Make proper provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made At the end of each work day close open ends of pipe temporarily with P
105. 4 Section 02 41 00 Page 56 of 367 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 01 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DEFINITIONS a Cementitious material as used herein must include all portland cement pozzolan fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace b Exposed to public view means situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a public location after completion of the building A public location is accessible to persons not responsible for operation or maintenance of the building c Chemical admixtures are materials in the form of powder or fluids that are added to the concrete to give it certain characteristics not obtainable with plain concrete mixes d Workability or consistence is the ability of a fresh plastic concrete mix to fill the form mould properly with the desired work vibration and without reducing the concrete s quality Workability depends on water content chemical admixtures aggregate shape and size distribution cementitious content and age level of hydration 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Reinforcing steel G Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable Provide erection drawings for concrete Formwork that show placement of reinforcement and accessories with reference to the contract drawings SD 03 Product Data Materials for curing concrete Manufacturer s catalog data for the following items must include p
106. 4 Section 09 90 00 Page 158 of 367 Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior a Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation requirements at time of application b Inaccessible Surfaces Prior to erection use one coat of specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection c Shop primed Surfaces Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer d Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane Apply MPI 101 1 5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings e Pipes and Tubing The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat but shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous metal primer prior to application of finish coats f Exposed Nails Screws Fasteners and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107 3 7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES Apply coatings of Tables in Division 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior 3 8 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE In addition to meeting previously specified requirements demonstrate mobility of moving components including swinging and sliding doors cabinets and windows with operable sash for in
107. 4 Section 23 03 00 Page 228 of 367 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 08 09 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 l DEFINITIONS AABC Associated Air Balance Council COTR Contracting Officer s Technical Representative HVAC Heating ventilating and air conditioning or heating ventilating and cooling NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau Out of tolerance data Pertains only to field acceptance testing of Final DALT or TAB report When applied to TAB work this phase means a measurement taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter Season of maximum heating load The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site s winter outdoor design temperature throughout the period of TAB data recording Season of maximum cooling load The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site s summer outdoor design temperature throughout the period of TAB data recording TAB Testing adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems TAB d HVAC Testing Adjusting Balancing procedures performed TAB Agency TAB Firm TAB team field leader TAB team field leader TAB team supervisor TAB tea
108. 45 1967 Ph 440 899 0010 Fax 440 892 1404 E mail leh wherryassoc com Internet http www steeldoor org STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE SJD 3127 Mr Joe White Avenue Myrtle Beach SC 29577 6760 Ph 843 626 1995 Fax 843 626 5565 E mail sji steeljoist org Internet http www steeljoist org THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS SSPC 40 24th Street 6th Floor Pittsburgh PA 15222 4656 Ph 412 281 2331 Fax 412 281 9992 E mail info sspc org Internet http www sspc org UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook IL 60062 2096 Ph 847 272 8800 Fax 847 272 8129 E mail customerexperiencecenter us ul com Internet http www ul com UNI BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION UBPPA 2655 Villa Creek Drive Suite 155 Dallas TX 75234 Ph 972 243 3902 Fax 972 243 3907 E mail info uni bell org Internet http www uni bell org P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 29 of 367 U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USACE Order CRD C DOCUMENTS from U S Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station ATTN Technical Report Distribution Section Services Branch TIC 3909 Halls Ferry Road Vicksburg MS 39180 6199 Ph 601 634 2664 Fax 601 634 2388 E mail mtc info erdc usace army mil Internet http www wes army mil SL MTC handbook htm Order Other Documents from USACE Publications Depot Attn CEHEC IM PD 2803 52nd Avenue Hyattsville MD 20781 1102 Ph 301 394 0081 Fax 301 394 0084 E m
109. 605 6900 E mail info ntis gov P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 27 of 367 Internet http www ntis gov NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION NRCA 10255 West Higgins Road Suite 600 Rosemont IL 60018 Ph 847 299 9070 Fax 847 299 1183 Internet http www nrca net NSF INTERNATIONAL NSF 789 North Dixboro Road P O Box 130140 Ann Arbor MI 48113 0140 Ph 734 769 8010 or 800 NSF MARK Fax 734 769 0109 E mail info nsf org Internet http www nsf org PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE PDI 800 Turnpike Street Suite 300 North Andover MA 01845 Ph 978 557 0720 or 800 589 8956 Fax 978 557 0721 E Mail info pdionline org Internet http www pdionline org SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA 4201 Lafayette Center Drive Chantilly VA 20151 1209 Ph 703 803 2980 Fax 703 803 3732 E mail info smacna org Internet http www smacna org SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL SAE 400 Commonwealth Drive Warrendale PA 15096 0001 Ph 724 776 4841 Fax 724 776 0790 E mail customerservice sae org Internet http www sae org STEEL DECK INSTITUTE SDI P O Box 25 Fox River Grove IL 60021 P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 28 of 367 Ph 847 458 4647 Fax 847 458 4648 E mail Steve sdi org Internet http www sdi org STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE SDI DOOR c o Wherry Associates 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland OH 441
110. 8 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Nonsaleable Materials G Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION 3 1 1 Roads and Walks Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times 3 1 2 Trees Shrubs and Existing Facilities Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing grubbing and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require 3 1 3 Utility Lines Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage Notify the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown existing utility line The Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations notify the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative in ample time to minimize interruption of the service P N 05 C05124 Section 31 11 00 Page 314 of 367 3 2 CLEARING Clearing shall consist of the felling trimming and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disp
111. ART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts plenums and other air handling spaces shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 284 of 367 3 1 1 Labels Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure as permitted by NFPA 70 each enclosure new and existing shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices Label at minimum shall indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES Use lettering of at least 0 25 inch in height and engrave on black on white matte finish Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70 3 1 2 Wiring Methods Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit IMC rigid nonmetallic conduit or EMT except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral conductor Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit s installed in conduit and raceways Minimum conduit size shall be 3 4
112. Cooling Equipment P N 05 C05124 Page 3 of 367 94 100 106 108 111 117 121 127 137 145 147 151 154 165 170 174 177 202 228 232 235 247 261 264 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System 26 51 00 Interior Lighting DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 63 Analog Addressable Interior Fire Alarm System DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311100 Clearing and Grubbing 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 3131 16 Soil Treatment for Subterranean Termite Control DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 11 00 Water Distribution 33 30 00 Sanitary Sewers 33 32 16 Grinder Pump Lift Station End of Project Table of Contents P N 05 C05124 Page 4 of 367 276 280 295 304 322 324 336 343 350 358 367 SECTION 01 01 00 SCOPE OF WORK l WORK INCLUDED Major items of work shall include the following 1 1 Work associated with these items is described in the following specification sections and or are shown on the contract drawings Incidental work items not listed above and necessary for completing the project shall be included The general project scope is to design and construct a building to replace the Public Works Shop building that was torn down Unless noted otherwise work is generally confined to the existing Sector North Carolina site 2 DRAWINGS Drawings and the acco
113. DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY UNITED STATES COAST GUARD SHORE INFASTRUCTURE LOGISTICS COMMAND SPECIFICATIONS FOR REPLACE PUBLIC WORKS SHOP AT U S COAST GUARD SECTOR NORTH CAROLINA ATLANTIC BEACH NC MARCH 2010 COMMANDING OFFICER UNITED STATES COAST GUARD CIVIL ENGINEERING UNIT RM 2179 1240 EAST NINTH STREET CLEVELAND OHIO 44199 2060 P N 05 C05124 File C7648X AUTHOR JERRY MARTIN A LA P N 05 C05124 Page 1 of 367 PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 00 01 01 20 01 01 30 01 01 50 01 02 80 01 03 00 01 04 00 01 04 10 01 06 30 01 06 70 01 20 00 01 30 00 01 31 00 01 37 00 01 42 00 01 51 00 01 52 00 01 54 00 01 54 10 01 54 20 01 54 40 01 55 00 01 56 60 01 56 90 01 62 00 01 65 00 01 72 00 01 73 00 Scope Of Work Work by Others Project Phasing Contractor Work Hours Pre Bid Site Visits Pre Construction Site Conditions Coordination Field Adjustments Building Permits Environmental Permits Project Meetings Submittals Construction Schedule Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule Construction Daily Reports Sources for Reference Publications Temporary Utilities Protection from Weather and Construction Operations Safety Program Equipment Utility Lockout and Tag Out Requirements Material Safety Data Sheets and Material Handling Procedures Temporary Fire Protection Access Roads and Parking General Cleanup amp Site Restoration of Work Areas Ha
114. E OF CONSTRUCTION 1 1 2 inches 467 Monolithic slabs on ground concrete fill and other flat work having a depth of not less than 5 inches and a clear distance between reinforcing bars of not less than 2 inches 3 4 inch Elevated Decks Maximum size of aggregate may be that required for most critical type of construction using that concrete class Specify gradation of aggregates for separate floor topping P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 68 of 367 2 6 4 Slump Provide slump for concrete at time and in location of placement as follows TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION Footings unreinforced walls Footings or Slabs than 3 inches than 4 inches 2 6 5 Total Air Content SLUMP Not less than 1 inch nor more Not less than 1 inch nor more Air content of exposed concrete and interior concrete must be in accordance with ASTM C 260 and or as follows LIMITS CONCRETE EXPOSURE Exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure REQUIREMENT FOR AIR MAXIMUM SIZE ENTRAINMENT OF AGGREGATE Air 1 1 2 or entrained TOTAL AIR CONTENT BY VOLUME 4 to 6 percent 5 to 7 percent 6 to 8 5 percent Provide concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure that is air entrained by addition of approved air entraining admixture to concrete mix PART3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed verify that substrat
115. ECTION Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified 1 9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES Use of explosives will not be permitted PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED Inspect and evaluate existing structures on site for reuse Existing construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated set aside and prepared as specified and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse remanufacture recycling or other disposal as specified Materials shall be designated for reuse on site whenever possible 3 1 1 Utilities and Related Equipment 3 1 1 1 General Requirements Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided Do not begin demolition or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made Shut off and cap utilities for future use as indicated 3 1 1 2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities Remove existing utilities and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative When utilit
116. ED Prior to surface preparation and coating applications remove mask or otherwise protect hardware hardware accessories machined surfaces radiator covers plates lighting fixtures public and private property and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated Following completion of painting workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials to original condition and repair damaged items 3 2 SURFACE PREPARATION Remove dirt splinters loose particles grease oil disintegrated coatings and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet newly painted surfaces Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water thinned paints shall be spot primed with a suitable corrosion inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas 3 3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES 3 3 1 Ferrous Surfaces a Ferrous Surfaces including Shop coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to re
117. ES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH INCHES VANE NO 1 VANENO 2 VANE NO 3 P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 250 of 367 Up to 16 56 17 to 48 43 73 49 and over 37 55 83 Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 30 inches wide and larger the guide vanes shall be continuous through both elbows rather than spaced in accordance with above schedule 3 3 1 6 Outlets Inlets And Duct Branches Install branches inlets and outlets so that air turbulence will be reduced to a minimum and air volume properly apportioned Install adjustable splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit adjustment of the amount of air entering the branch 3 3 1 7 Duct Transitions Where the shape of a duct changes the angle of the side of the transition piece shall not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto 3 3 1 8 Branch Connections Construct radius tap ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966 3 3 1 9 Access Openings Install access doors and panels in ductwork at controls or at any item requiring periodic inspection adjustment maintenance or cleaning and every 20 feet 6 1M for indoor air quality housekeeping purposes Construct access door in accordance with SMACNA 1966 except that sliding doors may be used only for special conditions upon prior approval Insulated doors shall be double panel type Access doors that leak shall be made airtight by adding or replacing hinges and latches or by constructio
118. Each amplifier shall have two channels one to broadcast a message and the other for paging Provide a backup amplifier that will automatically activate in event of a failure of the primary event No amplifier shall be loaded more than 50 percent 2 2 10 1 Construction Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system 2 2 10 2 Inputs Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance balanced line type Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier 2 2 10 3 Protection Circuits Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier illumination of a visual amplifier trouble indicator on the control panel appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions as specified 2 2 11 Graphic Annunciator 2 2 11 1 Annunciator Panel P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 309 of 367 Provide a graphic annunciator which indicates the building floor plan including the locations of stairs and elevators Alarm circuit bound
119. Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock resistant Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1 2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3 4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars Fill unused holes In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws In suspended ceiling construction run conduit above ceiling Do not support conduit by ceiling support system Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both a tie wires supporting ceiling grid system and b ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts Installation shall be coordinated with above ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems Spring steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations For conduits greater than 2 1 2 inches inside diameter P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 286 of 367 provide supports to resist forces of 0 5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1 5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction 3 1 3 6 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings Make field made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit bending machine Do not install crushed or deformed conduits Avoid trapped
120. Grade 65 45 12 conforming to the applicable requirements of ASME B16 1 Class 250 Setscrews for setscrewed flanges shall be 190 000 psi tensile strength heat treated and zinc coated steel Gasket for setscrewed flanges shall conform to the applicable requirements for mechanical joint gaskets specified in AWWA C111 Use setscrewed gasket designed to provide for confinement and compression of gasket when joint to adjoining flange is made P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 360 of 367 2 1 2 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings 2 1 2 1 Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inch Diameter Use pipe couplings and fittings manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784 Class 12454 B 1 Screw Joint Use pipe conforming to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80 with joints meeting requirements of 150 psi working pressure 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure unless otherwise shown or specified Use threaded pipe fittings conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2464 threaded to conform to the requirements of ASME B1 20 1 for use with Schedule 80 pipe and fittings Test pipe couplings when used as required by ASTM D 2464 2 Push On Joint ASTM D 3139 with ASTM F 477 gaskets Fittings for push on joints AWWA C110 or AWWA C111 Iron fittings and specials cement mortar lined standard thickness in accordance with AWWA C104 3 Solvent Cement Joint Use pipe conforming to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D
121. HMA A156 1 4 1 2 by 4 1 2 inch unless otherwise indicated Construct loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse bevel interior doors so that pins will be nonremovable when door is closed Other antifriction bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball bearing hinges 2 2 2 Locks and Latches 2 2 2 1 Mortise Locks and Latches BHMA A156 13 Series 1000 Operational Grade 1 Security Grade 2 Install knobs and roses of mortise locks with screwless shanks and no exposed screws P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 137 of 367 2 2 2 2 Bored Locks and Latches BHMA A156 2 Series 4000 Grade 1 2 2 3 Exit Devices BHMA A156 3 Grade 1 Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and vertical rod devices Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with mortise and vertical rod devices Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms 2 2 4 Cylinders and Cores Provide cylinders for new locks including locks provided under other sections of this specification Provide fully compatible cylinders with products to match the existing base lock and keying system with interchangeable cores which are removable by a special control key Factory set the cores with seven pin tumblers using the A4 system and F keyway Submit a core code sheet with the cores Provide master keyed cores in one system for this project Provide construction interchangeable cores 2 2 5 Keying System Provide a master keying system to be compatible with the existi
122. ID A A 60003 Type I Style A floor supported Furnish width length and height of toilet enclosures as shown Finish surface of panels must be solid polyethylene Finish 5 graffiti resistant 2 3 FLOOR ANCHORED PARTITIONS Provide anchoring device standard with the partition manufacturer including devices for securing to the floor threaded rods and leveling adjustment nuts Trim piece at the floor must be minimum 3 inch high and fabricated from not less than 0 030 inch thick corrosion resistant steel 2 4 PILASTER SHOES Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor mounted anchorage Pilaster shoes shall be stainless steel or one piece molded HDPE Height shall be minimum 3 inches 2 5 HARDWARE Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A A 60003 for the specified type and style of partitions Hardware shall be pre drilled by manufacturer Hardware finish shall be highly resistant to alkalies urine and other common toilet room acids Hardware shall include chrome plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges gravity type adjustable for door close positioning nylon bearings door latch strike and keeper with rubber bumper and cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper Screws and bolts shall be stainless steel tamper proof type Wall mounting brackets shall be continuous full height stainless steel in accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer s instructions Floor mounted anchorage shall consist of corrosion res
123. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory applied Type I or II vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation Duct insulation and vapor retarder vapor barrier shall cover the collar neck and any un insulated surfaces of diffusers registers and grills Vapor retarder vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation 3 3 2 1 Installation on Concealed Duct a For rectangular or round ducts flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers b For rectangular ducts 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners c For rectangular and round ducts mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners d Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners self stick pins where used and shall be pressed t
124. M Samples of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies must be representative of those proposed for use in the project and must be accompanied by the manufacturer s or producer s test report indicating compliance with these specifications Base trial mixtures having proportions consistencies and air content suitable for the work on methodology described in ACI MCP 1 In the trial mixture use at least three different water cement ratios for each type of mixture which must produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required on the project The maximum water cement ratio required must be based on equivalent water cement ratio calculations as determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan and ground granulated blast furnace slag by weight equivalency method P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 61 of 367 Design laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted slump and air content Each combination of material proposed for use must have separate trial mixture except for accelerator or retarder use can be provided without separate trial mixture Report the temperature of concrete in each trial batch For each water cement ratio at least three test cylinders for each test age must be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192 C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39 C 39M for 7 and 28 days From these results plot a curve showing the relationship betw
125. M E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements and UV resistant Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with ASTM D 774 D 774M Tensile strength 68 lb inch width PSTC 1000 Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above 2 2 9 Vapor Retarder Not Required ASTM C 921 Type II Class D minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork where Type IV maximum moisture vapor transmission 0 10 a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 2 10 Wire Soft annealed ASTM A 580 A 580M Type 302 304 or 316 stainless steel 16 or 18 gauge 2 2 11 Insulation Bands Insulation bands shall be 1 2 inch wide 26 gauge stainless steel 2 2 12 Sealants Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type the styrene butadiene rubber type or the butyl type of sealants Sealants shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0 02 perms and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1 Insulation thickness shall be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90 1 IP Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements 2 3 1 Aboveg
126. Maintenance of Gate Valves to AWWA C509 Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve and fitting installation 3 1 3 Steel Piping Install steel piping in accordance with ANSI B31 3 Use PTFE pipe thread paste or PTFE powder and oil for jointing compound for pipe threads 3 1 4 Force Main Provide in accordance with Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 366 of 367 3 1 5 Equipment Installation Install equipment in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer s installation instructions Grout equipment mounted on concrete foundations before installing piping Install piping to avoid imposing stress on any equipment Match flanges accurately before securing bolts 3 2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Perform all field tests and provide all labor equipment and incidentals required for testing except that water and electric power needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in Division 01 Produce evidence when required that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with contract requirements Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 5 days before testing any section of piping where concrete thrust blocks have been provided 3 2 1 Testing Procedure Test piping in accordance with the Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS Test in operation all equipment to demonstrate compliance with the contract requirements 3 2 2 Sewage Grinder Pum
127. Make splices in conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated pressure type connector Make splices in conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation 3 1 8 Covers and Device Plates Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices Plaster fillings are not permitted Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1 16 inch Use of sectional type device plates are not permitted Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 288 of 367 3 1 9 Grounding and Bonding Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 Ground exposed non current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment and neutral conductor of wiring systems 3 1 9 1 Ground Rods Provide cone pointed ground rods The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall of potential method described in IEEE Std 81 The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod 6 additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative who will decide on the number of ground rods to add 3 1 9 2 Grounding Connections Make grounding connections which are bu
128. N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 189 of 367 a Galvanized Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 653 A 653M and AISI SG03 3 b Aluminum Zinc Alloy coated Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 792 A 792M and AISI SG03 3 c Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any unbroken roof slope or wall area with no joints or seams and formed without warping waviness or ripples that are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system d Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of system specified profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from manufacturer s standard for the indicated roof slope or wall area profile to be a 1 1 2 inch high rib at 12 inches o c with small stiffening ribs 38 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners OR profile to be a 1 1 2 inch high rib at 7 2 inches o c 38 7 8 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners 2 4 3 Finish All panels are to receive a factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride or Kynar 500 Hylar 5000 finish consisting of a baked on top coat with a manufacturer s recommended prime coat conforming to the following a Metal Preparation All metal is to have the surfaces carefully prepared for painting on a continuous process coil coating line by alkali cleaning hot water rinsing application of chemical conversion coating cold water rinsing sealing
129. ONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE A Concrete masonry 1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 4 2D G3 Eggshell P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 160 of 367 Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 N A MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT 11 mils Fill all holes in masonry surface B Concrete masonry units in toilets restrooms shower areas and other high humidity areas unless otherwise specified 1 Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI INT 4 2K G3 Eggshell Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 N A MPI 151 MPI 151 System DFT 11 mils Fill all holes in masonry surface DIVISION 5 INTERIOR METAL FERROUS AND NON FERROUS PAINT TABLE INTERIOR STEEL FERROUS SURFACES A Metal 1 High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 5 1R G5 Semigloss Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 141 MPI 141 System DFT 5 mils B Metal in toilets restrooms shower areas and other high humidity areas not otherwise specified except floors hot metal surfaces and new prefinished equipment 1 Alkyd MPI INT 5 1E G6 Gloss Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 79 MPI 48 MPI 48 System DFT 5 25 mils DIVISION 9 INTERIOR PLASTER GYPSUM BOARD TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE A Wallboard not otherwise specified 1 Latex New MPI INT 9 2A G3 Eggshell Existing RIN 9 2A G3 Eggshell Primer Intermediate Topcoat P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 161 of 367 MPI 50 MPI 52 MPI 52 System DFT 4 mils B Wallb
130. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING and as specified herein showing all light fixtures control modules control zones occupancy sensors light level sensors power packs dimming ballasts schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire conduit and associated hardware Submit documentation that includes contact information summary of procedures and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project Indicate manufacturer s commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and or reuse 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts contained herein As an option submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer s electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer s catalog data This information shall include published specifications and sketches which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts herein This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers 1 4 2 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of s
131. Officer s Technical Representative and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no elements toxic to plant life PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION 3 1 1 EXTENT OF WORK Provide soil preparation including soil conditioners as required fertilizing seeding and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces unless indicated otherwise and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor s operations 3 1 1 1 Topsoil Provide 4 inches of on site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade incorporate fertilizer pH adjusters and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking harrowing tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Remove debris and stones larger than 3 4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic 3 1 1 2 Soil Conditioner Application Rates Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 339 of 367 Lime approximately 75 pounds per 1000 square feet 3 1 1 3 Fertilizer Application Rates Apply fertilizer at rates as determ
132. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish satin stainless steel unless specified otherwise Provide items not manufactured in stainless steel in BHMA 626 finish satin chromium plated over brass or bronze except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers Provide hinges for exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated brass or bronze with BHMA 626 finish Furnish exit devices in BHMA 626 finish in lieu of BHMA 630 finish except where BHMA 630 is specified under paragraph entitled Hardware Sets Match exposed parts of concealed closers to lock and door trim Match hardware finish for aluminum doors to the doors PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers printed installation instructions Provide machine screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core construction Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory installation 3 1 1 Weather Stripping Installation Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage Provide full contact weather tight seals Operate doors without binding 3 1 1 1 Stop Applied Weather Stripping Fasten in place with color matched sheet metal screws not more than 9 inch on center after doors and frames have been finish painted 3 1 1 2 Interlocking Type Weather Stripping Provide interlocking self adjusting type on h
133. SME B16 22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117 Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM FKM or HNBR Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting manufacturer Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer s approved application guidelines n Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 Type K L or M 2 1 2 Miscellaneous Materials Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following a Water Hammer Arrester PDI WH 201 Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm b Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction ASTM B 370 c Supports for Off The Floor Plumbing Fixtures ASME A112 6 1M d Metallic Cleanouts ASME A112 36 2M e Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C203 f Hypochlorites AWWA B300 g Liquid Chlorine AWWA B301 h Gauges Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type Elastic Element ASME B40 100 i Thermometers ASTM E 1 Mercury shall not be used in thermometers 2 2 PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS Pipe hangers inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 2 3 VALVES Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures Valves 2 1 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder type connections for tubing Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application Grooved end valv
134. SULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket 3 3 1 Duct Insulation Thickness Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4 Table 4 Minimum Duct Insulation inches Cold Air Ducts 2 0 Relief Ducts 1 5 Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1 5 Warm Air Ducts 2 0 Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1 5 3 3 2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct Hot Air Duct Insulation and vapor retarder vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment a Supply ducts b Return air ducts c Flexible run outs field insulated d Plenums P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 241 of 367 e Fresh air intake ducts Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed minimum density 3 4 pcf and rigid type where exposed minimum density 3 pcf Insulation for both concealed or exposed round oval ducts shall be flexible type minimum density 3 4 pcf or a semi rigid board minimum density 3 pcf formed or fabricated to a tight fit edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white paint able factory applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1 16 inch
135. Schedule This schedule shall be prepared using a horizontal bar graph with time scale It shall be in an industry accepted Project Management format and shall accurately display l All major categories of work to be performed within the required contract completion date broken out in sufficient detail to track progress throughout the life of the contract Major work categories should include but are not limited to mobilization carpentry plumbing mechanical electrical roofing concrete site work and demobilization In addition to construction activities procurement times for critical items submittal turnaround time mobilization final inspection punch list work and demobilization shall be shown on the schedule 2 The duration of each work category 3 Any concurrent work categories b Schedule of Values This schedule shall be prepared as a detailed cost breakdown of the contract price and be submitted with the Construction Schedule This schedule shall include but not be limited to costs of materials equipment and labor for all major work categories shown on the Construction Schedule The Contractor shall adhere to the following guidelines when developing the Schedule of Values 1 Format The line items in the Schedule of Values shall be the same as that of the Construction Schedule 2 Bonds Bonding costs will only be paid in a lump sum if they are broken out separately and included with the schedule of values The Contrac
136. UCTION Preclude flutter rattle or vibration on air diffusion device construction and mounting Modify devices and provide accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface construction Match color with architectural background P N 05 C05124 Section 23 37 13 Page 257 of 367 Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid Ensure dampers are extracting splitter type except as otherwise indicated Ensure air diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made from the face of the device Make volume adjustments by removable key Provide gaskets for supply terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces Include within the Material Equipment and Fixture Lists the manufacturer s style or catalog numbers specification and drawing reference numbers warranty information and fabrication site information Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of Contractor s survey of work area conditions and features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions Submit Fabrication Drawings for air diffusion devices consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory 2 2 TYPES OF AIR DIFFUSION DEVICES 2 2 1 Type DP Series Provide type DP series supply diffuser with a square perforated hinged face plate with opposed blade volume control white baked enamel exterior
137. VC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings Unless otherwise specified install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines of this section and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23 Chapter 7 Installation a Pipe Less than 4 Inch Diameter 1 Make threaded joints by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by applying an approved thread lubricant than threading the joining members together Tighten joints with strap wrenches that will not damage the pipe and fittings Do not tighten joint more than 2 threads past hand tight 2 Push On Joints Bevel ends of pipe for push on joints to facilitate assembly Mark pipe to indicate when the pipe is fully seated Lubricate gasket to prevent displacement Exercise care to ensure that the gasket remains in proper position in the bell or coupling while making the joint 3 Solvent weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer s instructions 3 1 2 Valves Installation of Valves Install gate valves conforming to AWWA C500 in accordance with AWWA C600 for valve and fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix Installation Operation and Maintenance of Gate Valves to AWWA C500 Install gate valves conforming to AWWA C509 in accordance with AWWA C600 for valve and fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix Installation Operation and
138. Wallboard 2 1 1 1 Furred Ceiling Systems ASTM C 645 2 1 1 2 Nonload Bearing Wall Framing and Furring ASTM C 645 but not thinner than 0 0329 inch minimum thickness PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION 3 1 1 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard 3 1 1 1 Furred Ceiling Systems ASTM C 754 except provide framing members 16 inches o c unless indicated otherwise 3 1 1 2 Non loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring ASTM C 754 except as indicated otherwise 3 2 ERECTION TOLERANCES Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as wallboard plaster or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed within the following limits P N 05 C05124 Section 09 22 00 Page 144 of 367 a Layout of walls and partitions 1 4 inch from intended position b Plates and runners 1 4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line c Studs 1 4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb not cumulative and d Face of framing members 1 4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 09 22 00 Page 145 of 367 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 07 Certificates Asbestos Free Materials G Certify that gypsum board types and joint treating materials do not contain asbestos SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Material Safety Data Sheets PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Conform to specifications standards and requirements spec
139. acceptable materials from the job site 1 3 3 Storage Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer s labels Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and key when unattended 1 3 4 Handling P N 05 C05124 Section 31 31 16 Page 329 of 367 Observe manufacturer s warnings and precautions Termiticides shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer s labels preventing contamination by dirt water and organic material Protect termiticides from sunlight as recommended by the manufacturer 1 4 SITE CONDITIONS The following conditions will determine the time of application 1 4 1 Soil Moisture Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application Test soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches The soil moisture shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer The termiticide will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer s recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils 1 4 2 Runoff and Wind Drift Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or create an environmental hazard Applications shall not be performed when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour The termiticide shall not be allowed to enter water systems aquifers or endanger humans or animals 1 4 2 1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes Te
140. acturer s specifications and will meet the specified requirements Provide written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing 3 4 2 Mixing and Application Formulating mixing and application shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative A closed system is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons Water for formulating shall only come from designated locations Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards Overflow shall be prevented during the filling operation Prior to each day of use the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks clogging wear or damage Any repairs are to be performed immediately P N 05 C05124 Section 31 31 16 Page 332 of 367 3 4 3 Treatment Method For areas to be treated establish complete and unbroken vertical and or horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl spaces or for use as a plenum air space 3 4 3 1 Surface Application Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers Surface applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface Termiticide shall pen
141. administrative matters and to discuss specific issues regarding actual construction 1 2 Progress and Technical Review Meetings These meetings generally take place at the project site Either party may request a meeting to review the progress of the project and or review or clarify the technical requirements of the specifications End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 20 00 Page 15 of 367 SECTION 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS 1 GENERAL The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer 4 copies of submittals required by this specification and or itemized on the List of Submittals found at the end of this division 2 REQUEST A CONTRACT ITEM ACCEPTANCE REQUEST shall accompany all submittals All items shall be individually listed and clearly identified referencing the applicable Section and Paragraph A copy of this form is located at the end of this division and may be reproduced as needed 2 1 Up to eight 8 items may be listed on an individual acceptance request Number each Contract Item Acceptance Request consecutively Submittals 1 2 etc and re submittals with letters Submittal 1A is the first re submittal of Submittal 1 2 2 Submittals shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer The contractor shall allow 14 calendar days excluding mailing time for the review process in the Construction Schedule and all project planning In instances where submittal review must be expedited the Contractor may annotate
142. ail pubs army usace army mil Internet http www usace army mil publications or http www hnd usace army mil techinfo engpubs htm U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA Order AMS Publications from AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE AMS Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch 801 Summit Crossing Place Suite C Gastonia NC 28054 2193 Ph 704 810 8870 Fax 704 852 4189 Internet http www ams usda gov Isg seed htm E mail seed ams usda gov Order Other Publications from U S Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service 14th and Independence Avenue SW Room 4028 S Washington DC 20250 Ph 202 720 2791 Fax 202 720 2166 Internet http www usda gov rus U S DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE DOC 1401 Constitution Avenue NW Washington DC 20230 Ph 202 482 2000 Internet http www commerce gov Order Publications From P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 30 of 367 National Technical Information Service NTIS 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Ph 703 605 6585 Fax 703 605 6900 E mail info ntis gov Internet http www ntis gov U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD Order DOD Documents from National Technical Information Service NTIS 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Ph 703 605 6585 FAX 703 605 6900 E mail info ntis gov Internet http www ntis gov Obtain Military Specifications Standards and Related Publications from Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Info
143. aint lockers etc as required for the storage of such materials Coordinate the physical location of storage areas with the On site Representative prior to bringing these materials on site 3 PROTECTIVE MEASURES The contractor shall take all protective measures outlined on the MSDS s and as required by federal state and local regulations to protect all personnel in the vicinity of the work area from exposure to these materials The Contractor shall include any required protective measures in the Safety Plan See SECTION 01540 The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative shall review protective measures prior to allowing use of these materials 4 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL The Contractor shall dispose of all excess hazardous materials as required by the MSDS and all applicable federal state and local laws and regulations End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 54 20 Page 37 of 367 SECTION 01 54 40 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities to protect against predictable and controllable fire loss Comply with NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers and NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alterations and Demolition Operations 1 1 Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose but not less than one extinguisher at each floor stairwell and one at each building construction openin
144. als fabrication finish and installation and that they will remain so for a period of not less than 2 years after completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TYPES Fire Extinguishers must conform to NFPA 10 Quantity and placement must comply with the applicable sections of IFC 1414 IFC 906 NFPA 1 NFPA 101 and 29 CFR 1910 157 Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299 2 2 MATERIAL P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 44 16 Page 172 of 367 Extinguisher shell must be corrosion resistant steel or aluminum 2 3 SIZE Extinguishers must be 20 pounds 2 4 ACCESSORIES Safety release Pressure gage 2 5 WALL BRACKETS Provide wall hook fire extinguisher wall brackets Wall bracket and Accessories must be as approved PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the drawings Verify exact locations prior to installation Comply with the manufacturer s recommendations for all installations Provide extinguishers which are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation Provide extinguishers complete with Manufacturer s Warranty with Inspection Tag attached 3 2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS 3 2 1 Repairing Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with new work at no additional cost to the Government Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part replacement cost and name address and contact for replacement parts distributor 3
145. also large boulders buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 06 Test Reports Fill and backfill test P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 316 of 367 Select material test Porous fill test for capillary water barrier Density tests Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials 1 4 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING Base bids on the following criteria a Surface elevations are as indicated b Pipes or other artificial obstructions except those indicated will not be encountered c Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction d Material character is indicated by the boring logs e Hard materials will not be encountered except as noted on the boring logs f Borrow material Suitable backfill and bedding material in the quantities required is not available at the project on Government property g Blasting will not be permitted Remove material in an appro
146. ame address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 1 9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style 1 10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test PART 3 EXECUTION P N 05 C05124 Section 26 00 00 Page 274 of 367 3 1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and let
147. and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types c The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products systems installation procedures equipment and test methods 1 3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 120 208 volts three phase four wire Final connections to the power distribution system at the transformer shall be made by the the local power company 1 4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable 1 4 1 Shop Drawings SD 02 Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices P N 05 C05124 Section 26 00 00 Page 272 of 367 1 4 2 Product Data SD 03 Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 5 1 Regulat
148. and workmanship while roof panel system is under warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after notification unless additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Failure to perform repairs within 24 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty Immediate follow up and completion of permanent repairs must be performed within 5 days from date of notification 1 9 3 Roof and Wall Panel Finish Warranty Furnish manufacturer s standard no dollar limit warranty for the metal panel system The warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the metal panel system shows evidence of checking delaminating cracking peeling chalk in excess of a numerical rating of eight as determined by ASTM D 4214 test procedures or change colors in excess of five CIE or Hunter units in accordance with ASTM D 2244 or excess weathering due to deterioration of the panel system resulting from defective materials and finish or correction of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer Liability under this warranty is exclusively limited to replacing the defective coated materials P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 184 of 367 Repairs that become necessary because o
149. aph entitled Composition When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 2 2 2 Off Site Topsoil Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled Composition Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor 2 2 3 Composition Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon 6A Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42 Maximum particle size 3 4 inch with maximum 3 percent retained on 1 4 inch screen The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972 Topsoil shall be free of sticks stones roots and other debris and objectionable materials Other components shall conform to the following limits P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 337 of 367 Silt 25 50 percent Clay 10 30 percent Sand 20 35 percent pH 5 5 to 7 0 Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum 2 3 SOIL CONDITIONERS Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with composition standard for topsoil as specified herein 2 3 1 Lime Commercial grade hydrate or burnt limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent C C E as specified in ASTM C 602 of not less than 110 percent 2 4 FERTILIZER 2 4 1 Granular Fertilizer Synthetic granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients 8 percent a
150. applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists studs columns ducts hangers etc The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period any insulation found to pull apart after one hour shall be replaced 3 1 1 Installation Except as otherwise specified material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer s written instructions Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this specification are completed Material such as rust scale dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation Insulation shall be kept clean and dry Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition the insulation will P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 237 of 367 be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces 3 1 2 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Flexible elastomeric cellular in
151. ar operations and parking shall comply with all applicable government orders and regulations All driveways and entrances serving the Government shall be kept clear and available to emergency vehicles at all times 3 VEHICLE AND VEHICLE OPERATION All vehicles owned by the Contractor or employees of the Contractor and operators of these vehicles shall meet all state regulations for safety noise loading and minimum liability insurance All vehicle operators demonstrating reckless or careless operation in the opinion of the Government shall not be allowed to operate vehicles on government property for the duration of the contract 4 VISITORS No visiting vehicles will be permitted on government property unless the operator is employed by a subcontractor or supplier End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 55 00 Page 39 of 367 SECTION 01 56 60 GENERAL CLEANUP amp SITE RESTORATION OF WORK AREAS 1 GENERAL The Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of all trash and debris incidental to the contract work from the limits of government property as well as all adjacent affected areas The Contracting Officer shall determine the extent and interval of these cleanups 2 WORK AREA CLEANUP At the end of each day the entire work area and all adjacent affected areas shall be thoroughly cleaned by removing all trash debris dust etc caused by the contract work Any floor wall or ceiling surfaces that may have been stained or soil
152. aries shall be clearly marked on the floor plan Annunciator shall include a north arrow location of the fire alarm control panel and a you are here indicator The graphic annunciator shall be a minimum size of 3 by 3 feet 2 2 11 2 Indicating Lights Provide the graphic annunciator with individual light emitting diode LED indicating lights for each type of alarm and supervisory device Provide an amber LED for indicating a system trouble condition and a separate amber LED for indicating a supervisory condition Provide a green LED to indicate presence of power and a red LED to indicate an alarm condition The actuation of any alarm signal shall cause the illumination of a boundary LED a floor LED and a device LED System supervisory or trouble shall cause the illumination of a trouble LED In addition to all of these LED indicators provide normal power and emergency power indicating LEDs Provide a push button LED test switch The test switch shall not require key operation Annunciator LEDs shall only be extinguished by operation of the system reset switch on the FACP 2 2 11 3 Material Construct the graphic annunciator face plate of smoked Plexiglas The LEDs shall be backlit Control equipment and wiring shall be housed in a surface mounted back box The exposed portions of the back box shall be chrome plated with knockouts 2 2 11 4 Programming Where programming for the operation of the proper LEDs is accomplished by a separate sof
153. ated embossed or smooth sheet 0 016 inch nominal thickness ASTM B 209 Temper H14 Temper H16 Alloy 3003 5005 or 3105 Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel 0 015 inch thick 1 2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3 4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0 016 inch aluminum matching jacket material Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3 4 by 0 020 inch thick stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced tape The jacket may at the option of the Contractor be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or Z type longitudinal joint When the Z joint is used the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place 2 2 7 2 Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Jackets Polyvinyl chloride PVC jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength UV resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0 030 inch 2 2 8 Vapor Retarder Required ASTM C 921 Type I minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable Minimum tensile strength 35 pounds inch width ASTM C 921 Type I minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units tensile strength minimum 20 pounds inch width Jackets use
154. ater disposal method shall be utilized c The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 345 of 367 b Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping 1 Normal Conditions Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the sewer piping 2 Unusual Conditions When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above use the following construction a Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWA approved ductile iron water piping pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling b Water piping passing under sewer piping shall in addition be protected by providing a vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top of the water piping adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water piping and that the length minimum 20 feet of the water piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer piping c Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole 3 1 1 2 Earthwork Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 2
155. ater service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps until tied to the buildings plumbing system 3 1 3 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping 3 1 3 1 Installation of Plastic Piping Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines and with the applicable requirements of ASTM D 2774 and ASTM D 2855 unless otherwise specified Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F 402 a Jointing Make solvent cemented joints for PVC plastic piping using the solvent cement previously specified for this material assemble joints in accordance with ASTM D P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 347 of 367 2855 Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer b Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances Connect plastic pipe service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer 3 1 4 Disinfection Prior to disinfection obtain Contracting Officer s Technical Representative s approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor s operations in accordance with AWWA C651 Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solu
156. ators Provide a manual operator of crank gear or chain gear mechanisms with a release clutch to permit manual operation of doors in case of power failure Arrange the emergency manual operator so that it may be put into and out of operation from floor level and its use will not affect the adjustment of the limit switches Provide an electrical or mechanical device which will automatically disconnect the motor from the operating mechanism when the emergency manual operating mechanism is engaged 2 4 1 Door Operator Types Provide an operator which is suitable for the existing construction constraints at each opening to receive an overhead coiling door 2 4 2 Electric Motors Provide motors which are the high starting torque reversible constant duty electrical type with overload protection of sufficient torque and horsepower to move the door in either direction from any position and produce a door travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per second without exceeding the horsepower rating Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation temperature rating service factor enclosure type and efficiency to the requirements specified 2 4 3 Motor Bearings Bearings must be bronze sleeve or heavy duty ball or roller antifriction type with full provisions for the type of thrust imposed by the specific duty load Pre lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1 2 horsepower Equip motors coupled to worm gear
157. avation slopes and walls boils uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction French drains sumps ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure except with specific written approval and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material While the excavation is open the water level shall be maintained continuously at least 2 feet below the working level 3 1 3 Underground Utilities Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction 3 1 4 Machinery and Equipment P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 321 of 367 Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor s risk Repair or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged 3 2 SURFACE PREPARATION 3 2 1 Clearing and Grubbing Unless indicated otherwise remove trees stumps logs shrubs brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction operations within the clearing limits Remove stumps entirely Grub out matted roots and roots o
158. ay Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame at centerline of frame for interior bays and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to end wall outside face of end wall girt for end bays o Building Length Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing from end wall to end wall outside face of girt to outside face of girt Q Building Width Dimension of the building measured parallel to main framing from sidewall to sidewall outside face of girt to outside face of girt d Clear Span Distance between supports of beams girders or trusses measured from lowest level of connecting area of a column and a rafter frame or knee Eave Height Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave the line along the sidewall formed by intersection of the planes of the roof and wall Th Clear Height under Structure Vertical dimension from finished floor to lowest point of any part of primary or secondary structure not including crane supports located within clear span g Terminology Standard Refer to MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards 1 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION P N 05 C05 124 Section 13 34 19 Page 177 of 367 General Provide a complete integrated set of metal building system manufacturer s standard mutually dependent compo
159. ber ACI INTERNATIONAL ACI 38800 Country Club Drive Farmington Hills MI 48331 Ph 248 848 3700 Fax 248 848 3701 E mail bkstore concrete org Internet http www concrete org AIR CONDITIONING HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE AHRI 2111 Wilson blvd Suite 500 Arlington VA 22201 Ph 703 524 8800 Fax 703 528 3816 E mail ahri ahrinet org Internet http www ahrinet org AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL AMCA 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights IL 60004 1893 Ph 847 394 0150 Fax 847 253 0088 E mail amca amca org Internet http www amca org P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 20 of 367 ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION AA National Headquarters 1525 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington VA 22209 Ph 703 358 2960 Fax 703 358 2961 Internet http www aluminum org AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO 444 North Capital Street NW Suite 249 Washington DC 20001 Ph 202 624 5800 Fax 202 624 5806 E Mail info aashto org Internet http www aashto org AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS ACGIH 1330 Kemper Meadow Drive Cincinnati OH 45240 Ph 513 742 2020 Fax 513 742 3355 E mail mail acgih org Internet http www acgih org AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION AHA c o Composite Panel Association 18922 Premiere Court Gaithersburg MD 20879 1574 Ph 301 670 0604 Fax 301 840 1252 Intern
160. ber or recycled paper shall be applied as part of the hydroseeding operation Fiber shall be added at 1 000 pounds dry weight per acre Then add and mix seed and fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry Seed shall be mixed to ensure broadcasting at the rate of pounds per 1000 square feet When hydraulically sprayed on the ground material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated uniformly with grass seed Spread with one application with no second application of mulch P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 340 of 367 3 2 3 Mulching 3 2 3 1 Hay or Straw Mulch Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre Mulch shall be spread by hand blower type mulch spreader or other approved method Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes and continued uniformly until the area is covered The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading 3 2 3 2 Non Asphaltic Tackifier Hydrophilic colloid shall be applied at the rate recommended by the manufacturer using hydraulic equipment suitable for thoroughly mixing with water A uniform mixture shall be applied over the area 3 2 4 Rolling Immediately after seeding firm entire area except for slopes in e
161. bracing using any method specified above at manufacturer s option Provide bracing system that will not interfere with indicated openings and added components such as coiling doors 2 4 PANEL MATERIALS 2 4 1 Aluminum Sheet Roll form aluminum roof and wall panels to the specified profile with minimum 040 thickness and depth as indicated Material must be plumb and true and within the tolerances listed a Aluminum Sheet conforming to ASTM B 209 AA ADMI and AA ASD1 b Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any roof slope or wall area with no joints or seams and formed without warping waviness or ripples that are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system c Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of system specified 1 Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from manufacturer s standard for the indicated roof slope or wall area 2 Profile to be a 1 1 2 inch high rib at 12 inches o c with small stiffening ribs 38 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners OR 3 Profile to be a 1 1 2 inch high rib at 7 2 inches o c 38 7 8 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners 2 4 2 Steel Sheet Roll form steel roof and wall panels to the specified profile with minimum 24 gauge and depth as indicated Material must be plumb and true and within the tolerances listed P
162. by the manufacturer of that joint Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer s requirements 3 1 2 5 Plastic Pipe Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene ABS pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric threading threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed or mated flanged 3 1 3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials Connections between ferrous and non ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose 3 1 4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location 3 1 4 1 Sleeve Requirements Unless indicated otherwise provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements Secure sleeves in position and lo
163. capable of continuous operation down to the lowest step of unloading as specified Compressors of 10 tons and larger shall be provided with capacity reduction devices to produce automatic capacity reduction of at least 50 percent If standard with the manufacturer two or more compressors may be used in lieu of a single compressor with unloading capabilities in which case the compressors will operate in sequence and each compressor shall have an independent refrigeration circuit through the condenser and evaporator Each compressor shall start in the unloaded position Each compressor shall be provided with vibration isolators crankcase heater thermal overloads lubrication pump high and low pressure safety cutoffs and protection against short cycling 2 2 3 Refrigeration Circuit Refrigerant containing components shall comply with ASHRAE 15 amp 34 and be factory tested cleaned dehydrated charged and sealed Refrigerant charging valves and connections and pumpdown valves shall be provided for each circuit Filter drier shall be provided in each liquid line and be reversible flow type Refrigerant flow control devices shall be an adjustable superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer matched to coil capillary or thermostatic control and a pilot solenoid controlled leak tight four way refrigerant flow reversing valve A refrigerant suction line thermostatic control shall be provided to prevent freeze up in event of loss of
164. capacitors or other age dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non volatile processors PROMS or EPROMS 2 2 9 7 Field Programmability Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control initiation notification supervisory and trouble functions of both input and output The system program configuration shall be menu driven System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment 2 2 9 8 Input Output Modifications The FACP shall contain features which allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP 2 2 9 9 Resetting Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm supervisory or trouble signal while the alarm supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists 2 2 9 10 Instructions Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the FACP The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions normal alarm supervisory and trouble The instructions shall
165. cation during construction Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls ceilings roofs and floors P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 215 of 367 A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts nuts and pressure plates The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated or approved Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor or roof and shall be cut flush with each surface except for special circumstances Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms lavatories kitchens and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the f
166. caused by rain or running water 3 10 11 Protection After Curing Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations 3 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 11 1 Sampling ASTM C 172 Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified ASTM C 31 C 31M for making test specimens 3 11 2 Testing 3 11 2 1 Slump Tests ASTM C 143 C 143M Take concrete samples during concrete placement The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water cement ratio is not exceeded Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement when test cylinders are made and for each batch minimum or every 20 cubic yards maximum of concrete 3 11 2 2 Temperature Tests Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F for each batch minimum or every 20 cubic yards maximum of concrete until the specified temperature is obtained and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made 3 11 2 3 Compressive Strength Tests ASTM C 39 C 39M Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C 31 C 31M Take precautions to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen Test two cylinders at 7 days two cylinders at 28 days and hold one cylinder in reserve Take samples for strength tests of each mix design of and for concrete placed each day not less than
167. ce Data Electrical Systems G P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 276 of 367 Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING and as specified herein 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 3 1 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 1 3 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a singl
168. ceipt prior to concrete placement SD 06 Test Reports Concrete mix design G Compressive strength tests Air Content SD 07 Certificates Biodegradable Form Release Agent SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 58 of 367 Submit mill certificates for Steel Bar according to the paragraph entitled Fabrication of this section Provide certificates for concrete that are in accordance with the paragraph entitled Classification and Quality of Concrete of this section Provide certificates that contain project name and number date name of Contractor name of concrete testing service source of concrete aggregates material manufacturer brand name of manufactured materials material name values as specified for each material and test results 1 3 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory Interpret reference to the Building Official the Structural Engineer and the Architect Engineer to mean the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Do not deliver concrete until vapor barrier forms reinforcement embedded items and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement ACI MCP 2 for job site storage of materials Protect materials from contaminants such as grease oil and dirt Ensure materials can be accuratel
169. cer s Technical Representative Drive the powder actuated fasteners with a low velocity piston tool by an operator authorized by the manufacturer of the piston tool Drive pneumatically fasteners with a low velocity fastening tool and comply with the manufacturer s recommendations P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 98 of 367 3 2 1 3 Fastening Floor Deck Units Fasten floor deck units to the steel supporting members at ends and at all intermediate supports both parallel and perpendicular to deck span by welds Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch on center with a minimum of two welds per floor deck unit at each support Provide 3 4 inch minimum diameter fusion welds Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of the floor deck units Blow holes shall be cause for rejection Lock sidelaps between adjacent floor deck units together at intervals not exceeding 48 inch on center by welding or button punching for all spans 3 2 2 Openings Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the drawings specifications and other trades Frame and reinforce openings through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP Reinforce holes and openings 6 to 12 inch across by 0 0474 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch wider and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at each corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6 inch on center Reinforce holes and openings larger than 12 inch by steel channels or a
170. cing base members gable angles clips headers jambs and other miscellaneous structural members Fabricate framing from cold formed structural steel sheet or roll formed metallic coated steel sheet pre painted with coil coating unless otherwise indicated P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 187 of 367 Shop fabricate framing components by roll forming or break forming to the indicated size and section with base plates bearing plates stiffeners and other plates required for erection Cut form punch drill and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing a Purlins C or Z shaped sections fabricated from steel sheet built up steel plates or structural steel shapes minimum depth As required to comply with system performance requirements b Girts C or Z shaped sections fabricated from steel sheet built up steel plates or structural steel shapes Form ends of Z sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange minimum depth as required to comply with system performance requirements c Eave Struts Unequal flange C shaped sections fabricated from steel sheet built up steel plates or structural steel shapes to provide adequate backup for metal panels d Flange Bracing Structural steel angles or cold formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges e Sag Bracing Structural steel angles f Base or Sill Angles Zinc coated galvanized steel sheet g Purlin and G
171. conduits Prevent plaster dirt or trash from lodging in conduits boxes fittings and equipment during construction Free clogged conduits of obstructions 3 1 3 7 Locknuts and Bushings Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulated bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box otherwise use at least minimum single locknut and bushing Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures Install bushings on ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70 3 1 3 8 Flexible Connections Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for motors Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 3 4 inch diameter Provide liquid tight flexible nonmetallic conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission movement or motors Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections 3 1 4 Boxes Outlets and Supports Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast metal hub type when located in wet locations when surface mounted on outside
172. ction units consisting of hardened steel worm and bronze worm gear assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed casing coupled to the motor through a flexible coupling Drive shafts must rotate on ball or roller bearing assemblies that are integral with the unit Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance with AGMA provisions for class of service Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form machine teeth for all other types of gearing Surface harden all gears Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals 2 4 10 Chain Drives Provide roller chains that are power transmission series steel roller type conforming to ASME B29 400 with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the design load Roller chain side bars rollers pins and bushings must be heat treated or otherwise hardened Provide chain sprockets that are high carbon steel with machine cut hardened teeth finished bore and keyseat and hollow head setscrews 2 4 11 Brakes Provide brakes which are 360 degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes solenoid operated and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to set automatically when power is interrupted 2 4 12 Clutches Clutches must be the 4 inch diameter multiple face externally adjustable friction type or adjustable centrifugal type 2 5 SURFACE FINISHING Comply with NAAMM s Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
173. current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11 In exception for motor driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating such as a SEER rating provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated 2 11 2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10 In addition continuous rated polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings In exception for motor driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating such as a SEER rating provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated 2 11 3 Motor Sizes Provide size for duty to be performed not exceeding the full load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified make adjustments to wiring disconnect devices and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided Provide controllers for motors rated 1 hp and above with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and o
174. d maintained or replaced 3 3 7 Traps Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible and no fixture shall be double trapped Traps installed on cast iron soil pipe shall be cast iron Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess drainage pattern or brass tube type Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311 Traps for acid resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe 3 4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS 3 4 1 Identification Tags Identification tags made of brass engraved laminated plastic or engraved anodized aluminum indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures Tags shall be 1 3 8 inch minimum diameter and marking shall be stamped or engraved Indentations shall be black for reading clarity Tags shall be attached to valves with No 12 AWG copper wire chrome plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose 3 4 2 Pipe Color Code Marking Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 5 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping exposed to view passes through floors walls or ceilings except in boiler utility or equipment rooms Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin finish corrosion resisting steel polished chromium pla
175. d 1 25 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 Provide weather stripping with one of the following 2 2 13 1 Extruded Aluminum Retainers Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0 050 inch wall thickness with vinyl neoprene silicone rubber or polyurethane inserts Provide bronze anodized aluminum 2 2 13 2 Interlocking Type Zinc or bronze not less than 0 018 inch thick 2 2 13 3 Spring Tension Type Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0 008 inch thick 2 2 14 Rain Drips Extruded aluminum not less than 0 08 inch thick bronze anodized Set drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws 2 2 14 1 Door Rain Drips Approximately 1 1 2 inch high by 5 8 inch projection Align bottom with bottom edge of door 2 2 14 2 Overhead Rain Drips Approximately 1 1 2 inch high by 2 1 2 inch projection with length equal to overall width of door frame Align bottom with door frame rabbet 2 2 15 Special Tools Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys required to service and adjust hardware items 2 3 FASTENERS Provide fasteners of proper type quality size quantity and finish with hardware Provide stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are exposed to weather Provide fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation 2 4 FINISHES P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 140 of 367 BHMA A156 18
176. d at every other curtain slat 2 1 5 Weather Stripping Weather stripping at the door head and jamb must be 1 8 inch thick sheet of natural or neoprene rubber with air baffles secured to the insides of hoods with galvanized steel fasteners through continuous galvanized steel pressure bars at least 5 8 inch wide and 1 8 inch thick Threshold weather stripping must be 1 8 inch thick sheet natural or neoprene rubber secured to the bottom bars Provide weather stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D 2000 2 1 6 Locking Devices Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock located on both left and right jamb sides operable from coil side Locking Device Assembly which includes cylinder lock spring loaded dead bolt operating handle cam plate and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks 2 1 7 Safety Interlock Equip power operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked 2 1 8 Overhead Drum Fabricate drums from nominal 0 028 inch thick hot dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 Z275 zinc coating complying with ASTM A 653 A 653M Fabricate drums from nominal 0 040 inch thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209 ASTM B 209M of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finish for type of use and finish indicated 2 2 HARDWARE All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153 A 153M ASTM A 307 ASTM F 568M and ASTM A 27 A 27M
177. d bed preparation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SEED Seed shall be provided in accordance with NCDOT SHS Section 1660 subject to frequent mowing 2 1 1 Classification Provide State approved Endophyte enhanced seed of the latest season s crop delivered in original sealed packages bearing producer s guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures purity germination weedseed content and inert material Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws Wet moldy or otherwise damaged seed will be P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 336 of 367 rejected Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the presence of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 2 1 2 Planting Dates and Rate Planting dates shall be in accordance with the requirements of NCDOT SHS Section 1660 and the following table Subject to frequent mowing Application Rate Per Acre March1 August 31 September 1 February 28 25 Bermudagrass 35 Bermudagrass 6 Indiangrass 6 Indiangrass 8 Little Bluestem 8 Little Bluestem 4 Switchgrass 4 Switchgrass 25 Brownstop Millet 35 Rye Grain 2 1 3 Seed Purity Seed purity shall be in accordance with requirements of NCDOT SHS Section 1660 2 1 4 Seed Mixture by Weight Proportion seed mixtures by weight 2 2 TOPSOIL 2 2 1 On Site Topsoil Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragr
178. d concrete from premature drying and cold or hot temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from surface of concrete after placing and finishing Keep concrete moist for minimum 72 hours Final curing must immediately follow initial curing and before concrete has dried Continue final curing until cumulative number of hours or fraction thereof not necessarily consecutive during which temperature of air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F has totaled 168 hours Alternatively if tests are made of cylinders kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods final curing may be terminated when the average compressive strength has P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 83 of 367 reached 70 percent of the 28 day design compressive strength Prevent rapid drying at end of final curing period 3 10 2 Moist Curing Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure Prevent water run off 3 10 2 1 Pervious Sheeting Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting Overlap sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting Provide sheeting that is at least as long as the width of the surface to be cured During application do not drag the sheeting over the finished concrete nor over sheeting already placed Wet sh
179. d loads The area under the plate must be damp packed solidly with bedding mortar except where nonshrink grout is indicated on the drawings Bedding mortar and grout must be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 3 3 PAINTING 3 3 1 Touch Up Painting After erection of joists touch up connections and areas of abraded shop coat with paint of the same type used for the shop coat 3 3 2 Field Painting Paint joists requiring a finish coat in conformance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 05 21 19 Page 93 of 367 SECTION 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Accessories Galvanizing Repair Paint Mechanical Fasteners SD 07 Certificates Welding Procedures 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 2 1 Deck Units Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of steel decking Provide manufacturer s certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified requirements 1 2 2 Qualifications for Welding Work Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1 1 D1 1M Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1 1 D1 1M or under an equivalent approved qualification test Submit manufacturer s catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods and Accessories 1 2 3 Regulatory
180. d on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing Based on the application insulation materials that require factory applied jackets are mineral fiber cellular glass polyisocyanurate and phenolic foam Insulation materials that do not require jacketing are flexible elastomerics All non metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 2 8 1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket ASJ Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot cold pipes ducts or equipment Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing 2 2 8 2 Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings a The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed greater than 3 plys standard grade silver white black and embossed white jacket for use on hot cold pipes Less than 0 02 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 E 96M Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements UV resistant 2 2 8 3 Vapor Barrier The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate white vapor barrier jacket superior performance less than 0 0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 235 of 367 96 E 96M Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or AST
181. d panels P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 72 of 367 For concrete surfaces exposed only to the ground undressed square edge 1 inch nominal thickness lumber may be used Provide horizontal joints that are level and vertical joints that are plumb 3 3 7 Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish Give smooth form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be exposed to view or that are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with covering material bonded to concrete such as waterproofing dampproofing painting or other similar coating system Form facing material for standard smooth finish must be the specified overlaid concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that is nonreactive with concrete and that produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced by new overlaid concrete form plywood panels Maximum deflection of form facing material between supports and maximum deflection of form supports such as studs and wales must not exceed 0 0025 times the span Provide arrangement of form facing sheets that are orderly and symmetrical and sheets that are in sizes as large as practical Arrange panels to make a symmetrical pattern of joints Horizontal and vertical joints must be solidly backed and butted tight to prevent leakage and fins 3 3 8 Form Ties Provide ties that are factory fabricated metal adjustable in length removable or snap off type that do
182. d piping P N 05 C05 124 Section 22 00 00 Page 211 of 367 2 11 4 Nameplates Provide 0 125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates black matte finish with white center core for equipment gages thermometers and valves valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block lettering into the white core Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1 0 by 2 5 inches Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule 2 11 5 Labels Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets Include the following information on each label a Identification of the sensor and its operation with written description b Range of the sensor c Battery replacement schedule PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures fittings traps valves and accessories Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building unless otherwise indicated A gate valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place Sewer and water pipes s
183. d under Division 26 except internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment 1 4 2 High Efficiency Motors 1 4 2 1 High Efficiency Single Phase Motors Unless otherwise specified single phase fractional horsepower alternating current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11 P N 05 C05124 Section 23 03 00 Page 226 of 367 1 4 2 2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors Unless otherwise specified polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10 Additionally polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12 6C of NEMA MG 1 1 4 3 Three Phase Motor Protection Provide controllers for motors rated one one horsepower and larger with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay 1 5 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL When specified in other sections furnish the services of competent inst
184. dividually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements 1 2 2 Related Requirements Specific requirements relating to Reliability Centered Maintenance RCM principals and Predictive Testing and Inspection PTI by the construction contractor to detect latent manufacturing and installation defects must be followed as part of the Contractor s Quality Control program Refer to the paragraph titled Sustainability for detailed requirements 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 06 Test Reports TAB report for Season 1 CO P N 05 C05124 Section 23 05 93 Page 230 of 367 SD 07 Certificates Independent TAB agency and personnel qualifications CO 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Independent Tab Agency and Personnel Qualifications To secure approval for the proposed agency submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract including design furnishing equipment or construction Further submit the following for the agency to Contracting Officer for approval PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used End of Section P N
185. e manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 3 2 1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 1 4 MAINTENANCE 1 4 1 Electrical Systems Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building This shall include a Single line diagram of the as built building electrical system b Schematic diagram of electrical control system other than HVAC covered elsewhere c Manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 277 of 367 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials equipment and devices shall as a minimum meet requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items and requirements of NFPA 70 2 2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Shall conform to the following 2 2 1 Rigid Metallic Conduit 2 2 1 1 Rigid Threaded Zinc Coated Steel Conduit NEMA C80 1 UL 6 2 2 2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC Type EPC 40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2 UL 651 2 2 3 Intermediate Metal Conduit IMC UL 1242 zinc coated steel only 2 2 4 Electrical Zinc Coated Steel Metallic Tubing EMT UL 797 NEMA C80 3 2 2
186. e maximum working pressure of the system Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test Test PVC plastic pressure lines in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C605 for pressure and leakage tests using the allowable leakage given therein End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 358 of 367 SECTION 33 32 16 GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATION 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work includes providing submersible sewage grinder pump station and related work Provide system complete and ready for operations Grinder pump station system including equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be as specified herein 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Pipe and fittings Check valves Gate valves G Submersible sewage grinder pumps G Pump motor G Flexible flanged coupling SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Submersible Sewage Grinder Pumps Data Package 3 G Submit in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING Include pumps alarms and motors Include all information on all equipment alarm panel and controls pumps and pump performance curves and station layout in data for submersible sewage grinder pump station 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 1 3 1 Delivery and Storage P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 359 of 367 Inspect
187. e and wider Bead reinforcement shall be provided in lieu of crossbreaking where panel popping may occur Where rigid insulation will be applied crossbreaking is not required 3 3 1 1 Longitudinal Duct Seams Corner seams shall be Pittsburg lock 3 3 1 2 Joints and Gaskets Companion angle flanges shall be bolted together with 1 4 inch diameter bolts and nuts spaced 6 inches on center Flanged joints shall be gasketed with chloroprene full face gaskets 1 8 inch thick with Shore A 40 durometer hardness Gaskets shall be one piece and vulcanized at joints 3 3 1 3 Flexible Duct Joints Joints between flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal ductwork connections shall be made by trimming the ends coating the inside of the flexible duct for a distance equal to depth of insertion with elastomer calk and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a strap clamp 3 3 1 4 Square Elbows Provide single vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966 and may be used on ducts 12 inches wide and narrower Provide double vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966 3 3 1 5 Radius Elbows Conform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows Provide an inside radius equal to the width of the duct Where installation conditions preclude use of standard elbows the inside radius may be reduced to a minimum of 0 25 times duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the following schedule RADIUS OF TURNING WIDTH OF ELBOWS VAN
188. e ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section 3 1 3 Suspended Fixtures Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions The stem canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing Pendants rods or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches nicks dents and warps and shall match the color and gloss specified Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer whichever is less 3 1 4 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area 3 1 4 1 Exit Signs Wire exit signs on separate circuits and serve from End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 298 of 367 SECTION 28 31 63 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 10 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section
189. e cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads the heads shall be cast iron 3 2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS 3 2 1 Relief Valves No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank The P amp T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater Whenever possible the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater otherwise the P amp T valve shall be installed in the hot water outlet piping A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater 3 2 2 Heat Traps Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an upward direction 3 2 3 Connections to Water Heaters Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges 3 2 4 Expansion Tank A pre charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut off valve The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure as recommended by the tank manufacturer to match incoming water pressure 3 3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS Polished chromium plated pipe valves and fittings shall be provided where exp
190. e constructed of AWWA approved ductile iron water pipe pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling b Sanitary piping passing over water lines shall in addition be protected by providing 1 A vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sanitary piping and the top of the water line 2 Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water line 3 That the length minimum 20 feet of the sanitary piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the water line c Sanitary sewer manholes No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sanitary sewer manhole 3 1 1 2 Earthwork Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00 3 1 1 3 Pipe Laying and Jointing Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation replace those found defective and remove from site Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade direction Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted Replace by one of the proper dimensions pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material At the end of each work day close open ends of
191. e defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government Store rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight 1 2 2 1 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe and Fittings Handle Polyvinyl Chloride PVC pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations Store plastic piping and jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight Storage facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704 with classification as indicated in NFPA 49 and NFPA 325 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS 2 1 1 Piping Materials 2 1 1 1 Plastic Piping Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation NSF for potable water service Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer a Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Piping with Screw Joints ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2241 with SDR as necessary to provide 150 psi minimum pressure rating Fittings ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467 Pipe and fittings shall be of the same PVC plastic material and shall be one of the following pipe fitting combinations as marked on the pipe and fitting respectively PVC 2120 PVC II PVC 2116 PVC II Solvent cement for jointing ASTM D 2564 Pipe couplings when used shall be tested as required by ASTM D 2464 b Polyvinyl Chloride PVC
192. e from a true plane by more than 1 8 inch Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface mounted cabinets with outside spacers and inside stiffeners for mounting the cabinets with a 1 2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three point latch having a knob with a T handle and a cylinder lock Two keys shall be provided with each lock and all locks shall be keyed alike Finished head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets 2 10 2 Panelboard Buses Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining drilling or tapping Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors bond to steel cabinet 2 10 3 Circuit Breakers UL 489 thermal magnetic type having a minimum short circuit current rating equal to the short circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided Series rated circuit brea
193. e mastic smears and other unsightly marks End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 13 Page 120 of 367 SECTION 08 11 16 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 1 1 Structural Shapes and thicknesses of framing members shall be sufficient to withstand a design wind load of not less than 50 pounds per square foot of supported area with a deflection of not more than 1 175 times the length of the member and a safety factor of not less than 1 65 Provide glazing beads moldings and trim of not less than 0 050 inch nominal thickness 1 1 2 Air Infiltration When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 air infiltration shall not exceed 0 30 cubic feet per minute per square foot of fixed area at a test pressure of 6 24 pounds per square foot 50 mile per hour wind 1 1 3 Water Penetration When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 there shall be no water penetration at a pressure of 8 pounds per square foot of fixed area 7 51 psf for doors 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Windows and frames G Show elevations of each window type size of frames metal gages details of window and frame construction methods of anchorage glazing details weatherstripping provisions for and location of hardware and details of installation SD 04 Samples Finish sample Insulating Glass SD 05 Design Data P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 16
194. e structural elements are completed and accepted Backfill against concrete only when approved Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure 3 5 3 Select Material Placement Provide under structures Place in 6 inch lifts Do not place over wet or frozen areas Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted Backfill against concrete only when approved Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against structure 3 5 4 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved underground utilities systems have been inspected tested and approved forms removed and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade Where pipe is coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion the backfill material up to an elevation 2 feet above sewer lines and 1 foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 4 inches in compacted thickness with power driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted Backfill shall be placed carefully aro
195. e tests to Contracting Officer s Technical Representative within 12 hours after collecting the data Floor flatness inspector is required to provide a tolerance report which must include a Key plan showing location of data collected b Results required by ASTM E 1155 3 10 CURING AND PROTECTION ACI MCP 2 unless otherwise specified Begin curing immediately following form removal Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting pile driving movement of equipment in the vicinity disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement and any other activity resulting in ground vibrations Protect concrete from injurious action by sun rain flowing water frost mechanical injury tire marks and oil stains Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration of the specified curing period Do not use membrane forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be objectionable on any surface to be painted where coverings are to be bonded to the concrete or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period provide another curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period Provide moist curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer hardener or epoxy coating Allow curing compound sealer installations to cure prior to the installation of materials that adsorb VOCs 3 10 1 General Protect freshly place
196. e vapor barrier material 3 5 3 Reinforcement Supports Place reinforcement and secure with galvanized or non corrodible chairs spacers or metal hangers For supporting reinforcement on the ground use concrete or other non corrodible material having a compressive strength equal to or greater than the concrete being placed 3 5 4 Splicing P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 74 of 367 Per ACI MCP 2 Do not splice at points of maximum stress Overlap welded wire fabric the spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches 3 5 5 Cover ACI MCP 2 for minimum coverage unless otherwise indicated 3 5 6 Setting Miscellaneous Material Place and secure anchors and bolts pipe sleeves conduits and other such items in position before concrete placement Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete 3 5 7 Construction Joints Locate joints to least impair strength Continue reinforcement across joints unless otherwise indicated 3 5 8 Fabrication Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to shapes and dimensions indicated for reinforcement and as follows Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI MCP 1 ACI MCP 2 and ACI MCP 3 Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with and ACI MCP 3 Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated Bending must be done in the shop Rebending of a reinforcing bar tha
197. e wall insulated construction is proposed minimum exterior galvanized P N 05 C05 124 Section 23 82 02 Page 267 of 367 sheet metal thickness shall be 20 gauge Provisions to permit replacement of major unit components shall be incorporated Penetrations of cabinet surfaces including the floor shall be sealed Unit shall be fitted with a drain pan which extends under all areas where water may accumulate Drain pan shall be fabricated from Type 300 stainless steel galvanized steel with protective coating as required or an approved plastic material Pan insulation shall be water impervious Extent and effectiveness of the insulation of unit air containment surfaces shall prevent within limits of the specified insulation heat transfer between the unit exterior and ambient air heat transfer between the two conditioned air streams and condensation on surfaces Insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1071 Paint and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph FACTORY COATING 2 4 7 1 Indoor Cabinet Indoor cabinets shall be suitable for the specified indoor service and enclose all unit components 2 4 7 2 Outdoor Cabinet Outdoor cabinets shall be suitable for outdoor service with a weathertight insulated and corrosion protected structure Cabinets constructed exclusively for indoor service which have been modified for outdoor service are not acceptable 2 5 FINISHES 2 5 1 Factory Coating 2 5 1 1 Coil Corrosion Protection Pr
198. e will permit installation of decking system without modification 3 2 INSTALLATION P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 97 of 367 Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 30 approved shop drawings Place units on structural supports properly adjusted leveled and aligned at right angles to supports before permanently securing in place Damaged deck and accessories including material which is permanently stained or contaminated deformed or with burned holes shall not be installed Extend deck units over three or more supports unless absolutely impractical Report inaccuracies in alignment or leveling to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and make necessary corrections before permanently anchoring deck units Locate deck ends over supports only Do not use unanchored deck units as a work or storage platform Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each working day Do not support suspended ceilings light fixtures ducts utilities or other loads by steel deck unless indicated Distribute loads by appropriate means to prevent damage Chip off burrs and eliminate sharp edges which may damage wiring Mesh decking panels accurately and place in accordance with UL 209 3 2 1 Attachment Immediately after placement and alignment and after correcting inaccuracies permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports and to adjacent deck units by welding with normal5 8 inch diameter puddle welds or fastened with scre
199. eads and jambs and flexible hook type at sills Nail weather stripping to door one inch on center and to heads and jambs at 4 inch on center 3 1 1 3 Spring Tension Type Weather Stripping Provide spring tension type on heads and jambs Provide bronze nails with bronze stainless steel nails with stainless steel Space nails not more than 1 1 2 inch on center 3 1 2 Threshold Installation Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb stops Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with cadmium plated countersunk steel screws in expansion sleeves 3 2 FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 141 of 367 Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors NFPA 101 for exit doors 3 3 HARDWARE LOCATIONS SDI DOOR A250 8 unless indicated or specified otherwise a Kick Plates Push side of single acting doors b Mop Plates Bottom flush with bottom of door 3 4 HARDWARE SETS HW 1 3 EACH HINGES BHMA 1 EACH EXIT DEVICE BHMA 1 EACH CYLINDER BHMA 1 EACH CLOSER STOP BHMA 1 EACH KICK PLATE BHMA 1 EACH THRESHOLD BHMA 1 SET WEATHERSTRIPPING BHMA RAIN DRIPS 2 EACH SILENCERS BHMA HW 2 3 EACH HINGES BHMA 1 EACH EXIT DEVICE BHMA 1 EACH CYLINDER BHMA 1 EACH CLOSER STOP BHMA 1 EACH KICK PLATE BHMA 3 EACH SILENCERS BHMA HW 3 3 EACH HINGES BHMA 1 EACH LOCK SET BHMA 1 EACH CLOSER BHMA 1 EACH KICK PLATE BHMA 1 EACH FLOOR STOP BHMA 3 EACH SILENCERS BHMA
200. ected in writing Such directive will state the conditions covering the disposal of such products and will also state the areas in which they may be placed End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 31 11 00 Page 315 of 367 SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 1 Capillary Water Barrier A layer of clean poorly graded crushed rock stone or natural sand or gravel having a high porosity which is placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below a slab Number 57 gradation or similar 1 1 2 Degree of Compaction Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 698 for general soil types abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density 1 1 3 Hard Materials Weathered rock dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of rock but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal 1 1 4 Rock Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges or the use of backhoe mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers
201. ed As Built drawings are accepted Maximum retention shall be withheld for late or incomplete As Built drawings End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 72 00 Page 44 of 367 SECTION 01 73 00 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING 1 MANUALS Upon completion of the work but before the work is accepted by the Government the Contractor must forward two complete bound sets of instructions tabbed and identified for reference for all equipment and or systems provided under this contract The instructions shall include component parts manufacturer s certificates warranty slips parts lists descriptive brochures and manufacturer s maintenance and operating instructions 2 TRAINING The Contractor shall provide two hours of training which shall explain to the Government s personnel all procedures necessary to operate and maintain all equipment and systems on a continuing basis A verification of training shall be provided End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 73 00 Page 45 of 367 LIST OF SUBMITTALS 010300 1 Pre Con Site Conditions 013100 1a Construction Schedule J lt gt fie Schedule of Vaes OOo 2 PogesScede JOOS rs403 Saey Pan oS S ors410 1 Lockout Tag out Pan Oooo ors mos SS SSS 3 Protective Measures JOOS 015690 4 Hazardous Waste Documents O oO or7200 5 AsBultDrawins O o 01730 1 Operating Instructions J o fo Verification of
202. ed by the contract work shall be restored to pre construction condition 3 SITE RESTORATION If at any time while performing the contract the Contractor causes damage or destruction to any portion of any Government facility or grounds e g bulkheads pavement lawns shrubbery etc it shall be the Contractor s responsibility to replace and or restore the damage as approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative at no additional cost to the Government 4 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP Upon completion of the job the Contractor shall clean up the job site returning it to a state of cleanliness equal to or exceeding that in which it was found The Contractor shall properly dispose of any trash extra materials dirt debris or other litter that remains If the job site appearance is not to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative final acceptance will not be approved End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 56 60 Page 40 of 367 SECTION 01 56 90 HAZARDOUS WASTE 1 GENERAL The Contractor shall comply with all federal state and local environmental regulations dealing with the generation management storage and disposal of solid toxic and hazardous wastes The Contractor shall ensure that all wastes are properly containerized labeled and placarded managed tested stored transported and disposed of in accordance with all applicable regulations 2 USED ELECTRIC LAMPS 40 CFR
203. ed spaces Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces 2 11 2 Pipe Sleeves Provide where piping passes entirely through walls ceilings roofs and floors Sleeves are not required where supply drain waste and vent DWV piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor 2 11 2 1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves Sleeves are not required where drain waste and vent DWV piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core drilled hole are completely grouted smooth 2 11 2 2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves 2 11 3 Pipe Hangers Supports Provide MSS SP 58 and MSS SP 69 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods except as specified or indicated otherwise Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21 28 29 or 30 clamps Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulate
204. een the hours of 0800 and 1500 Monday thru Friday End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 02 80 Page 9 of 367 SECTION 01 03 00 PRE CONSTRUCTION SITE CONDITIONS 1 SITE CONDITION VERIFICATION The Contractor shall verify the conditions of the existing site equipment and facilities potentially affected by the work under this contract and photograph and or videotape the conditions in order to document their pre construction condition Copies of the photos and videos shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to starting work 2 UTILITIES The contractor shall use proactive measures such as digging metering testing underground utility location devices and utility company location services to locate all underground utilities identified in the area of work at no additional expense to the Government Additional cost of unplanned outages and repair of damaged utilities including emergency repairs by others not properly identified by the Contractor shall be the Contractor s responsibility End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 03 00 Page 10 of 367 SECTION 01 04 00 COORDINATION 1 INTERFERENCE WITH COAST GUARD OPERATIONS Accomplish work in a manner that causes minimal impact on normal operations The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative at least five working days in advance of any planned outages of water electrical telephone or sanitary facilities Notify the Con
205. een water cement ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies In addition plot a curve showing the relationship between 7 and 28 day strengths 2 3 1 2 Required Average Strength of Mix Design The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength exceeding the specified strength by the amount indicated in ACI MCP 2 When a concrete production facility has a record of at least 15 consecutive tests the standard deviation must be calculated and the required average compressive strength must be determined in accordance with ACI MCP 2 When a concrete production facility does not have a suitable record of tests to establish a standard deviation the required average strength must follow ACI MCP 2 requirements 2 3 2 Ready Mix Concrete Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C 94 C 94M Ready mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered Provide delivery tickets with the following information in addition to that required by ASTM C 94 C 94M Type and brand cement Cement content in 95 pound bags per cubic yard of concrete Maximum size of aggregate Amount and brand name of admixtures Total water content expressed by water cement ratio 2 3 3 Concrete Curing Materials 2 3 3 1 Absorptive Cover Provide burlap cloth cover for curing concrete made from jute or kenaf weighing 10 ounces plus or minus 5 percent per square yard when clean and dry conforming to ASTM C 171 Cla
206. eeting thoroughly and keep continuously wet throughout the curing period 3 10 2 2 Impervious Sheeting Wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting Cover or wrap columns walls and other vertical structural elements from the top down with impervious sheeting overlap and continuously tape sheeting joints and introduce sufficient water to soak the entire surface prior to completely enclosing 3 10 3 Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound Prevent curing compound from entering the joint Apply in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing period Do not use this method of curing where the use of Figure 2 1 5 in ACI MCP 2 indicates that hot weather conditions cause an evaporation rate exceeding 0 2 pound of water per square foot per hour 3 10 3 1 Application Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwi
207. eets metal panels and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed and protected during transportation and handling Stack and store metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets covered with suitable weather tight and ventilated covering to ensure dryness with positive slope for drainage of water Store in a manner to prevent bending warping twisting and surface damage Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining denting or other surface damage Retain strippable protective covering on metal panel for entire period up to metal panel installation Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction to minimize ultraviolet exposure P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 182 of 367 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 7 1 Weather Limitations Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing panel system or building 1 7 2 Field Measurements 1 7 2 1 Established Dimensions for Foundations Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor bolt plans established foundation dimensions and proceed with fabricating structural framing Do not proceed without verifying field measurements Coordinate anchor bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions 1 7 2 2 Established Dimen
208. elboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings Use of Subfeed Breakers is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise Main breaker shall be separately mounted above branch breakers Where space only is indicated make provisions for future installation of breakers Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard e g Panel PA served from Panel MDP Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 2 10 1 Enclosure Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50 All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No 10 gauge if flush mounted or mounted outdoors and not less than No 12 gauge if surface mounted indoors with full seam welded box ends Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush mounted shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING Front edges of cabinets shall be form flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel for supporting the panelboard front All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 281 of 367 deviat
209. elivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 1 6 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 1 7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel The operating instructions shall include the following P N 05 C05124 Section 26 00 00 Page 273 of 367 2 Wiring diagrams control diagrams and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment b Start up proper adjustment operating lubrication and shutdown procedures c Safety precautions d The procedure in the event of equipment failure e Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic Post instructions where directed For operating instructions exposed to the weather provide weather resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling 1 8 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s n
210. els 3 9 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 3 9 1 General Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather tight mounting and provide for thermal expansion Coordinate installation with flashings and other components 3 9 2 Dissimilar Metals Where dissimilar metals contact one another or corrosive substrates are present protect against galvanic action by painting dissimilar metal surfaces with bituminous coating by applying rubberized asphalt underlayment to each surface or by other permanent separation techniques as recommended by the metal building manufacturer 3 9 3 Gutters and Downspouts Comply with performance requirements manufacturer s written installation instructions and install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA 1793 recommendations and as indicated Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 197 of 367 3 9 4 Insulation Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer s written installation instructions Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof area 3 9 5 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties Install roof and wall accessories and specialties complete with necessary hardware anchors dampers weather guards rain caps and equipment support 3 10 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION 3 10 1 Structural
211. en manufacturer s equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment provide copper conductors or splices splice boxes and other work required to satisfy manufacturer s requirements 2 5 1 2 Minimum Conductor Sizes Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No 12 AWG for Class 1 remote control and signal circuits No 14 AWG for Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuits No 16 AWG and for Class 3 low energy remote control alarm and signal circuits No 22 AWG 2 5 2 Color Coding Provide for service feeder branch control and signaling circuit conductors Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 279 of 367 system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals shall be white with a different colored not green stripe for each Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows a 208 120 volt three phase 1 Phase A black 2 Phase B red 3 Phase C blue 2 5 3 Insulation Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 power and lighting wires shall be 600 volt Type THWN THHN conforming to UL 83 except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83 remote control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF conforming to UL 83 Where lighting fixtures require 90 de
212. ent construction as required to meet wind loading and in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions Anchor bottom of each frame to building construction with 3 32 inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured to back of each jamb and to floor construction use stainless steel bolts and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors 3 2 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS 3 2 1 Dissimilar Metals Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel zinc or small areas of white bronze protect from direct contact to dissimilar metals 3 2 1 1 Protection Provide one of the following systems to protect surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals a Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy bodied bituminous paint b Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the dissimilar metal c Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of aluminum paint d Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations 3 2 2 Drainage from Dissimilar Metals In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with aluminum provide protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration 3 2 3 Masonry and Concrete Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar concrete or other masonry materials with one coat of heavy bodied bituminous paint P N 05 C05124 Section 08 11 16 Page 125 of 367 3 2 4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials Provide alu
213. ent pieces are acceptable if they are within one half of the range of approved Samples Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION Before erection proceeds examine with the erector present the concrete foundation dimensions concrete and or masonry bearing surfaces anchor bolt size and placement survey slab elevation locations of bearing plates and other embedment s to receive structural framing with the metal building manufacturer s templates and drawings before erecting any steel components for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that rafters purlins angles channels and other structural and metal panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal building manufacturer UL ASTM ASCE 7 05 and as required by the building code for the geographical area where construction will take place P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 194 of 367 Examine roughing in for components and systems penetrating metal roof or wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal roof or wall panel installation Submit
214. ents specified above Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0 003 inch Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise with a maximum 350 percent elongation 2 5 2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non Metallic Piping Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width color and printing requirements specified above Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0 004 inch Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires foil backing or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection 2 6 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON METALLIC PIPING Detection wire shall be insulated single strand solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PROTECTION 3 1 1 Shoring and Sheeting Provide shoring bracing cribbing trench boxes underpinning and sheeting as required In addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385 1 1 and other requirements set forth in this contract include provisions in the shoring and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 320 of 367 a Prevent undermining of pavements foundations and slabs b Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation 3 1 2 Drainage and Dewatering Provide for the collection and di
215. ept for salvaged items specified in related Sections and for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property Title to materials resulting from demolition and materials and equipment to be removed is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor s demolition and removal procedures and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of or damage to such property after contract award Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited 3 3 CLEANUP Remove debris and rubbish from the site Remove and transport the in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal 3 4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS 3 4 1 Regulation of Removed Materials Dispose of debris rubbish scrap and other non salvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal state and local regulations Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited P N 05 C05124 Section 02 41 00 Page 55 of 367 3 4 2 Removal from Government Property Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures from Government property for legal disposal End of Section P N 05 C0512
216. er than as indicated details shall include loadings and proposed support methods Mechanical drawing plans elevations views and details shall be drawn to scale SD 03 Product Data Fixtures List of installed fixtures with manufacturer model and flow rate Flush valve water closets Flush valve urinals Wall hung lavatories Service sinks Drinking water coolers G Plastic shower units Water heaters G Backflow prevention assemblies G P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 200 of 367 Shower Faucets G Plumbing System Diagrams instructions and other sheets proposed for posting Manufacturer s recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Plumbing System G Submit in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATIING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING 1 2 STANDARD PRODUCTS Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manu
217. erference with other reinforcement or with conduit pipe or other embedded items If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 76 of 367 one bar diameter or specified placing tolerance resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to approval 3 5 11 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI MCP 4 ASTM E 648 and ACI MCP 3 3 5 12 Welding Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1 4 D1 4M 3 6 BATCHING MEASURING MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE ASTM C 94 C 94M and ACI MCP 2 except as modified herein Batching equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances 1 percent for cement and water 2 percent for aggregate and 3 percent for admixtures Furnish mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete 3 6 1 Measuring Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled Sampling and Testing 3 6 2 Mixing ASTM C 94 C 94M and ACI MCP 2 Machine mix concrete Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 84 degrees F Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 84 degrees F except as fol
218. ermanent freedom from noise due to wind pressure Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted 3 5 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge as indicated unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place in accordance with NRCA RWM and MBMA MBSM Erect roofing system in accordance with the approved erection drawings the printed instructions and safety precautions of the metal building manufacturer Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading abuse or undue impact Do not install bent chipped or defective sheets Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical edges of the building securely anchored and with the indicated rake and eave overhang Work must allow for thermal movement of the roofing movement of the building structure and provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind pressure Field cutting metal roof panels by torch is not permitted Roofing sheets must be laid with corrugations in the direction of the roof slope End laps of exterior roofing must not be less than 8 inches the side laps of standard exterior corrugated sheets must not be not less than 2 1 2 corrugations Do not permit storage walking wheeling and trucking directly on applied roofing materials Provide temporary walkways runways and platforms of smoot
219. es are plumb and true If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer notify Contracting Officer s Technical Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before processing Check field dimensions before beginning installation If dimensions vary too much from design dimensions for proper installation notify Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and wait for instructions before beginning installation P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 69 of 367 3 2 PREPARATION Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess concrete Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before the concrete is poured 3 2 1 General Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris loose material standing water snow ice and other deleterious substances before start of concrete placing Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose 3 2 2 Subgrade Under Foundations and Footings When subgrade material is semiporous and dry sprinkle subgrade surface with water as required to eliminate suction at the time concrete is deposited When subgrade material is porous seal subgrade surface by covering surface with specified water barrier subgrade cover this may also be used over semiporous dry subgrade material instead of water sprinkling 3 2 3 Subgrade Under Slabs on Grou
220. es and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth 3 5 APPLICATION 3 5 1 Coating Application Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal state and local laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1 SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates except as modified herein At the time of application paint shall show no signs of deterioration Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer paint may be applied by brush roller or spray Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil based paints or using spray equipment with any paints Paints except water thinned types shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch Thoroughly work coating materials into joints crevices and open spaces Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges corners crevices welds and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs drops ridges waves pinhole
221. es may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard Valves shall conform to the following standards Description Standard P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 204 of 367 Butterfly Valves Cast Iron Gate Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends Ball Valves with Flanged Butt Welding Ends for General Service Ball Valves Threaded Socket Welding Solder Joint Grooved and Flared Ends Cast Iron Plug Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends Bronze Gate Globe Angle and Check Valves Steel Valves Socket Welding and Threaded Ends Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends Backwater Valves Vacuum Relief Valves Water Pressure Reducing Valves Water Heater Drain Valves Trap Seal Primer Valves Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves for Automatically Fired Hot Water Boilers 2 3 1 Relief Valves P N 05 C05 124 MSS SP 67 MSS SP 70 MSS SP 71 MSS SP 72 MSS SP 110 MSS SP 78 MSS SP 80 ASME B16 34 MSS SP 85 ASME A112 14 1 CSA AM Z21 22 ASSE 1003 ASSE 1005 ASSE 1018 CSA AM Z21 22 ASME CSD 1 Safety Code No Part CW Article 5 Section 22 00 00 Page 205 of 367 Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature P amp T relief valve The pressure
222. esent is dry under service conditions Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory if their average is equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28 day design compressive strength of the class of concrete Core specimens will be taken and tested by the Government If the results of core boring tests indicate that the concrete as placed does not conform to the drawings and specification the cost of such tests and restoration required must be borne by the Contractor Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent concrete surfaces Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 12 WASTE MANAGEMENT As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows 3 12 1 Mixing Equipment Before concrete pours designate Company owned site meeting environmental standards for cleaning out concrete mixing trucks Minimize water used to wash equipment 3 12 2 Hardened Cured Waste Concrete Dispose of off site 3 12 3 Reinforcing Steel Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling 3 12 4 Other Waste Identify concrete manufacturer s or supplier s policy for collection or return of construction waste unused material deconstruction waste and or packaging material Return excess cement to supplier 3 13 JOINTS 3 13 1 Waterstops P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 89 o
223. et http www pbmdf org AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION AISC One East Wacker Drive Chicago IL 60601 1802 Ph 312 670 2400 Fax 312 670 5403 Publications 800 644 2400 E mail pubs aisc org Internet http www aisc org AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE AISI 1140 Connecticut Avenue NW Suite 705 P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 21 of 367 Washington DC 20036 Ph 202 452 7100 Fax 202 463 6573 Internet http www steel org AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANSI 1819 L Street NW 6th Floor Washington DC 20036 Ph 202 293 8020 Fax 202 293 9287 E mail info ansi org Internet http www ansi org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS ASCE 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston VA 20191 4400 Ph 703 295 6300 800 548 2723 Fax 703 295 6222 E mail marketing asce org Internet http www asce org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ASHRAE 1791 Tullie Circle NE Atlanta GA 30329 Ph 800 527 4723 or 404 636 8400 Fax 404 321 5478 E mail ashrae ashrae org Internet http www ashrae org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS ASSE SAFE 1800 East Oakton Street Des Plaines IL 60018 2187 Ph 847 699 2929 Fax 847 768 3434 E mail customerservice asse org Internet http www asse org AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING ASSE 901 Canterbury Suite A Westlake OH 44145 Ph 440 835 3040 Fax 440 835 3488
224. ete placement shall be sound and capable of supporting device Surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer 3 2 INSTALLATION Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer Firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions Tested and listed firestop systems shall be provided in the following locations a Penetrations of duct conduit tubing cable and pipe through fire resistance rated walls partitions and ceiling assemblies P N 05 C05124 Section 07 84 00 Page 109 of 367 b Gaps at perimeter of fire resistance rated walls and partitions such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks c Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions d Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction 3 2 1 Insulated Pipes and Ducts Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping Thermal insulation shall be replaced with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics 3 2 2 Data and Communication Cabling Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re enterable firestopping products that do not cure over time Firestopping shall be modular devices containing built i
225. eter of the pipe Limit maximum size of well rounded aggregate to 40 percent of the pipe diameter Take samples for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end 3 7 5 Cold Weather ACI MCP 2 Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while curing Limit the rate of cooling to 37 degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application 3 7 6 Hot Weather Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2 1 5 in ACI MCP 2 to prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0 2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing Start curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage Provide water hoses pipes spraying equipment and water hauling equipment where job site is remote to water source to maintain a moist concrete surface throughout the curing period Provide burlap cover or other suitable permeable material with
226. ethane Provide connecting cable and support pole in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Provide a cast aluminum NEMA Type 4 junction box to connect float assembly Use box with a gasketed cover with tapped float fitting and conduit entrance pipe threaded opening Mount floats at fixed elevations as shown Use floats designed to tilt and operate their switches causing sequential turn on turn off of the pump when the liquid level being sensed rises or falls past the float 2 5 2 Alternator Provide an alternator control switch to operate in connection with each float Use alternator control switch to alternate the operation of the pumps and operate both pumps if the water level rises above the second high water level Incorporate time delay function and devices in the alternator controls such that both sewage pumps cannot be started simultaneously for an adjustable period of 10 to 120 seconds after shutdown Use delay function designed to operate in any condition of start up in either normal or emergency operational mode 2 5 3 Sewage Pump Alarm and Control Panel Enclose alarm panel in NEMA IV enclosure and with a flashing red light with long life bulb in guarded enclosure and 6 inch diameter horn Horn shall emit 120 DB at 10 feet Power alarm horn and light from 12V DC power supply with battery backup Provide a rechargeable battery rated to power both the horn and light for a minimum of two hours upon loss of main power Provide circ
227. etrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil or as recommended by the manufacturer 3 4 3 2 Rodding and Trenching Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing Width of trench shall be as recommended by the manufacturer or as indicated Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the trench with termiticide Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer backfilling of the trench shall commence Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers Each rise shall be treated with termiticide 3 4 4 Sampling The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative may draw from stocks at the job site at any time and without prior notice take samples of the termiticides used to determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is being applied 3 5 CLEAN UP DISPOSAL AND PROTECTION Once application has been completed proceed with clean up and protection of the site without delay 3 5 1 Clean Up The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment measures according to label instructions and as indicated Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed off site 3 5 2 Disposal of Termiticide Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria P N 05 C05124 Sec
228. existing subgrade if required density exists no compaction of existing subgrade will be required 3 9 1 General Site Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D 698 3 9 2 Structures Spread Footings and Concrete Slabs Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 Compact fill and backfill material to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 3 9 3 Adjacent Area Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 698 3 9 4 Paved Areas Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 Compact fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 3 10 FINISH OPERATIONS 3 10 1 Grading P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 325 of 367 Finish grades as indicated within one tenth of one foot Grade areas to drain water away from structures Maintain areas free of trash and debris For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor s operations grade as directed 3 10 2 Topsoil and Seed Scarify existing subgrade Provide 4 inches of topsoil for newly graded finish earth surfaces and areas disturbed by the Contractor Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen excessively wet extremely dry or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding planting or proper grading If there is insufficient on site topsoil meeting specified requirements for topsoil provide topsoi
229. ey control symbol and U S property Do not duplicate Do not place room number on keys 2 2 8 Closers BHMA A 156 4 Series C02000 Grade 1 with PT 4C Provide with brackets arms mounting devices fasteners and other features necessary for the particular application Size closers in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations or provide multi size closers Sizes through 6 and list sizes in the Hardware Schedule Provide manufacturer s standard 10 year warranty 2 2 8 1 Identification Marking Engrave each closer with manufacturer s name or trademark date of manufacture and manufacturer s size designation located to be visible after installation 2 2 9 Overhead Holders BHMA A156 8 2 2 10 Door Protection Plates BHMA A156 6 2 2 10 1 Sizes of Kick Plates 2 inch less than door width for single doors Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors 2 2 11 Door Stops and Silencers BHMA A156 16 Silencers Type L03011 Provide three silencers for each single door two for each pair 2 2 12 Thresholds BHMA A156 21 Use J35100 with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in face of stop for exterior doors opening out unless specified otherwise 2 2 13 Weather Stripping Gasketing P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 139 of 367 BHMA A156 22 Provide the type and function designation where specified in paragraph entitled Hardware Schedule Provide a set to include head and jamb seals Air leakage of weather stripped doors not to excee
230. f 367 Addressable interface devices G Graphic annunciator G Amplifiers G Radio transmitter and interface panels G Submit data on proposed equipment including but not limited to the items listed above Include UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided SD 07 Certificates Qualifications of installer SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Record drawing software 1 4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 4 1 Battery Power Calculations Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements a Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power requirements Ampere hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations b Provide data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings c Provide a detailed description of the final acceptance testing procedures including equipment nencessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system Existing supervising station fire alarm system is Monoco 1 5 1 Regulatory Requirements P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 300 of 367
231. f 367 Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint Make adequate provisions to support and protect waterstops during progress of work Make field joints in waterstops in accordance with waterstop manufacturer s printed instructions as approved Protect waterstops protruding from joints from damage 3 14 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE DEVICES 3 14 1 General Anchorage devices and embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by set and build in cast in place concrete as part of the work of this section using setting drawings instructions and directions for work to be attached thereto 3 14 2 Placing Anchorage Devices Anchorage devices and embedded items must be positioned accurately and supported against displacement Fill openings in anchorage devices such as slots and threaded holes with an approved removable material to prevent entry of concrete into openings 3 15 CONCRETE CONVEYING 3 15 1 Transfer of Concrete At Project Site Handle concrete from point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying equipment and to locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials 3 15 2 Mechanical Equipment for Conveying Concrete Equipment must ensure a continuous flow of concrete at delivery end as approved Provide runways for wheeled concrete conveying equipment from concrete de
232. f defective materials and workmanship while roof and wall panel system is under warranty are to be performed within 32 hours after notification unless additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Failure to perform repairs within 32 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STRUCTURAL FRAMING MATERIALS 2 1 1 W Shapes ASTM A 992 A 992M ASTM A 572 A 572M or ASTM A 529 A 529M 2 1 2 Channel Angles M Shapes and S Shapes ASTM A 36 A 36M ASTM A 572 A 572M or ASTM A 529 A 529M 2 1 3 Plate and Bar ASTM A 36 A 36M ASTM A 572 A 572M or ASTM A 529 A 529M 2 1 4 Steel Pipe ASTM A 36 A 36M ASTM A 53 A 53M ASTM A 572 A 572M or ASTM A 529 A 529M 2 1 5 Cold Formed and Hot Formed Hollow Structural Sections Cold formed ASTM A 500 A 500M or ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221M Hot formed ASTM A 501 2 1 6 Structural Steel Sheet Hot rolled ASTM A 1011 A 1011M or cold rolled ASTM A 1008 A 1008M 2 1 7 Metallic Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A 653 A 653M ASTM A 606 A 606M 2 1 8 Metallic Coated Steel Sheet Pre painted with Coil Stock Coating Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot dip process and pre painted by the coil coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 A 755M a Zinc Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653 A 653M and ASTM A 123 A 123M P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 185 of 367 b Aluminum Zinc Allo
233. facturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period 1 2 1 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 1 2 2 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 1 2 3 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 201 of 367 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Replace damaged
234. fety Edge Device Provide each door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width of the door and located within a U section neoprene or rubber astragal mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom door section Device must immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an obstruction in the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to full open position Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety cord and reel 2 4 8 Remote Control Stations Provide interior remote control stations which are full guarded momentary contact three button heavy duty surface mounted NEMA ICS 6 type enclosures as specified Mark buttons OPEN CLOSE and STOP The CLOSE button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to maintain the closing motion of the door When the door is in motion and the STOP button is pressed the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped position from the stopped position the door may then be operated in either direction P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 133 of 367 Provide secure exterior control stations which are full guarded momentary contact three button standard duty surface mounted weatherproof type NEMA ICS 6 Type 4 enclosures key operated with the same operating functions as specified herein for interior remote control stations 2 4 9 Speed Reduction Units Provide speed redu
235. finish and black matte finish on exposed to view interior surface Provide four way deflection 2 2 2 Type GR Provide type GR return grilles single deflection type with fixed face bars Provide grilles installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars set downward at 35 degrees from vertical Provide a baked enamel finish 2 2 3 Type GCE Provide type GCE with an individually adjustable vertical and horizontal curved blade grille and a three way pattern Provide a baked enamel finish P N 05 C05124 Section 23 37 13 Page 258 of 367 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Submit installation Drawings for air diffusion devices Indicate on drawings overall physical features dimensions ratings service requirements and equipment weights End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 23 37 13 Page 259 of 367 SECTION 23 82 02 UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 04 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide electrical equipment motors motor efficiencies and wiring which are in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Electrical motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with motors motor starters and controls Electrical characteristics shall be as shown and unless otherwise indicated all motors of 1 horsepower and above with open dripproof totally enclosed or e
236. for recommendations for applying and designating finishes Noticeable variations in the same metal component are not acceptable Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 134 of 367 if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 GENERAL Install overhead coiling door assembly anchors and inserts for guides brackets motors switches hardware and other accessories in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer s written instructions Upon completion of installation doors must be free from all distortion Install overhead coiling doors motors hoods and operators at the mounting locations as indicated for each door in the contract documents and as required by the manufacturer Install overhead coiling doors switches and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility and as required by the manufacturer 3 2 FIELD PAINTED FINISH Steel doors and frames which are to be field painted must accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and manufacturer s written instructions Protect weather stripping from paint Finishes must be free of scratches or other blemishes 3 3 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS After installation adjust hardware and moving parts Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth operatin
237. formly in a two coat operation by power spraying equipment using a spray nozzle equipped with a wind guard Apply second coat in a direction at right angles to direction of first coat Total coverage for two coats must be not more than 200 square feet per gallon of curing compound Respray concrete surfaces which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied by method and at rate specified Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and immediately repair damage to coating during this period Membrane curing compounds must not be used on surfaces that are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with a covering material bonded to concrete such as other concrete liquid floor hardener waterproofing dampproofing membrane roofing painting and other coatings and finish materials 3 10 7 Curing Formed Surfaces Accomplish curing of formed surfaces including undersurfaces of girders beams supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed If forms are removed before end of curing period accomplish final curing of formed surfaces by any of the curing methods specified above as applicable 3 10 8 Curing Unformed Surfaces Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces such as monolithic slabs floor topping and other flat surfaces by membrane curing Unless otherwise specified accomp
238. fused circuit c 1 manual stations d 3 break rods for manual stations 1 7 2 Parts List Furnish a list in duplicate of all other parts and accessories which the manufacturer of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 301 of 367 1 8 KEYS Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical Provide not less than six keys of each type required Keys shall be CAT 60 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 EXISTING FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT 2 1 1 Manufacturer Qualifications Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation Provide design materials and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system complete conforming to NFPA 72 except as otherwise or additionally specified herein 2 2 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN 2 2 1 Definitions Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings the equipment devices and functions shall be defined as follows a Analog Addressable System A system in which multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response b Hard Wired System A system in which alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected through individual dedicated conductors to a central control panel without the use of analog addressable circuits or devices
239. g and Sta Up_ I1 Materials and Equipment SOS 262000 210 Panelboards oo C s Receptacles O SSCS ps switches O O O a2 oo0ovotwinges SSC SOC 43 ComdngSysemTes SOS 4 EeomcaSysems O OOOO P N 05 C05124 Page 48 of 367 26 51 00 Fluorescent lighting fixtures 141 Fluorescent electronic ballasts 212 __ Fluorescent lamps 2 2 High intensity discharge HID lighting fixtures eo eee eO O oo 221 HIDBallsts SCSCSCSS S SSCS 2 2 2 Metal halide lamps COOS 2 6 Photocell switch D o y SyS 27 esses o SSCS 1 432 Energy Efficiency o o 383163 2 2 9 Fire Alarm Control Panel FACP o O 2214 Transmiters SSS 2213 Notification Appliances O Oo 224 Addressable interface devies O 2211 Graphic Annuncio oS 2 2141 Radio transmitter and interface panes 143 Record Drawing Software O oO o 311100 3 4 1 Nonsaleable Materials O O oS B1230 31221 FMandbak O oS O 222 Select material O O OOOO E SSS SSCS 3122 4 Density tests SSCS O oOo 313116 2 1 Termiticides o o p __ 3 1___ Verification of measurement _ S 341 Application Equipment SSCS ns Warranty SSCS SSS SS SSS 21 Quies OSS 3292 19 253 Wood cellulose fiber mulch SSCS P24 Fertilizer Eo _fai_ sed SSCS SSS C 331100 2 1 1 Pipingmaterals SCSCSCSC SSCS P Pa Water serviceline S Sd SSSSCSCSCSCSSSC d E SSCS CC d 2 12 4 Disinfec
240. g for personnel egress 1 2 Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers fire hydrants temporary fire protection facilities stairways and other access routes for fighting fires 1 3 Provide independent supervision of welding flame cutting and other open flame work Provide each fire supervisor with an appropriate fire extinguisher Contractor shall provide a fire watch for a period of 8 hours after open flame work is completed 1 4 The contractor shall provide a fire watch during the period of time that the fire suppression system is not operational The fire watch shall be for the full duration of time that the system is not operational and shall be in the whole building 1 5 Provide training for all personnel on site in the proper operation of each type of fire extinguisher provided Provide all personnel with the proper notification procedure to summon the local fire department or emergency medical service 1 6 There shall be NO SMOKING or unsupervised open flames permitted neither inside any structure temporary or permanent nor within 25 feet of combustible material or within 50 feet of flammable liquids or compressed gasses End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 54 40 Page 38 of 367 SECTION 01 55 00 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING 1 ACCESS Access to the site is available from public roads Any damage to these roads by the Contractor s vehicles shall be repaired without cost to the Government 2 PARKING Vehicul
241. g functions for ease movement free of warping twisting or distortion of the door assembly Adjust seals to provide weather tight fit around entire perimeter Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service and checks according to manufacturer s written instructions Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or alarm connected fire release system Adjust controls and safeties Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment Reset door closing mechanism after successful test Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the Government 3 3 1 CLEANING Clean doors in accordance with manufacturer s approved instructions End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 135 of 367 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Hardware schedule G Keying system SD 03 Product Data Hardware items G SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Installation SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Hardware Schedule items Data Package 1 G Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING SD 11 Closeout Submittals Key Bitting 1 2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form Reference Mfr Publi Name Key Hard cation and Con ware Quan Ty
242. ger in a self contained power pack Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type shall operate unattended and require no maintenance including no additional water for a period of not less than 5 years LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1 2 hours minimum The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70 000 hours minimum 2 8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT UL 924 NFPA 70 and NFPA 101 Provide lamps in wattage indicated 2 8 1 Emergency Lighting Unit Provide as indicated Emergency lighting units shall be rated for 12 volts except units having no remote mounted lamps and having no more than two unit mounted lamps may be rated 6 volts 2 9 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS 2 9 1 Wires ASTM A 641 A 641M galvanized regular coating soft temper 0 1055 inches in diameter 12 gage 2 10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 2 10 1 Manufacturer s Nameplate P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 296 of 367 Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 2 10 2 Labels Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format Use Only z a
243. gree Centigrade C conductors provide only conductors with 90 degree C insulation or better 2 5 4 Bonding Conductors ASTM B 1 solid bare copper wire for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller diameter ASTM B 8 Class B stranded bare copper wire for sizes No 6 AWG and larger diameter 2 6 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS UL 486A 486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes Connectors for No 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A 486B or UL 486C twist on splicing connector Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors 2 7 DEVICE PLATES Provide UL listed one piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed For metal outlet boxes plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges Plates on finished walls shall be satin finish stainless steel or brushed finish aluminum minimum 0 03 inch thick Screws shall be machine type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate Sectional type device plates will not be permitted Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for wet locations 2 8 SWITCHES 2 8 1 Toggle Switches P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 280 of 367 NEMA WD 1 UL 20 single pole totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw Handles shall be white thermoplastic Wiring termina
244. h Over 1 2 inch to 2 inch 1 2 inch 5 8 inch P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 114 of 367 Over 2 inch As recommended by sealant manufacturer b Unacceptable Ratios Where joints of acceptable width to depth ratios have not been provided clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining work Grinding is not required on metal surfaces 3 3 2 Masking Tape Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled 3 3 3 Backstops Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes Tightly pack the back or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth specified Install backstops in the following locations a Where indicated b Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled Joint Width to Depth Ratios 3 3 4 Primer Immediately prior to application of the sealant clean out loose particles from joints Where recommended by sealant manufacturer apply primer to joints in concrete masonry units wood and other porous surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer s instructions Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces 3 3 5 Bond Breaker Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of join
245. h clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to the installed roofing materials and to distribute weight to conform to the indicated live load limits of roof construction P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 196 of 367 3 6 METAL PANEL FASTENER INSTALLATION Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place using manufacturer s approved fasteners according to manufacturers written instructions 3 7 FLASHING TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION A Comply with performance requirements manufacturer s written installation instructions and SMACNA 1793 Provide concealed fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated Install work with laps joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant B Sheet metalwork is to be accomplished to form weather tight construction without waves warps buckles fastening stresses or distortion and allow for expansion and contraction Cutting fitting drilling and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics 3 8 DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION Install door frames plumb rigid properly aligned and securely fastened in place according to manufacturer s written instructions Coordinate installation with metal panel flashings and other components Caulk and seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant compatible with metal pan
246. h the top of the concrete surface End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 05 50 00 Page 105 of 367 SECTION 07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Blanket insulation SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Insulation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 BLANKET INSULATION ASTM C 665 Type II blankets with non reflecting coverings or III blankets with reflective coverings Class A membrane faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 1 1 Thermal Resistance Value R VALUE R 11 for fiberglass insulation in partitions 2 1 2 Recycled Materials Provide Thermal Insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable provided the material meets all other requirements of this section The minimum required recycled materials content by weight are Rock Wool 75 percent slag Fiberglass 20 to 25 percent glass cullet 2 1 3 Prohibited Materials Do not provide asbestos containing materials 2 2 ACCESSORIES P N 05 C05124 Section 07 21 16 Page 106 of 367 2 2 1 Mechanical Fasteners Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION 3 1 1 Insulation Install and handle insulation in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Keep material dry and free of extraneous materials Ensure personal protective c
247. h vapor barrier adhesive or pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape not less than 2 inches wide Lay subgrade cover sheets with not less than a 6 inch lap at edges and ends and in direction in which concrete is to be placed Prepare subgrade or fill surface under exterior slabs on ground as specified for subgrade under foundations and footings 3 2 4 Formwork Complete and approve formwork Remove debris and foreign material from interior of forms before start of concrete placing 3 2 5 Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must be strong enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such equipment Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike off templates or approved compacting type screeds 3 2 6 Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items Secure reinforcement joint materials and other embedded materials in position inspected and approved before start of concrete placing 3 3 FORMS ACI MCP 2 Provide forms shoring and scaffolding for concrete placement Set forms mortar tight and true to line and grade Chamfer above grade exposed joints edges and external corners of concrete 0 75 inch unless otherwise indicated Provide formwork with clean out openings to permit inspection and removal of debris F
248. hall be laid in separate trenches except when otherwise shown Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the average local frost depth If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body 3 1 1 Water Pipe Fittings and Connections 3 1 1 1 Utilities The piping shall be extended to fixtures outlets and equipment The hot water and cold water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture except faucets flush valves or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures Supply P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 212 of 367 piping to fixtures faucets hydrants shower heads and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement 3 1 1 2 Cutting and Repairing The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided Damage to building piping wiring or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved 3 1 1 3 Protection of Fixtures Materials and Equipmen
249. han zero 2 1 4 Expansive Soils Soils that have a plasticity index equal to or greater than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 318 of 367 2 1 5 Common Fill Approved unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location 2 1 6 Backfill and Fill Material As indicated on the plans 2 1 7 Select Material As indicated on the plans 2 1 8 Topsoil Natural friable soil representative of productive well drained soils in the area free of subsoil stumps rocks larger than one inch diameter brush weeds toxic substances and other material detrimental to plant growth Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5 5 to 7 2 2 POROUS FILL FOR CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER ASTM C 33 C 33M fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140 No 200 sieve or coarse aggregate Size 57 67 or 77 and conforming to the general soil material requirements specified in paragraph entitled Satisfactory Materials 2 3 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600 Type 4 except as specified herein Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows a Class I Ang
250. he maximum amount of fly ash permittable that meets the code requirements for cement content Report the chemical analysis of the fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 311 Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D 5759 High contents of supplementary cementitious materials can have some detrimental effects on the concrete properties such as slowing excessively the strength gain rate and delaying and increasing the difficulty of finishing The recommended maximum content by weight of the total cementitious material for these materials are 1 For fly ash or natural pozzolan 40 percent 25 percent in cold climates 2 For silica fume 10 percent 2 4 1 2 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag ASTM C 989 Grade 120 Slag content must be a minimum of 70 percent by weight of cementitious material 2 4 1 3 Portland Cement P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 63 of 367 Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C 150 Type I or II Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed to view finished surfaces 2 4 2 Water Minimize the amount of water in the mix The amount of water must not exceed 45 percent by weight of cementitious materials cement pozzolans and in general improve workability by adjusting the grading rather than by adding water Water must be fresh clean and potable free from injurious amounts of oils acids alkalis salts organic materials or other substances deleterious to concrete 2 4
251. he record document 1 5 3 Items to Remain in Place Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place to be reused or to remain the property of the Government Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated Construct and maintain shoring bracing and supports as required Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal deconstruction or demolition work performed under this contract Do not overload structural elements Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work Repairs reinforcement or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative prior to performing such work 1 5 4 Existing Construction Limits and Protection Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas Remove dust dirt and debris from work areas daily P N 05 C05124 Section 02 41 00 Page 52 of 367 1 5 5 Weather Protection Protect building in
252. hen an additional beam is used the beam shall bear on the top chord of the roof trusses and bearing shall be over gusset plates of top chord Beam shall be stabilized by connection to roof purlin along bottom flange Purlins used for supporting fire protection sprinkler mains electrical lighting fixtures electrical power ducts or cable trays shall be considered fully loaded and supplemental reinforcing or auxiliary support steel shall be provided for these purlins 3 3 4 Flexible Connectors For Steel Metal Air handling equipment ducts crossing building expansion joints and fan inlets and outlets shall be connected to upstream and downstream components by treated woven cloth connectors Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted When system fans are operating connectors shall be free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan reaction Width of surface shall be curvilinear 3 3 5 Insulation Protection Angles Galvanized 20 gage sheet formed into an angle with a 2 inch exposed long leg with a 3 8 inch stiffening break at outer edge and with a variable concealed leg depending upon insulation thickness shall be provided Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a wall floor foundation frame and similar construction Fasten angles in place with blind rivets through the protection angle insulation and sheet metal duct or plenum Install a
253. hey are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve measured horizontally c Notification Appliance Devices Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72 Mount assemblies on walls 80 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower d Graphic Annunciator Locate the graphic annunciator as shown on the drawings Surface mount the panel with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet whichever is lower 3 2 PAINTING Paint exposed electrical fire alarm conduit and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas Paint junction boxes and conduit red in unfinished areas Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 3 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES 3 3 1 Required Instruction Time Provide 16 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 312 of 367 Officer s Technical Representative The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and or fire department responses End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 313 of 367 SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 0
254. horized currently licensed engineer in the geographical area where construction will take place having a minimum of four 4 years experience as an engineer knowledgeable in building design analysis protocols and procedures for the Metal Building Systems Manual MBMA MBSM ASCE 7 05 the building code in the geographic area where the construction will take place and ASTM E 1592 Provide certified engineering calculations using the products submitted for a Roof and Wall Wind Loads with basic wind speed exposure category co efficient importance factor designate type of facility negative pressures for each zone methods and requirements of attachment b Roof Dead and Live Loads c Collateral Loads d Foundation Loads e Roof Snow Load 1 5 3 Qualification of Erection Contractor An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material design and extent to that indicated for this Project and must be approved and certified by the metal building system manufacturer P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 180 of 367 1 5 4 Single Source Obtain primary and secondary components and structural framing members each type of metal roof wall and liner panel assemblies clips closures and other accessories from the standard products of the single source from a single manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use 1 5 5 Welding Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS A5
255. horoughly into the adhesive Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze type duct hangers e Where mechanical fasteners are used self locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over f Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal Staples tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 242 of 367 g Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape h At jacket penetrations such as hangers thermometers and damper operating rods voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply lam
256. hower drains shall conform to ASME A112 6 3 2 6 2 Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings Provide single control pressure equalizing shower faucets with body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections Provide ball joint self cleaning shower heads Provide shower heads which deliver a maximum of 2 2 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements Provide tubing mounted from behind the wall between shower heads Provide separate globe valves or angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet Provide trip lever pop up drain fittings for above the floor drain installations The top of drain pop ups drain outlets tub overflow outlet and control handle for pop up drain shall be chromium plated or polished stainless steel Linkage between drain pop up and pop up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet shall be copper alloy or stainless steel Provide 1 5 inch copper alloy adjustable tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain outlet chromium plated finish is not required 2 7 TRAPS Unless otherwise specified traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 or copper alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel Traps shall be with a cleanout Provide traps with removable access panels for easy clean out at sinks and lavatories Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0 032 inch thick within commercial tolerances except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in
257. ice line piping fittings joints valves and coupling SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Delivery storage and handling Installation procedures for water piping 1 2 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 2 1 Delivery and Storage Inspect materials delivered to site for damage Unload and store with minimum handling Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering Store plastic piping jointing P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 342 of 367 materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight Do not store materials directly on the ground Keep inside of pipes fittings valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris 1 2 2 Handling Handle pipe fittings valves hydrants and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged Do not place any other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied Carry do not drag pipe to the trench Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method Before installation the pipe shall be inspected for defects Material found to b
258. ified Provide gypsum board types and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only Submit Material Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer maintenance instructions for gypsum materials including adhesives 2 1 1 Gypsum Board ASTM C 36 C 36M and ASTM C 1396 C 1396M 2 1 1 1 Type X Special Fire Resistant 48 inch wide 5 8 inch thick tapered or tapered and featured edges 2 1 2 Joint Treatment Materials ASTM C 475 C 475M Use all purpose joint and texturing compound containing inert fillers and natural binders including lime compound Pre mixed compounds shall be free of antifreeze vinyl adhesives preservatives biocides and other slow releasing compounds 2 1 2 1 Embedding Compound P N 05 C05124 Section 09 29 00 Page 146 of 367 Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum board joints and compatible with tape substrate and fasteners 2 1 2 2 Finishing or Topping Compound Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound 2 1 2 3 All Purpose Compound Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound and compatible with tape substrate and fasteners 2 1 2 4 Setting or Hardening Type Compound Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape 2 1 2 5 Joint Tape Use cross laminated or tapered edge tape recommended by the manufacturer Paper and fiberglass joint tape are not permitted
259. ilencing switch which when activated will silence the audible signal appliance but will not affect the visual alarm indicator the liquid crystal display or the automatic notification of the fire department This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm h Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors Alarm verification shall initially be set for 30 seconds i Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits fire reporting system air handler shutdown P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 303 of 367 features Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output j Alarm supervisory and or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department k Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions l The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panel s keyboard Programmed information shall be stored in non volatile memory m The system shall be capable of operating supervising and or monitoring both addressable and non addressable alarm and supervisory devices n There shall be no limit other than maximum system capacity as to the number of addressable devices which may be in alarm simultaneously o Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an actio
260. imilar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 1 4 3 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 292 of 367 more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 4 3 1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 1 4 3 2 Energy Efficiency Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products Submit documentation for Energy Star qua
261. imum of three similar projects within the past three years 1 3 gt PACKAGING LABELING AND STORAGE Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number designation name formula or specification number batch number color quantity date of manufacture manufacturer s formulation number manufacturer s directions including any warnings and special precautions and name and address of manufacturer Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer s written directions and as a minimum stored off the ground under cover with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F 1 4 COLOR SELECTION Submit manufacturer s standard color chips for color selections 1 5 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED 1 5 1 Painting Included Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted include the following unless indicated otherwise a Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal of fasteners such as screws and bolts b New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work c Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 153 of 367
262. inate minimum 2 mils adhesive 3 mils embossed less than 0 0000 perm adhesive tape i Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un insulated surface 2 inches Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions j Where insulation standoff brackets occur insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket 3 3 3 Duct Test Holes After duct systems have been tested adjusted and balanced breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 243 of 367 SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS 02 09 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SCOPE OF WORK Encompass low pressure systems ductwork and plenums where maximum air velocity is 2 000 feet per minute fpm and maximum static pressure is 2 inches water gage wg positive or negative Submit Connection Diagrams for low pressure ductwork systems indicating the relation and connection of devices and apparatus by showing the general physical layout of all controls the interconnection of one system or portion of system with another and internal tubing wiring and other devices 1 2 SUBMITTALS
263. ination Recessed SGR Provide recessed type Type 304 stainless steel soap and grab bar combination satin finish 2 2 7 Toilet Tissue Dispenser TTD Furnish Type II surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of standard tissue mounted horizontally or stacked vertically Provide stainless steel satin finish cabinet PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation as the attached accessory Provide oval exposed screw heads Install accessories at the location and height indicated Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted After acceptance of accessories remove and dispose of strippable plastic protection Coordinate accessory manufacturer s mounting details with other trades as their work progresses After installation thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition or replace with new work 3 1 1 Recessed Accessories Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs blocking or rough frame in wood construction Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction Fasten to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction 3 1 2 Surface Mounted Accessories Mount on concealed backplates unless specified otherwise Conceal fasteners on accessories without backplates Install accessories with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead l
264. inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire rated shafts 3 1 2 1 Pull Wire Install pull wires in empty conduits Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200 pound force tensile strength Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire 3 1 3 Conduit Installation Unless indicated otherwise conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls ceilings and floors Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project 3 1 3 1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT a Do not install underground b Do not encase in concrete mortar grout or other cementitious materials c Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT d Do not use outdoors P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 285 of 367 e Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 1 3 2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit a PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80 1 Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage
265. ine movement during testing place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to prevent movement but leaving joints uncovered to permit inspection When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount specified make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results a Infiltration tests and exfiltration tests Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the specified materials not only concrete in accordance with ASTM C 969 Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 969 b Low pressure air tests Perform tests as follows 1 Ductile iron pipelines Test in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM C 924 Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in ASTM C 924 Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 924 2 PVC plastic pipelines Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI B 6 Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in UBPPA UNI B 6 Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to UBPPA UNI B 6 3 2 3 Tests for Pressure Lines Test pressure lines in accordance with the applicable standard specified in this paragraph except for test pressures For hydrostatic pressure test use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi in excess of the maximum working pressure of the system but not less than 100 psi holding the pressure for a period of not less than one hour For leakage test use a hydrostatic pressure not less than th
266. ined braided jute teflon or neoprene sleeves or lead expansion shields or with toggle bolts or other approved fasteners as required by the construction Install backplates in the same manner or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar as required by the construction Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board and plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to solid wood blocking secured between wood studs or to metal backplates secured to metal studs 3 2 CLEANING Clean material in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Do not use alkaline or abrasive agents Take precautions to avoid scratching or marring exposed surfaces P N 05 C05124 Section 10 28 13 Page 170 of 367 End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 28 13 Page 171 of 367 SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 06 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Submit Manufacturer s catalog and warranty data for the following items Fire Extinguishers Accessories Wall Brackets Replacement Parts SD 07 Certificates Submit Certificates showing the following Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with OSHA NFPA and UL requirements Submit Manufacturer s Warranty with Inspection Tag on each extinguisher Guarantee that Fire Extinguishers are free of defects in materi
267. ined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following Synthetic Fertilizer 1500 pounds per acre Hydroseeding Fertilizer 800 pounds per acre 3 2 SEEDING 3 2 1 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions Immediately before seeding restore soil to proper grade Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions submit a written request to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative stating the special conditions and proposed variance Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation Sow seed by approved sowing equipment Sow one half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing 3 2 2 Seed Application Method Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding or hydroseeding 3 2 2 1 Broadcast and Drop Seeding Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate indicated in NCDOT SHS pounds per 1000 square feet Use broadcast or drop seeders Sow one half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1 4 inch in clay soils and 1 2 inch in sandy soils by means of spike tooth harrow cultipacker raking or other approved devices 3 2 2 2 Hydroseeding First mix water and fiber Wood cellulose fiber paper fi
268. ing F Service Material Spec Type Class Vapor Retarder Vapor Barrier Required Cold Domestic Water Piping Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Il 2 No Flex Elast Cell r ASTM C 534 C 534M I No Polyofin Clos cell ASTM C 1427 I No Refrigerant Flex Elast Cell r ASTM C 534 C 534M _ I No Suction Piping Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 1 Yes 35 F nominal A C condensate Drain Located Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Il 2 No Inside Bldg Flex Elast Cell r ASTM C 534 C 534M _ I No TABLE 2 Piping Insulation Thickness inch and F Tube And Pipe Size Inches Service Material lt 1 l lt 1 5 1 5 lt 4 4 lt 8 gt or to 8 Cold Domestic Cellular Glass 1 5 1 5 Water Piping Flex Elas Cell r 1 1 Refrigerant Flex Elas Cell r 0 5 0 5 Suction Piping Cellular Glass 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 35 F nominal A C condensate Cellular Glass 1 5 Drain Located Flex Elas Cell r Inside Bldg P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 240 of 367 3 2 2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted This includes but is not limited to the following a Domestic cold b Refrigerant suction lines c Air conditioner condensate drains 3 2 2 1 Insulation Material and Thickness Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2 3 3 DUCT IN
269. ining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs 3 3 5 Backflow Prevention Devices Plumbing fixtures equipment and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC all other locations necessary to P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 219 of 367 preclude a cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing Each device shall be a standard commercial unit 3 3 6 Access Panels Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls or any item requiring inspection or maintenance Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be service
270. inished floor Unless otherwise indicated sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1 4 inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast iron pipe Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe cast iron pipe galvanized sheet metal with lock type longitudinal seam or plastic Except as otherwise specified the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer backstop material and surface preparation The annular space between pipe and sleeve between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated 3 1 4 2 Waterproofing Waterproofing at floor mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft tempered sheet copper The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1 1 2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast iron or steel pipe sleeve The turned down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1 1 2 inches then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe
271. inted installation instructions 3 3 PLACING MOULDING P N 05 C05124 Section 09 65 00 Page 151 of 367 Provide moulding where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent finished flooring and at transitions between different flooring materials When required locate moulding under door centerline Moulding is not required at doorways where thresholds are provided Secure moulding with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer s printed directions 3 4 PLACING WALL BASE Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer s printed installation instructions Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer s printed directions 3 5 CLEANING Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer s printed maintenance instructions 3 6 PROTECTION From the time of installation until acceptance protect flooring from damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer Remove and replace flooring which becomes damaged loose broken or curled and wall base which is not tight to wall or securely adhered End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 09 65 00 Page 152 of 367 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 PROVIDE PAINTING AND COATINGS 1 2 APPLICATOR S QUALIFICATIONS 1 2 1 Contractor Qualification Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a min
272. ion resistant coating Submit for approval offset configurations Elbows shall be two piece type for angles through 35 degrees three piece type for angles 36 through 71 degrees and five piece type for angles 72 through 90 degrees Crosses increasers reducers reducing tees and 90 degree tees shall be conical type 2 2 4 Turning Vanes Turning vanes shall be double wall type commercially manufactured for high velocity system service 2 2 5 Dampers Low pressure drop high velocity manual volume dampers and high velocity fire dampers shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 2 2 6 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal Connectors shall be UL listed 30 ounce per square foot waterproof fire retardant airtight woven fibrous glass cloth double coated with chloroprene Clear width not including clamping section shall be 6 to 8 inches 2 2 7 Duct Hangers Duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces shall be galvanized steel painted with inorganic zinc P N 05 C05 124 Section 23 31 13 Page 247 of 367 2 2 8 Mill Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials Mill rolled structural steel shall conform to ASTM A 36 A 36M and whenever in contact with sheet metal ducting shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 A 123M Equivalent strength proprietary design rolled steel structural support systems may be submitted for approval in lieu of mil
273. ions of gypsum board to framing 3 2 3 Control Joints Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in accordance with ASTM C 840 System XIII or GA 216 Fill control joints between studs in fire rated construction with fire safing insulation to match the fire rating of construction 3 3 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 GA 214 and GA 216 3 3 1 Uniform Surface Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell semigloss or gloss paint finish or where severe up or down lighting conditions occur finish gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5 In accordance with GA 214 Level 5 apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire gypsum board surface after the two coat joint and fastener treatment is complete and dry 3 4 SEALING Seal openings around pipes fixtures and other items projecting through gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board 3 5 FIRE RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES Wherever fire rated construction is indicated provide materials and application methods including types and spacing of fasteners wall and ceiling framing in accordance with the P N 05 C05124 Section 09 29 00 Page 148 of 367 specifications contained in UL Fire Resistance for the fire ratings indicated Joints of fire rated gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance
274. ircuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage 2 2 9 3 Silencing Switches a Alarm Silencing Switch Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP which shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm b Supervisory Trouble Silencing Switch Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch which shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal but not extinguish the visual indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm supervision or trouble condition 2 2 9 4 Non Interfering Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal 2 2 9 5 Fire Alarm Signal P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 307 of 367 A fire alarm shall activate notification appliances throughout the building Audible devices shall be fire alarm horns which produce a three pulse temporal pattern Visual devices shall be strobes operating in accordance with NFPA 72 2 2 9 6 Memory Provide each control unit with non volatile memory and logic for all functions The use of long life batteries
275. irt Clips Steel sheet Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members h Secondary End Wall Framing Manufacturer s standard sections fabricated from zinc coated galvanized steel sheet i Framing for Openings Channel shapes fabricated cold formed structural steel sheet or structural steel shapes Frame head and jamb of door openings and head jamb and sill of other openings j Miscellaneous Structural Members Manufacturer s standard sections fabricated from cold formed structural steel sheet built up steel plates or zinc coated galvanized steel sheet designed to withstand required loads 2 3 4 Bracing Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows a Rods ASTM A 36 A 36M ASTM A 572 A 572M or ASTM A 529 A 529M threaded at each end b Angles Fabricated from structural steel shapes to match primary framing of size required to withstand design loads P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 188 of 367 c Rigid Portal Frames Fabricate from shop welded built up steel plates or structural steel shapes to match primary framing of size required to withstand design loads d Fixed Base Columns Fabricate from shop welded built up steel plates or structural steel shapes to match primary framing of size required to withstand design loads e Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels f Bracing Provide wind
276. ises Provide necessary rabbets lugs and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and support b Field painting After installation clean cast iron frames covers gratings and steps not buried in concrete to bare metal of mortar rust grease dirt and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 2 1 Field Tests and Inspections The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section The Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor equipment and incidentals required for testing Be able to produce evidence when required that each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications 3 2 2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line When pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use test this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 357 of 367 3 2 2 1 Leakage Tests Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests or by low pressure air tests Prior to testing for leakage backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe When necessary to prevent pipel
277. istant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods lock washers and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor 2 6 COLORS AND FINISHES 2 6 1 Colors Provide manufacturer s standard color charts for color of finishes for toilet partition system components Color of pilaster shoes shall match the core of solid plastic compartments and screens 2 6 2 Finish No 5 Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins polyethylene formed under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one inch thick Colors must extend P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 21 13 Page 165 of 367 throughout the panel thickness Provide exposed finish surfaces smooth waterproof non absorbent and resistant to staining and marking with pens pencils or other writing devices PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Verify that field measurements surfaces substrates and conditions are as required and ready to receive work Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures Verify correct location of built in framing anchorage and bracing Report in writing to Contracting Officer and the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the work of this section Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 INSTALLATION Install partitions rigid straight plumb and level with the panels centered between the fixtures
278. ith the specified performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system SD 07 Certificates Materials and Equipment Where the system components or equipment are specified to comply with requirements of AHRI ASHRAE ASME or UL proof of such compliance shall be provided The label or listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence In lieu of the label or listing a written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency may be submitted When performance requirements of this project s drawings and specifications vary from standard AHRI rating conditions computer printouts catalog or other application data certified by AHRI or a nationally recognized laboratory as described above shall be included If AHRI does not have a current certification program that encompasses such application data the manufacturer may self certify that his application data complies with project performance requirements in accordance with the specified test standards Service Organization A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations which includes their addresses and qualifications for support of the equipment The service organizations
279. itions Include the manufacturer s style or catalog numbers specification and drawing reference numbers warranty information and fabrication site information within Material Equipment and Fixture Lists PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2 1 1 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials Galvanized steel ductwork sheet metal shall be carbon steel of lock forming quality hot dip galvanized with regular spangle type zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 924 A 924M and ASTM A 653 A 653M Designation G90 Treat duct surfaces to be painted by phosphatizing P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 245 of 367 Conform to ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 for sheet metal gages and reinforcement thickness Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are as follows MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAGE DUCT WIDTH INCHES GAGE 0 12 26 13 30 24 31 60 22 2 1 2 Mill Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials Conform to ASTM A 36 A 36Mfor mill rolled structural steel and wherever in contact with sheet metal ducting galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or coated with materials conforming to ASTM A 123 A 123M Equivalent strength proprietary design rolled steel structural support systems may be submitted for approval in lieu of mill rolled structural steel 2 2 COMPONENTS 2 2 1 Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings Shop fabricate fittings Manufacture as separate fittings not as tap collars welded or brazed into duct sectio
280. ity Contractor licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed Installing Contractor s License shall be current and be state certified or state registered PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PIPELINE MATERIALS Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below 2 1 1 PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping 2 1 1 1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 3034 SDR 35 or ASTM F 949 with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket joints 2 1 1 2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212 Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477 2 1 2 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings 2 1 2 1 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings a Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inch Diameter Pipe couplings and fittings shall be manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784 Class 12454B 1 Screw Joint Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 80 with joints meeting requirements of 150 psi working pressure 200 psi P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 352 of 367 hydrostatic test pressure unless otherwise shown or specified Fittings for threaded pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 2464 threaded to conform to the requirements of ASME B1 20 1 for use with Schedule 80 pipe and fittings Pipe couplings when used shall be tested as required by ASTM D 2464 2 Push On Joint ASTM D 3139 with ASTM F 477 gaskets Fittings for push
281. ive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 210 of 367 period Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified but not shown shall be provided For packaged equipment the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 2 11 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS 2 11 1 Escutcheon Plates Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors walls and ceilings in exposed spaces Provide chromium plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finish
282. k or damage existing facilities and equipment 2 REAPPLICATION All temporary closures or enclosures shall be made ready for immediate re application in the event of sudden storms or man made conditions requiring protection of existing facilities or completed construction 3 CLIMATE CONTROL Where temporary heat is required during construction to protect work completed or to heat facilities in operation by the Coast Guard all openings shall be made weather tight to allow the maintenance of 68 degrees F heat minimum with the existing or temporary heating equipment or 78 degrees F maximum with existing or temporary cooling NOTE TO OFFEROR CLIMATE CONTROL SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE STATEMENT OF WORK AND OR ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS 4 PIPING Prevent water filled pipes or tanks from freezing for both interior and exterior systems installed or in storage End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 52 00 Page 34 of 367 SECTION 01 54 00 SAFETY PROGRAM 1 GENERAL The Contractor is wholly responsible for work site safety The Contractor shall implement a safety program that protects the lives and health of personnel in the construction area prevents damage to property and avoids work interruptions The Contractor shall provide appropriate safety barricades signs signal lights etc as well as complying with the requirements of all applicable Federal State and Local safety laws rules and regulation
283. kers and plug in circuit breakers are unacceptable 2 10 3 1 Multipole Breakers Provide common trip type with single operating handle Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A B and C respectively 2 10 3 2 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors group or individual shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type 2 11 MOTORS NEMA MG 1 Provide the size in terms of HP or kVA or full load current or a combination of these characteristics and other characteristics of each motor as indicated or specified Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters Motors for operation on 208 volt 3 phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating Unless otherwise indicated motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous duty type P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 282 of 367 Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer provide fused switches in lieu of non fused switches indicated 2 11 1 High Efficiency Single Phase Motors Single phase fractional horsepower alternating
284. l continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site No area section or component of floors roofs walls columns pilasters or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing shoring or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area 1 6 BURNING The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted 1 7 REQUIRED DATA Prepare a Demolition Plan Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged coordination with other work in progress a disconnection schedule of utility services a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations Coordinate with Waste Management Plan Include statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof system and its suitability to perform as a safe working platform or if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers state P N 05 C05124 Section 02 41 00 Page 53 of 367 provisions for securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385 1 1 Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning 1 8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROT
285. l engineer or an approved manufacturer s start up representative experienced in system start up and testing at such times as directed Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each system and shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with the drawings and specifications Make corrections and adjustments as necessary tests shall be re conducted to demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as specified Prior to acceptance service valve seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened Any refrigerant lost during the system startup shall be replaced If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Government Provide all material equipment instruments and personnel required for the test Submit a report including the following information where values are taken at least three different times at outside dry bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart a Date and outside weather conditions b The load on the system based on the following P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 270 of 367 j k l 1 The refrigerant used in the system 2 Condensing temperature and pressure 3 Suction temperature and pressu
286. l have the manufacturer s name address type or style model or serial number catalog number date of installation installing Contractor s name and address and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment Major components include but are not limited to the following a FACPs P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 311 of 367 b Automatic transmitter Furnish to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative before installation Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative for installation locations Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls 2 4 WIRING Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES a FACP Locate the FACP where indicated on the drawings Recess the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors their labels their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP b Manual Stations Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 101 and NFPA 72 Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor Mount stations so t
287. l required in excess of that available Seed shall match existing vegetation Provide seed at 5 pounds per 1000 square feet Provide CID A A 1909 Type I Class 2 10 10 10 analysis fertilizer at 25 pounds per 1000 square feet Provide mulch and water to establish an acceptable stand of grass 3 10 3 Protection of Surfaces Protect newly backfilled graded and topsoiled areas from traffic erosion and settlements that may occur Repair or reestablish damaged grades elevations or slopes 3 11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling and brush refuse stumps roots and timber 3 12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 12 1 Sampling Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests 3 12 2 Testing Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used Provide additional tests for each source change 3 12 2 1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No 200 sieve ASTM D 4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations as applicable 3 12 2 2 Select Material Testing P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 326 of 367 Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation
288. l rolled structural steel 2 2 9 Flexible Duct Materials Flexible duct connectors shall be in accordance with UL 181 Class 1 material and shall comply with NFPA 90A Wire reinforced cloth duct shall consist of a chloroprene fibrous glass cloth bonded to and supported by a corrosion protected spring steel helix Fabric may be a laminate of metallic film and fibrous glass Working pressure rating of ducting shall be not less than three times maximum system pressure and temperature range shall be minus 20 to plus 175 degrees F 2 2 10 Manual Volume Dampers Conform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature externally located and easily accessible for adjustment and standoff brackets to allow mounting outside external insulation Where damper rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide a regulator at each end of damper shaft All damper shafts shall have two end bearings Damper shaft shall be full length and shall extend beyond damper blade A 3 8 inch square shaft shall be used for damper lengths up to 20 inches and a 1 2 inch square shaft shall be used for damper lengths 20 inches and larger Where necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage adjustable support rods with locking provisions external to duct shall be provided at damper blade end Dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the damper that is greater than 12 inches shall be multib
289. lade type having a substantial frame with blades fabricated of 16 gage metal Blades shall not exceed 10 inches in width and 48 inches in length and shall be pinned to 1 2 inch diameter shafts Dampers greater than 48 inches in width shall be made in two or more sections with intermediate mullions each section being mechanically interlocked with the adjoining section or sections Blades shall have graphite impregnated nylon bearings and shall be connected so that adjoining blades rotate in opposite directions 2 2 11 Power Operated Dampers P N 05 C05 124 Section 23 31 13 Page 248 of 367 Shall be indicated on the drawings PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Provide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations for best practices in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 SMACNA 1966 NFPA 90A and ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the referenced standards or herein perform the work in accordance with recommendations for best practice defined in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Clean free of oil grease and deleterious substances sheet metal surfaces to be painted and surfaces to which adhesives are to be applied Duct strength shall be adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or vacuum created by fast closure of duct devices Provide leaktight automatic relief devices Supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC 360and AISC 325 3 2
290. lifications for equipment provided under this section Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598 Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless specifically indicated otherwise 2 1 1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics a Ballast shall comply with UL 935 NEMA C82 11 NFPA 70 and CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise Ballast shall be 100 electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by TEEE C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected b Power factor shall be 0 95 minimum c Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20 000 Hertz minimum Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems Provide ballasts operating at or above 40 000 Hertz where available d Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker maximum using any compatible lamp e Ballast factor shall be between 0 85 minim
291. lish final curing of unformed surfaces by any of curing methods specified above as applicable Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener of finish flooring by moisture retaining cover curing 3 10 9 Temperature of Concrete During Curing When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below maintain temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing period is measured by maturity When necessary make arrangements before start of concrete placing for heating covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during curing period When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete make arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of wind breaks of shading and for fog spraying wet sprinkling or moisture retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete during curing period P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 86 of 367 Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37 degrees F in any 1 hour nor 80 degrees F in any 24 hour period 3 10 10 Protection from Mechanical Injury During curing period protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances particularly load stresses heavy shock and excessive vibration and from damage
292. livery point to locations of final deposit Interior surfaces of concrete conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete debris water snow ice and other deleterious substances End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 90 of 367 SECTION 05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING 07 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Welder qualification Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS per OSHA 1910 1200 SD 02 Shop Drawings Steel joist framing G SD 07 Certificates Accessories Certification of Compliance 1 2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT All joist girder framing must conform to 29 CFR 1926 757 Secure all joist bridging and anchoring in place prior to the application of any construction loads Distribute temporary loads so that joist capacity is not exceeded Do not apply loads to bridging 1 3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Handle transport and store joists in a manner to prevent damage affecting their structural integrity Store all items off the ground in a well drained location protected from the weather and easily accessible for inspection and handling 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE All work must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926 1 4 1 Drawing Requirements P N 05 C05124 Section 05 21 19 Page 91 of 367 Submit steel joist framing drawings Show joist type and size layout in plan and erection details including method
293. ll be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM P7825a approved with F rating at least equal to fire rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected Firestop systems shall also have T rating where required 2 1 3 1 Through Penetrations Firestopping materials for through penetrations as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall provide F and T fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 Fire resistance ratings for corridors and egress walls an electrical room walls shall be one hour Fire ratings for other locations shall be as indicated on the drawings 2 1 3 2 Construction Joints and Gaps Fire resistance ratings of construction joints as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and gaps such as those between floor slabs or roof decks shall be the same as the construction in which they occur Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E 1399 or UL 2079 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt grease oil or loose materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system For cast in place firestop devices formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concr
294. ll material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated without specific direction of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade except as specified for spread footings Determination of elevations and measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 3 1 Structures With Spread Footings P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 322 of 367 Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative prior to concrete placement Fill over excavations with concrete during foundation placement 3 3 2 Pipe Trenches Excavate to the dimension indicated Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported for the entire length Rock where encountered shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe 3 3 3 Excavated Materials Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be separately st
295. lothing and respiratory equipment is used as required Observe safe work practices 3 1 1 1 Electrical wiring Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of insulation 3 1 1 2 Continuity of Insulation Install blanket insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets and to studs rafters joists sill plates headers and any obstructions Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners wall to ceiling joints roof and floor Avoid creating thermal bridges 3 1 1 3 Sizing of Blankets Provide only full width blankets when insulating between joists or studs Size width of blankets for a snug fit where joists or studs are irregularly spaced End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 07 21 16 Page 107 of 367 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 10 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 07 Certificates Firestopping Materials Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified requirements In lieu of certificates drawings showing UL classified materials as part of a tested assembly may be provided Drawings showing evidence of testing by an alternate nationally recognized independent laboratory may be substituted 1 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing tested and listed firestop systems combination of materials or devices to
296. lows if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be met limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes Additional water may be added provided that both the specified maximum slump and water cement ratio are not exceeded When additional water is added an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at mixing speed is required If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified limits Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the batch 3 6 3 Transporting Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 77 of 367 3 7 PLACING CONCRETE Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected and approved Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation or in standing water Prior to placing concrete remove dirt construction debris water snow and ice from within the forms Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the form
297. ls shall be screw type side wired Contacts shall be silver cadmium and contact arm shall be one piece copper alloy Switches shall be rated quiet type ac only 120 277 volts with current rating and number of poles indicated 2 8 2 Disconnect Switches NEMA KS 1 Provide heavy duty type switches where indicated where switches are rated higher than 240 volts and for double throw switches Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated Provide switches in NEMA 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 2 9 RECEPTACLES UL 498 hard use heavy duty grounding type Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated Bodies shall be of white as per NEMA WD 1 Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6 Provide screw type side wired wiring terminals Connect grounding pole to mounting strap The receptacle shall contain triple wipe power contacts and double or triple wipe ground contacts 2 10 PANELBOARDS UL 67 and UL 50 having a short circuit current rating as indicated Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A Panelboards shall be circuit breaker equipped Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL Specific breaker placement is required in pan
298. luble contaminants 3 3 5 Terne Coated Metal Surfaces Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits ASTM D 235 Wipe dry with clean dry cloths 3 4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE 3 4 1 Concrete and Masonry a Curing Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting except concrete slab on grade which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting b Surface Cleaning Remove the following deleterious substances 1 Dirt Chalking Grease and Oil Wash surfaces with a solution composed of 1 2 cup trisodium phosphate 1 4 cuphousehold detergent and 4 quarts of warm water Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water Wash existing coated surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse thoroughly For large areas water blasting may be used 2 Fungus and Mold Wash surfaces with a solution composed of 1 2 cup trisodium phosphate 1 4 cup household detergent 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water Rinse thoroughly with fresh water 3 4 2 Gypsum Board P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 156 of 367 a Surface Cleaning Gypsum board shall be dry Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brush rubbing with a dry cloth or vacuum cleaning prior to application of the first coat material A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water based b Repair of Minor Defects Prior to painting repair joints cracks holes surface irregulariti
299. luding the following items Materials Devices Electric Door Operators Hood Counterbalancing Mechanism Painting Procedures P N 05 C05124 Section 08 33 23 Page 128 of 367 Manufacture s Brochures Parts Lists Contractor must furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and counterbalance mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship and that they will remain so for not less than two years after completion and acceptance of the project Contractor must warrant that upon notification by the Government he will immediately make good any defects in material workmanship and door operation within the same time period covered by the guarantee at no cost to the Government PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 2 1 1 Curtain Materials and Construction Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 653 A 653M Grade A with the additional requirement of a minimum yield point of 33 000 psi Provide sheets which are galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 A 653M and ASTM A 924 A 924M Fabricate doors from interlocking cold rolled slats with section profiles as specified designed to withstand the specified wind loading Provide slats which are continuous without splices for the width of the door Provide slats filled with manufacturer s standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 75 and 450 respectively according to ASTM E
300. m engineer m TAB team technicians TAB team assistants n TABB Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau 1 2 WORK DESCRIPTION P N 05 C05124 Section 23 05 93 Page 229 of 367 The work includes testing adjusting and balancing TAB of new heating ventilating and cooling HVAC air distribution systems including equipment and performance data ducts and piping which are located within on under between and adjacent to buildings Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm s qualifications Comply with requirements of AABC MN 1 NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS or SMACNA 1780 TABB as supplemented and modified by this specification section All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory 1 2 1 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings 1 A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal 2 Air quantities at air terminals 3 Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules The Testing Adjusting and Balancing TAB Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative of any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system and systems readiness check The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report in
301. manufacture by usual commercial methods Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal to metal or metal to plastic type as required for the application Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip Outlets shall have internal pipe thread except that when required for the application the outlets shall have sockets for solder joint connections The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches The interior diameter shall be not more than 1 8 inch over or under the nominal size and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout A copper alloy P trap assembly P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 209 of 367 consisting of an adjustable P trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber gasketed swivel joint 2 8 WATER HEATERS Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated Each water heater shall have replaceable anodes Each primary water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 90 to 160 degrees F A factory pre charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi working pressure
302. minum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to frequent moisture and aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy bodied bituminous paint In lieu of painting the aluminum the Contractor shall have the option of painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of aluminum paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant 3 3 CLEANING Upon completion of installation clean window surfaces in accordance with manufacturer s written recommended procedure Do not use abrasive caustic or acid cleaning agents 3 4 PROTECTION Protect windows from damage and from contamination by other materials such as cement mortar Prior to completion and acceptance of the work restore damaged windows and glazing to original condition or replace with new ones End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 16 Page 126 of 367 SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 07 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DESCRIPTION Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of manufacturer s standard mechanism with an adjustable tension steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings Use grease sealed or self lubricating bearings for rotating members Doors to be coiling type with interlocking slats complete with anchoring and door hardware guides hood and operating mechanisms
303. move oil and grease Where shop coat is missing or damaged clean according to SSPC SP 3 3 3 2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition For tool cleaned surfaces the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and SSPC SP 3 As a visual reference cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3 3 3 3 Galvanized Surfaces P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 155 of 367 a Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products Clean with solvent steam or non alkaline detergent solution in accordance with SSPC SP 1 If the galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized the coating shall be completely removed by brush off abrasive blast New galvanized steel to be coated shall not be passivated or stabilized If the absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented test as described in ASTM D 2092 Appendix X2 and remove by one of the methods described therein b Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration and no blistering peeling or cracking Use inhibitor as recommended by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting 3 3 4 Non Ferrous Metallic Surfaces Aluminum and aluminum alloy lead copper and other nonferrous metal surfaces a Surface Cleaning Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild non alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water so
304. move or rub off fins and other projections exceeding 0 25 inch in height P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 81 of 367 3 8 3 3 Standard Smooth Finish Finish must be as cast concrete surface as obtained with form facing material for standard smooth finish Repair and patch defective areas as specified and all fins and remove other projections on surface 3 8 4 Surface Finish Samples Provide a minimum of three sample concrete panels for each finish for each mix design 3 by 3 feet 3 inches thick Use the approved concrete mix design s Provide sample panels on site at locations directed Once approved each set of panels must be representative of each of the finishes specified and of the workmanship and finish es required Do not remove or destroy samples until directed by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 9 FLOOR SLAB AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ACI MCP 2 unless otherwise specified Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided 3 9 1 Finish Place consolidate and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour grade and elevation before bleedwater appears Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater 3 9 1 1 Steel Tro
305. mpanying specifications are the property of the Government and comprise legal documentation that pertains exclusively to this project Drawings can only be obtained electronically by downloading the files identified with this solicitation at https www fbo gov CEU Cleveland will not provide hard copies of drawings 2 1 Construction Drawings _7648 D Sheets 1 thru 28 of 28 2 2 Reference Drawings NONE End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 01 00 Page 5 of 367 SECTION 01 01 20 WORK BY OTHERS 1 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT Non contractor personnel will accomplish the following work items necessary for completion of the project However the contractor must coordinate accomplishment of these work items with the appropriate parties noted below in accordance with SECTION 01 04 00 Coordination 1 1 Work by Coast Guard Personnel Coast Guard personnel or other parties acting on the behalf of the Coast Guard will install and connect communications security and electronic equipment radios telephone and antennas and pull wiring for these systems Additionally Coast Guard personnel shall be responsible for disconnecting and moving storing Coast Guard owned tools and equipment that will be in the areas where contract work is to be performed Coast Guard personnel shall also be responsible for the removal and security of their personal items 1 2 Work by other Contractors or Service Companies Contractor personnel and eq
306. mplete and prior to acceptance of the work construction dust and debris shall be removed from exterior surfaces SMACNA 1987 3 6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be consistent with manufacturer s standard brochures schematics printed instructions general operating procedures and safety precautions End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 256 of 367 SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS REGISTERS AND GRILLS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Certify air diffusion devices s having been tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 17 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 31 and ASHRAE 113 where such certification is required 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Submit the following in accordance with this section Material Equipment and Fixture Lists Records of Existing Conditions SD 02 Shop Drawings Submit Fabrication Drawings for air diffusion devices in accordance with this section Submit Installation Drawings for air diffusion devices in accordance with the paragraph entitled Installation of this section SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Provide operation and maintenance manuals consistent with manufacturer s standard brochures schematics printed instructions general operating procedures and safety precautions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 AIR DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTR
307. n 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer s unopened containers Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather humidity dirt dust and other contaminants The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty dusty wet or contaminated by some other means Packages or standard containers of insulation jacket material cements adhesives and coatings delivered for use and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer s stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand and a description of the material Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 STANDARD PRODUCTS Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening Provide field applied insulation for heating P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 233 of 367 ventilating and cooling HVAC air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within on under and adjacent to buildings and for plumbing systems 2 2 MATERIALS Provide insulation that meet
308. n self sealing intumescent inserts Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves adds or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 07 84 00 Page 110 of 367 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Sealants Primers Bond breakers Backstops Manufacturer s descriptive data including storage requirements shelf life curing time instructions for mixing and application and primer data if required Provide a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheet for each solvent primer or sealant material SD 07 Certificates Sealant Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to the specified requirements 1 2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SEALANTS Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates to which it will be applied 2 1 1 Interior Sealant P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 111 of 367 Provide ASTM C 920 Type S or M Grade NS Class 12 5 Use NT Location s and color s of sealant for the following LOCATION COLOR a Small voids between walls or partitions and White adjacent lockers casework shelving door frames built in or surface mounted equipment and fixtures and similar items b Perime
309. n in another emergency control device or system such as an HVAC system the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device p The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 15 seconds q The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds 2 2 3 System Monitoring a Valves Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system including automatic sprinkler control valves sprinkler service entrance valve whether supplied under this contract or existing shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address unless they are within the same room then a maximum of 5 feet can use the same address 2 2 4 Addressable Interface Devices The addressable interface AI device shall provide an addressable input interface to the FACP for monitoring normally open or normally closed contact devices such as waterflow switches valve supervisory switches relays for output function actuation etc 2 2 5 Smoke Sensors 2 2 5 1 Duct Smoke Sensors P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 304 of 367 Duct smoke sensors shall be analog addressable photoelectric type as described in paragraph entitled Photoelectric Smoke Sensors and shall be provided in ductwork in accordance with
310. n measured at a flowing water pressure of 80 psi Provide recessed type units approximately 60 inches wide 30 inches front to rear 72 inches high with 15 inches high rim for through the floor drain installation with unit bottom or feet firmly supported by a smooth level floor Provide left or right drain outlet units as required Units shall have built in soap dish and minimum of 12 inch long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on back wall for standing use Units shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124 1 2 and shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation Inc for compliance Install unit in accordance with the manufacturer s written instructions Finish installation by covering unit attachment flanges with wall board in accordance with unit manufacturer s recommendation Provide smooth 100 percent silicone rubber white bathtub calk between the unit and the adjacent walls and floor surfaces 2 5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow prevention devices must be approved by the State or local regulatory agencies If there is no State or local regulatory agency requirements the backflow prevention devices must be listed by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control amp Hydraulic Research or any other approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention devices and assemblies Reduced pressure principle assemblies double check valve assemblies atmospheric nonpressure
311. n of new doors adequately reinforced hinged and latched 3 3 1 10 Plenum Construction Intake and discharge plenum shall have companion angle joints with the following minimum thickness of materials LONGEST SHEET ANGLES METAL REINFORCEMENT SIDE USS GAGE COMPANION ANGLES INCHES 24 INCHES ON INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 251 of 367 To 48 20 1 1 2 by 1 1 2 by 1 8 1 1 2 by 1 1 2 by 1 8 49 to 84 18 2 by 2 by 1 8 2 by 2 by 3 16 85 to 120 16 2 by 2 by 1 8 2 by 2 by 1 8 121 and larger 14 2 by 2 by 3 16 2 by 2 by 3 16 At the floor line and other points where plenums join masonry construction panels shall be bolted 12 inches on center to 2 by 2 by 3 16 inch thick hot dip galvanized steel angle that has been secured to the masonry with masonry anchors and bolts 24 inches on center and calked tight to the masonry 3 3 1 11 Manual Volume Dampers Balancing dampers of the splitter butterfly or multilouver type shall be provided to balance each respective main and branch duct Dampers regulated through ceilings shall have regulator concealed in box mounted in the ceiling with a cover finish aesthetically compatible with ceiling surface Where ceiling is of removable construction regulators shall be above ceiling and location shall be marked on ceiling in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 3 1 12 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal Air handling
312. n through glass breakage for a 10 year period following acceptance of P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 16 Page 122 of 367 the work Provide new units for any units failing to comply with terms of this warranty within 45 working days after receipt of notice from the Government PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FRAMES Fixed aluminum frames of size design and location indicated Provide complete with frames glazing trim and accessories 2 2 MATERIALS 2 2 1 Anchors Stainless steel 2 2 2 Aluminum Alloy for Frames ASTM B 221 Alloy 6063 T5 for extrusions ASTM B 209 alloy and temper best suited for aluminum sheets and strips 2 2 3 Fasteners Stainless steel 2 2 4 Structural Steel ASTM A 36 A 36M 2 2 5 Aluminum Paint Aluminum window manufacturer s standard aluminum paint 2 3 FABRICATION 2 3 1 Aluminum Frames Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated Provide removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed glass Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed fastenings and space not more than 12 inches on center Mill joints in frame members to a hairline fit reinforce and secure mechanically 2 3 2 Welding and Fastening Where possible locate welds on unexposed surfaces Dress welds on exposed surfaces smoothly Select welding rods filler wire and flux to produce a uniform texture and color in P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 16 Page 123 of 367 finished work Remove flux
313. n width must be a minimum of 4 inches greater than indicated 3 7 3 Vibration ACI MCP 2 Furnish a spare working vibrator on the job site whenever concrete is placed Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by wood tampers spading and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge Operate internal vibrators with vibratory element submerged in the concrete with a minimum frequency of not less than 6000 impulses per minute when submerged Do not use vibrators to transport the concrete in the forms Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 20 inches apart Penetrate the previously placed lift with the vibrator when more than one lift is required Place P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 78 of 367 concrete in 20 inch maximum vertical lifts Use external vibrators on the exterior surface of the forms when internal vibrators do not provide adequate consolidation of the concrete 3 7 4 Pumping ACI MCP 2 Pumping must not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments Loss of slump in pumping equipment must not exceed 2 inches Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes Limit maximum size of course aggregate to 33 percent of the diam
314. nd Before construction of slabs on ground have underground work on pipes and conduits completed and approved Previously constructed subgrade or fill must be cleaned of foreign materials and inspected by the Contractor for adequate compaction and surface tolerances as specified Actual density of top 12 inches of subgrade soil material in place must not be less than the following percentages of maximum density of same soil material compacted at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557 SOIL MATERIAL PERCENT MAXIMUM DENSITY Drainage fill 100 Cohesionless soil material 100 Cohesive soil material 95 Finish surface of drainage fill under interior slabs on ground must not show deviation in excess of 1 4 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building lines Finished surface of subgrade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must not be more than 0 02 foot above or 0 10 foot below elevation indicated P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 70 of 367 Cover drainage fill surface under interior slabs on ground with specified water vapor barrier subgrade cover immediately prior to placing reinforcement Install subgrade cover to avoid puncture or tear Patch punctures or tears over 12 inches with separate sheets lapped not less than 12 inches Seal all punctures or tears less than 12 inches with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape not less than 2 inches wide Seal lapped joints wit
315. ndard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53 A 53M and of the size indicated Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi 2 4 HANDRAILS Design handrails to resist a concentrated load of 250 Ibs in any direction at any point of the top of the rail or 20 lbs per foot applied horizontally to top of the rail whichever is more severe NAAMM AMP 521 provide the same size rail and post Provide pipe collars of the same material and finish as the handrail and posts 2 4 1 Steel Handrails Including Carbon Steel Inserts Provide steel handrails including inserts in concrete steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53 A 53M or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500 Grade A or B of equivalent strength Provide steel railings of 1 1 2 inches nominal size Railings to be shop painted P N 05 C05124 Section 05 50 00 Page 102 of 367 a Fabrication Joint posts rail and corners by one of the following methods 1 Flush type rail fittings of commercial standard welded and ground smooth with railing splice locks secured with 3 8 inch hexagonal recessed head setscrews 2 Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to post mitering corners groove welding joints and grinding smooth Butt railing splices and reinforce them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long 3 Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing
316. nents and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior Include primary and secondary framing metal roof panels metal wall panels and accessories complying with requirements indicated a Provide metal building system of size and with spacing slopes and spans indicated 1 3 1 Primary Frame Type a Rigid Clear Span Solid member structural framing system without interior columns 1 3 2 Fixed End Wall Framing Provide manufacturer s standard fixed end wall for buildings not required to be expandable 1 3 3 Secondary Frame Type Provide manufacturer s standard purlins and joists with flush framed and exterior framed bypass girts 1 3 4 Eave Height Manufacturer s standard height with a minimum 22 foot eave height as indicated by nominal height on Drawings 1 3 5 Bay Spacing Bay Spacing must be as indicated on drawings 1 3 6 Roof Slope Roof slope must be 1 inch per 12 inches manufacturer s standard for frame type required 1 3 7 Roof System Provide manufacturer s standard vertical rib standing seam trapezoidal rib standing seam or lap seam metal roof panels with insulation 1 3 8 Exterior Wall System Provide manufacturer s standard field assembled insulated metal wall panels 1 4 SUBMITTALS P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 178 of 367 Submit the followi
317. ng in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Manufacturer s Qualifications G SD 02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings G SD 03 Product Data Manufacturer s catalog data G SD 04 Samples Manufacturer s color charts and chips 4 by 4 inches G SD 05 Design Data Manufacturer s descriptive and technical literature G Manufacturer s building design analysis G SD 06 Test Reports test reports G Coatings and base metals G Factory Color Finish Performance Requirements G SD 07 Certificates system components G Qualification of Manufacturer G Qualification of Erector G SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Installation of Roof and Wall panels G shipping handling and storage G P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 179 of 367 SD 11 Closeout Submittals Manufacturer s Warranty G Contractor s Warranty for Installation G 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 5 1 Manufacturer s Technical Representative The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products erection of structural framing and installation of roof and wall panels in the geographical area where construction will take place 1 5 2 Manufacturer s Qualifications Metal building system manufacturer must have a minimum of five 5 years experience as a quailed manufacturer of metal building systems and accessory products and a member of MBMA Provide engineering services by an aut
318. ng inspection and corrective welding in accordance with AWS D1 1 D1 1M Use continuous welds on all exposed connections Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation 3 6 FINISHES 3 6 1 Dissimilar Materials Where dissimilar metals are in contact protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action Where aluminum is in contact with concrete plaster mortar masonry wood or absorptive materials subject to wetting protect with ASTM D 1187 asphalt base emulsion 3 7 HANDRAILS Toeboards and brackets shall be installed where indicated Splices where required shall be made at expansion joints Removable sections shall be installed as indicated 3 7 1 Steel Handrail Install by means of base plates bolted to stringers or structural steel frame work Secure rail ends by steel pipe flanges anchored by expansion shields and bolts 3 8 STEEL STAIRS Provide anchor bolts grating fasteners washers and all parts or devices necessary for proper installation Provide lock washers under nuts 3 9 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS BOLLARDS PIPE GUARDS Pipe guards shall be set vertically in concrete piers Piers shall be constructed of and the hollow cores of the pipe filled with concrete specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 3 10 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY NOSINGS Nosing shall be completely embedded in concrete before the initial set of the concrete occurs and shall finish flush wit
319. ng lock and cylinder system The existing system is a BEST lock system 2 2 6 Lock Trim Cast forged or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design 2 2 6 1 Knobs and Roses Conform to the minimum test requirements of BHMA A156 2 and BHMA A156 13 for knobs roses and escutcheons For unreinforced knobs roses and escutcheons provide 0 050 inch thickness For reinforced knobs roses and escutcheons provide outer shell of 0 035 inch thickness and combined thickness of 0 070 inch except for knob shanks which are 0 060 inch thick 2 2 6 2 Lever Handles Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs Conform to the minimum requirements of BHMA A156 13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit devices Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature such as a weakened spindle or a shear key to prevent irreparable damage to the lock when force in excess of that specified in BHMA A156 13 is applied to the lever handle Provide lever handles return to within 1 2 inch of the door face 2 2 6 3 Texture P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 138 of 367 Provide knurled or abrasive coated knobs or lever handles 2 2 7 Keys Furnish one file key one duplicate key and one working key for each key change and for each master keying system Furnish one additional working key for each lock of each keyed alike group Furnish a quantity of key blanks equal to 20 percent of the total number of file keys Stamp each key with appropriate k
320. ng required offsets fittings and accessories to meet such conditions Submit drawings consisting of a Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details b Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for maintenance and operation c Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and interconnected or interlocked relationships between components d Foundation drawings bolt setting information and foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations e Details if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated which include loadings and type of frames brackets stanchions or other supports f Automatic temperature control diagrams and control sequences g Installation details which includes the amount of factory set superheat and corresponding refrigerant pressure temperature 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Stored items shall be protected from the weather humidity and temperature variations dirt and dust or other contaminants Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor s responsibility Replace any materials found to be damaged at the Contractor s expense During installation piping and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 263 of 367 1 5 EXTRA MATERIALS
321. ngles after final insulation covering has been applied 3 3 6 Duct Probe Access Provide holes with neat patches threaded plugs or threaded or twist on caps for air balancing pitot tube access Provide extended neck fittings where probe access area is insulated 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 4 1 Ductwork Leakage Tests P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 255 of 367 Contractor shall conduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Tests shall be performed prior to installing ductwork insulation 3 4 2 Inspection Ductwork shall be inspected in accordance with SMACNA 1987 3 5 DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONS Open ducting shall be protected from construction dust and debris in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Dirty assembled ducting shall be cleaned by subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams moving at velocities two times specified working velocities at static pressures within maximum ratings This may be accomplished by filter equipped portable blowers which remain the Contractor s property wheel mounted compressed air operated perimeter lances which direct the compressed air and which are pulled in the direction of normal airflow and other means approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Compressed air used for cleaning ducting shall be water and oil free After construction is co
322. ngles installed perpendicular to the steel joists and supported by the adjacent steel joists Install steel channels or angles perpendicular to the deck ribs and fasten to the channels or angles perpendicular to the steel joists Deck manufacturer shall approve holes or openings larger than 6 inch in diameter prior to drilling or cutting 3 2 3 Deck Damage SDI MOC2 for repair of deck damage 3 2 4 Accessory Installation 3 2 4 1 End Closures Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns walls and openings in deck 3 2 4 2 Access Hole Covers Provide to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate welding of decking to structural supports 3 2 4 3 Hangers Provide as indicated to support utility system and suspended ceilings Space devices so as to provide a minimum of one device per 6 25 square feet End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 99 of 367 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Fabrication drawings of steel stairs G Handrails installation drawings G Submit fabrication drawings showing layout s connections to structural system and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303 Submit templates erection and installation drawings indicating thickness type grade class of metal and dimensions Show construction details reinforcement anchorage and
323. ngs SD 03 Product Data and SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions at the same time for each system SD 03 Product Data Pipe Insulation Systems G Duct Insulation Systems G P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 232 of 367 A complete list of materials including manufacturer s descriptive technical literature performance data catalog cuts and installation instructions The product number k value thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included The product data must be copywrited have an identifying or publication number and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation Materials furnished under this section of the specification shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet SD 02 Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Pipe Insulation Systems G Duct Insulation Systems G Submit a booklet containing manufacturer s published installation instructions for the insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and which MICA plate are applicable The instructions must be copywrited have an identifying or publication number and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitatio
324. nitiating device s are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal The system shall provide the following functions and operating features a The FACP and fire alarm control units if used shall provide power annunciation supervision and control for the system b Provide Style B initiating device circuits for conductor lengths of 10 feet or less Q Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for the network d Provide Style Z notification appliance circuits The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized e Provide electrical supervision of the primary power AC supply presence of the battery battery voltage and placement of system modules within the control panel f Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition or ground fault The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power AC supply absence of a battery supply low battery voltage or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules Provide a trouble alarm silence feature which shall silence the audible trouble signal without affecting the visual indicator After the system returns to normal operating conditions the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition g Provide a notification appliance s
325. nket Insulation ASTM C 665 Type II blankets with non reflecting coverings Class A membrane faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 2 8 4 Rubber Closure Strips Closed cell expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 and ASTM D 1667 extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified metal panel and in lengths supplied by the metal panel manufacturer 2 8 5 Metal Closure Strips Factory fabricated aluminum or steel closure strips to be the same material gauge thickness color finish and profile of the specified roof or wall panel 2 8 6 2 6 6 Joint Sealants 2 8 6 1 Sealants Sealants are to be an approved gun type for use in hand or air pressure caulking guns at temperatures above 40 degrees F 4 degrees C or frost free application at temperatures above 10 degrees F minus 12 degrees C with minimum solid content of 85 percent of the total volume Sealant is to dry with a tough durable surface skin which permits it to remain soft and pliable underneath providing a weather tight joint No migratory staining is permitted on painted or unpainted metal stone glass vinyl or wood Prime all joints to receive sealants with a compatible one component or two component primer as recommended by the metal panel manufacturer 2 8 6 2 Shop Applied Sealant for shop applied caulking must be an approved gun grade non sag one component polysulfide or silicone conforming to ASTM C 9
326. ns Submit for approval offset configurations Miter elbows shall be two piece type for angles less than 31 degrees three piece type for angles 31 through 60 degrees and five piece type for angles 61 through 90 degrees Centerline radius of elbows shall be 1 1 2 times fitting cross section diameter Crosses increasers reducers reducing tees and 90 degree tees shall be conical type Cutouts in fitting body shall be equal to branch tap dimension or where smaller excess material shall be flared and rolled into smooth radius nozzle configuration 2 2 2 Reinforcement Support inner liners of both duct and fittings by metal spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity P N 05 C05124 Section 23 31 13 Page 246 of 367 2 2 3 Fittings Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings not tap collars into duct sections with the following construction requirements Sound airtight continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap Tap liner securely welded to inner liner with weld spacing not to exceed 3 inches Pack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner without spaces for air erosion of insulation and without sharp projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings Protect galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding with manufacturer s standard corros
327. nstructions and cleaning instructions SD 07 Certificates Accessory Items Certificate for each type of accessory specified attesting that the items meet the specified requirements 1 2 WARRANTY Provide manufacturer s standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year period PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS Provide toilet accessories shall be provided where indicated Provide each accessory item shall be complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction with corrosion resistant surface 2 1 1 Anchors and Fasteners Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited for use with the supporting construction Provide tamperproof design or oval heads exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory P N 05 C05124 Section 10 28 13 Page 168 of 367 2 1 2 Finishes Except where noted otherwise provide the following finishes on metal Metal Finish Stainless steel No 4 satin finish Carbon steel copper alloy Chromium plated bright and brass 2 2 ACCESSORY ITEMS Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below 2 2 1 Mirrors Glass MG Provide Type I transparent flat type Class 1 clear glass for mirrors Glazing Quality q1 1 4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036 Coat glass on one surface with silver coating copper protective coating and mirror backing paint 2 2
328. nt or tightly welded or keyed and sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace though the corners Primary seal shall be compressed polyisobutylene and the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone 2 3 4 2 Beads Provide extruded aluminum snap in glazing beads on interior surface Provide extruded aluminum theft proof snap in glazing beads or fixed glazing beads on exterior or security side Glazing beads shall have vinyl insert glazing gaskets Design glazing beads to receive glass of thickness indicated or specified 2 3 5 Finishes Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of anodic coating or organic coating 2 3 5 1 Anodic Coating Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming to AA DAF 45 Finish shall be integral color anodized designation AA M10 C22 A42 Architectural Class I 0 7 mil or thicker Color shall be as selected from manufacturer s standard colors P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 16 Page 124 of 367 2 3 5 2 Organic Coating Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces Provide a high performance finish in accordance with AAMA 2604 with total dry film thickness of not less than 1 2 mils The finish color shall be as selected from manufacturer s standard colors PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Plumb square level and align frames and framing members to receive glazing Anchor frames to adjac
329. nue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 SOIL MATERIALS 2 1 1 Satisfactory Materials As indicated on the plans 2 1 2 Unsatisfactory Materials Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials Unsatisfactory materials also include man made fills trash refuse or backfills from previous construction Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter frozen material and stones larger than 3 inches The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative shall be notified of any contaminated materials 2 1 3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW GP SW and SP Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC SC ML CL MH and CH Materials classified as GM GP GM GW GM SW SM SP SM and SM shall be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic plasticity index equals zero Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater t
330. o ASCE 7 05 AISC 341 and the applicable portions of the building code in the geographic area where the construction will take place 1 1 3 Thermal Movements Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change range in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling opening of joints overstressing of components failure of joint sealants failure of connections and other detrimental effects Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss as follows a Temperature Change Range 120 F ambient 180 F material surfaces 1 1 4 Thermal Performance Provide metal building manufacturers standard fiberglass insulation blankets with facing under the roof panels to control condensation P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 176 of 367 1 1 5 Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test pressure difference of 2 86 Ibf sq ft 1 1 6 Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind load design pressure of not less than 6 24 Ibf sq ft and not more than 12 Ibf sq ft 1 1 7 Wind Uplift Resistance Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90 1 2 DEFINITIONS ASTM DEE applies to this definition paragraph a B
331. o concrete that has set may be obtained by use of a concrete bonding agent Apply such bonding material to cleaned concrete surface in accordance with approved printed instructions of bonding material manufacturer 3 8 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR SLAB AND PAVEMENT FINISHES 3 8 1 Defects Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs pits greater than 1 square inch surface area or 0 25 inch maximum depth or otherwise defective areas Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with nonshrink grout Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed Concrete with extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement cold joints entrapped debris separated aggregate or other defects which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected unless correction of defects is approved Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair The surface of the concrete must not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI MCP 4 Exposed surfaces must be uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified 3 8 2 Not Against Forms Top of Walls Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even surfaces Finish must match adjacent finishes 3 8 3 Formed Surfaces 3 8 3 1 Tolerances ACI MCP 1 and as indicated 3 8 3 2 As Cast Rough Form Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view Patch these holes and defects and level abrupt irregularities Re
332. o cover edges of deck Do not cut deck until after installation of supplemental supports 2 2 4 Cover Plates Sheet metal to close panel edge and end conditions and where panels change direction or butt Polyethylene coated self adhesive 2 inch wide joint tape may be provided in lieu of cover plates on flat surfaced decking butt joints Fabricate cover plates for abutting floor deck units from the specified structural quality steel sheets not less than nominal thick before galvanizing Provide 6 inch wide cover plates and form to match the contour of the floor deck units 2 2 5 Hanger Provide clips or loops for utility systems and suspended ceilings of one or more of the following types a Lip tabs or integral tabs where noncellular decking or flat plate of cellular section is 0 0474 inch thick or more and a structural concrete fill is used over deck b Slots or holes punched in decking for installation of pigtails P N 05 C05124 Section 05 30 00 Page 96 of 367 c Tabs driven from top side of decking and arranged so as not to pierce electrical cells d Decking manufacturer s standard as approved by the Contracting Officer 2 2 6 Mechanical Fasteners Provide mechanical fasteners such as powder actuated or pneumatically driven fasteners for anchoring the deck to structural supports and adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated Provide positive locking type fasteners standard with the Steel Deck Institute and
333. o joint is located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing Lay water lines which cross sewer force mains at least 2 feet above these sewer lines when joints in the sewer line are closer than 3 feet horizontally from the water line encase these joints in concrete Where water piping is required to be installed within 3 feet of existing structures the water pipe shall be sleeved as required in Paragraph Casting Pipe The Contractor shall install the water pipe and sleeve ensuring that there will be no damage to the structures and no settlement or movement of foundations or footings Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines or electric wiring a Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping 1 Normal Conditions Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible Measure the distance edge to edge 2 Unusual Conditions When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that a The bottom invert of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top crown of the sewer piping b Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained the sewer piping shall be constructed of AWWA approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling Approved waste w
334. o meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results Give Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 5 working days notice prior to each tests 3 4 1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times demonstrating satisfactory operation each time 3 4 2 600 Volt Wiring Test Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance Minimum resistance shall be 250 000 ohms 3 4 3 Grounding System Test Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 290 of 367
335. oard in toilets restrooms shower areas and other high humidity areas not otherwise specified 1 Alkyd New MPI INT 9 2C G5 Semigloss Existing MPI RIN 9 2C G5 Semigloss Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 50 MPI 47 MPI 47 System DFT 4 mils End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 162 of 367 SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Toilet Partition System and Hardware G Manufacturer s technical data and catalog cuts including installation and cleaning instructions SD 04 Samples Colors and Finishes G Manufacturer s standard color charts and color samples 1 2 WARRANTY Provide Certification or warranties that toilet partitions will be free of defects in materials fabrication finish and installation and will remain so for a period of not less than year after completion 1 3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication to ensure proper fits PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2 1 1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A 385 and ASTM A 123 A 123M Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices 2 1 2 Brackets P N 05 C05124 Section 10 21 13 Page 163 of 367 Wall brackets must be two ear panel brackets T style 1 inch stock P
336. ockpiled if it cannot be readily placed Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL 3 3 4 Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid and unshattered condition shall be used Approximately level surfaces shall be roughened and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond Shales shall be protected from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion resulting from ponding or flow of water 3 4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed stepped benched or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material When subgrades are less than the specified density the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches pulverized and compacted to the specified density When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural gr
337. odel 2 1 1 1 Extra Heavy Duty Doors P N 05 C05 124 Section 08 11 13 Page 117 of 367 SDI DOOR A250 8 Level 3 physical performance Level A Model 1 or 2 with core construction as required by the manufacturer for interior doors and for indicated exterior doors of size s and design s indicated Where vertical stiffener cores are required the space between the stiffeners shall be filled with mineral board insulation 2 2 INSULATION CORES Insulated cores shall be of type specified and provide an apparent U factor of 48 in accordance with SDI DOOR 113 and shall conform to a Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam ASTM C 591 Type I or II foamed in place or in board form with oxygen index of not less than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2863 or b Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board ASTM C 578 Type I or II or c Mineral board ASTM C 612 Type I 2 3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES SDI DOOR A250 8 Level 3 except as otherwise specified Form frames to sizes and shapes indicated with welded corners Provide steel frames for all doors unless otherwise indicated 2 3 1 Welded Frames Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints Mechanically interlock or continuously weld stops and rabbets Grind welds smooth Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural Welding Code Sections through 6 AWS D1 1 D1 1M and in accordance with the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded
338. of Atlantic Beach NC 1 1 1 6 Collateral Loads Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal building system for permanent items such as sprinklers mechanical systems electrical systems and ceilings 1 1 1 7 Auxiliary Loads P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 175 of 367 Include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and materials handling equipment indicated on detail drawings 1 1 1 8 Load Combinations Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load combinations as required by MBMA MBSM ASCE 7 05 and the building code applicable to the project location 1 1 1 9 Deflection Limits Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following a Purlins and Rafters vertical deflection of 1 180 of the span b Girts horizontal deflection of 1 180 of the span c Metal Roof Panels vertical deflection of 1 180 of the span d Metal Wall Panels horizontal deflection of 1 180 of the span Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances and to maintain clearances at openings Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses indicated based on testing according to ASTM E 1592 1 1 2 Seismic Performance Design and engineer metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according t
339. of the electricity shall be limited to tools that can be operated on 60 Hertz single phase 20 ampere 120 volt circuits 3 TELEPHONE Telephone services will not be available for use by the Contractor 4 WATER HOOKUP All connections to the water system shall be equipped with back flow protection Temporary potable water pipes and hoses shall be sterilized before being placed in operation and every time the system is opened to the atmosphere for repair or relocation 5 SANITARY FACILITIES It shall be the Contractor s responsibility to furnish and maintain approved portable toilet facilities for all Contractor personnel The On Site Representative will designate the physical location for the facility and the Contractor shall maintain the toilet facility to the satisfaction of the Government Contractor personnel are forbidden to use toilet facilities within existing buildings End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 51 00 Page 33 of 367 SECTION 01 52 00 PROTECTION FROM WEATHER AND CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS l TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES Protect existing facilities equipment and new construction whether in progress or newly completed from the adverse effects of the weather and construction operations Provide temporary enclosures coverings and barriers as required to afford protection against exposure weather and wind damage and from construction operations which could degrade stain age or reduce the finished quality of new wor
340. om the bottom Trim for the exposed surface of flush mounted fixtures shall be as indicated 2 4 SUSPENDED FIXTURES Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation Hangers shall be cadmium plated steel with a swivel ball tapped for the conduit size indicated Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging 2 5 SWITCHES 2 5 1 Toggle Switches P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 295 of 367 Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 2 6 PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120 volts ac 60 Hz with single throw contacts Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources Provide switch a Integral to the luminaire rated 1000W minimum Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition 2 7 EXIT SIGNS UL 924 NFPA 70 and NFPA 101 Exit signs shall be self powered type Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts 2 7 1 Self Powered LED Type Exit Signs Battery Backup Provide with automatic power failure device test switch pilot light and fully automatic high low trickle char
341. on Floor Slabs Only ASTM C 33 C 33M uniformly graded and as follows Nominal maximum aggregate size of 1 inch A combined sieve analysis must indicate a well graded aggregate from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No 50 0 3mm sieve and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No 50 0 3mm Provide sand that is at least 50 percent natural sand P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 64 of 367 2 4 4 Nonshrink Grout ASTM C 1107 C 1107M 2 4 5 Admixtures ASTM C 494 C 494M Type A water reducing Type B retarding Type C accelerating Type D water reducing and retarding and Type E water reducing and accelerating admixture Do not use calcium chloride admixtures 2 4 5 1 Air Entraining ASTM C 260 2 4 5 2 High Range Water Reducer HRWR Superplasticizers ASTM C 494 C 494M Type F and ASTM C 1017 C 1017M 2 4 5 3 Pozzolan Provide fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures that conform to ASTM C 618 2 4 6 Vapor Barrier Provide vapor barrier as specified on the drawings 2 4 7 Materials for Curing Concrete Use water based curing compounds sealers and coatings with low maximum 160 grams liter less water and less exempt compounds VOC content Consider the use of water based or vegetable or soy based curing agents in lieu of petroleum based products Consider agents
342. on joints shall be iron conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C111 Iron fittings and specials shall be cement mortar lined standard thickness in accordance with AWWA C104 3 Solvent Cement Joint Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure Fittings for solvent cement jointing shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467 2 1 2 2 PVC Plastic Pressure Joints and Jointing Material Joints for pipe 4 inch to 12 inch diameter shall be push on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139 Joints between pipe and fittings shall be push on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139 or shall be compression type joints mechanical joints as respectively specified in ASTM D 3139 and AWWA C111 Each joint connection shall be provided with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling with which it is to be used Gaskets for push on joints for pipe shall conform to ASTM F 477 Gaskets for push on joints and compression type joints mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and fittings shall be as specified in AWWA C111 respectively for push on joints and mechanical joints 2 2 CONCRETE MATERIALS 2 2 1 Cement Mortar Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 Type M with Type II cement 2 2 2 Portland Cement Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 Type II for concrete used in concrete pipe and concrete pipe fittings
343. on 02 41 00 Page 51 of 367 1 4 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as but not limited to ice flooding or pollution Vacuum and dust the work area daily Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to aircraft 1 5 PROTECTION 1 5 1 Traffic Control Signs Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work use traffic barricades with flashing lights Notify the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative prior to beginning such work 1 5 2 Existing Conditions Documentation Before beginning any demolition work survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions Existing damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work It is the Contractor s responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work and to note these outages on t
344. ond plate with 1 4 inch channel frame and continuous anchor flange Use access hatch cover capable of withstanding a live load of 300 lbs sq ft Provide stainless steel cylinder lock with two keys per lock Key all the locks the same 2 6 2 Wet Well Provide concrete wet well with inside diameter as indicated Precast structures may be provided in lieu of cast in place structures 2 6 2 1 Cast In Place Concrete Structures Provide wet well with a compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 2 6 2 2 Precast Concrete Structures ASTM C 478 C 478M except as specified herein Provide precast concrete structures with a compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and an air entrainment of 6 percent plus or minus 2 percent and a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches ASTM A 615 A 615M reinforcing bars ASTM C 443 C 443M or AASHTO M 198 Type B gaskets for joint connections Use monolithic base and first riser 2 6 3 Wet Well Base Material Provide crushed stone as indicated and specified in Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL Provide polyethylene vapor barrier as indicated and specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 3 EXECUTION P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 365 of 367 3 1 INSTALLATION Provide pump station in accordance with drawings and requirements of the respective equipment manufacturers Dampen and isolate equipment vibration 3 1 1 Installation of P
345. onents are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice Change in direction shall be made with fittings except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed The center line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe Bent pipe showing kinks wrinkles flattening or other malformations will not be acceptable 3 1 1 5 Pipe Drains Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3 4 inch hose bibb with renewable seat and gate valve ahead of hose bibb At other low points 3 4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain 3 1 1 6 Thrust Restraint Plugs caps tees valves and bends deflecting 11 25 degrees or more either vertically or horizontally in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks where indicated to prevent movement Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 213 of 367 than 1 cement 2 1 2 sand 5 gravel and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored Unless otherwise indicated or directed the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against form
346. ons 2 1 2 Nameplates Major equipment including compressors condensers receivers heat exchanges fans and motors shall have the manufacturer s name address type or style model or serial number and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts 2 1 3 Safety Devices Exposed moving parts parts that produce high operating temperature parts which may be electrically energized and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated fully enclosed guarded or fitted with other types of safety devices Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49 1 2 2 UNITARY EQUIPMENT SPLIT SYSTEM Unit shall be an air cooled split system which employs a remote condensing unit a separate indoor unit and interconnecting refrigerant piping Unit shall be the heat pump type conforming P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 264 of 367 to applicable Underwriters Laboratories UL standards including UL 1995 Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI 210 240 Unit shall be provided with necessary fans air filters coil frost protection internal dampers mixing boxes supplemental heat and cabinet construction as specified in paragraph
347. ontracting Officer s Technical Representative to use thinners The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use When thinning is allowed paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding full film thickness or required gloss Thinning shall not cause the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed 3 5 3 Coating Systems a Systems by Substrates Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications listed in the following Tables Table Division 4 Exterior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table Division 5 Exterior Metal Ferrous and Non Ferrous Paint Table Division 4 Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table Division 5 Interior Metal Ferrous and Non Ferrous Paint Table Division 9 Interior Gypsum Board Paint Table b Minimum Dry Film Thickness DFT Apply paints primers varnishes enamels undercoats and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables Coating thickness where specified refers to the minimum dry film thickness c Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise Coat surfaces which have not been specified the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure 3 6 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL P N 05 C0512
348. or defective items 1 4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Unless otherwise required herein plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109 58 and ASHRAE 90 1 IP 1 5 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work verify dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative of any discrepancy before performing any work 1 6 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL When specified in other sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance including pertinent safety requirements of the specified equipment or system Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or
349. or temperature of 3500 K and an average rated life of 20 000 hours Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure TCLP for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1 2 2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HID LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598 Provide HID fixtures with tempered glass lenses when using metal halide lamps 2 2 1 HID Ballasts P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 294 of 367 UL 1029 and NEMA C82 4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer CWA or regulator high power factor type minimum 90 Provide single lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C Ballasts shall be a Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected b Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40 degrees C c Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life 2 2 2 Metal Halide Lamps a Single ended wattage as indicated conforming to NEMA C78 43 2 2 2 1 Luminaire Efficiency Rating LER a Upward efficiency of 0 1 150 399 watts minimum 41 LER for closed fixture b Upward efficiency of 1 10 1 150 399 watts minimum 56 LER for closed fixture c Upward efficiency greater than 20 1 150 399 watts minimum 62 LER for closed fixture minimum 77 for open fixture 2 3 RECESS AND FLUSH MOUNTED FIXTURES Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom Access to ballast shall be fr
350. orinated polyvinyl chloride chloride CPVC plastic pipe fittings Schedule 80 ASTM F 437 for use with Items 20 and 21 13 Socket type chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC plastic pipe fittings Schedule 40 ASTM F 438 for use with Items 20 21 and 22 14 Socket type chlorinated polyvinyl chloride CPVC plastic pipe fittings Schedule 80 ASTM F 439 for use with Items 20 21 and 22 15 Polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pipe Schedules 40 80 and 120 ASTM D 1785 16 Polyvinyl chloride PVC pressure rated pipe SDR Series ASTM D 2241 17 Polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pipe fittings Schedule 40 ASTM D 2466 18 Socket type polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pipe fittings schedule 80 P N 05 C05 124 Section 22 00 00 Page 223 of 367 ASTM D 2467 for use with Items 26 and 27 19 Threaded polyvinyl chloride PVC X plastic pipe fittings schedule 80 ASTM D 2464 20 Joints for IPS pvs pipe using solvent X cement ASTM D 2672 21 Steel pipeline flanges MSS SP 44 X 22 Fittings brass or bronze X X ASME B16 15 and ASME B16 18 ASTM B 828 23 Carbon steel pipe unions X X socket welding and threaded MSS SP 83 24 Malleable iron threaded pipe X X unions ASME B16 39 25 Nipples pipe threaded ASTM A 733 X X 26 Crosslinked Polyethylene PEX X X Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877 27 Press Fittings X X A Cold Water Service Aboveground B Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C Compressed Air L
351. orms submerged in water must be watertight 3 3 1 General Construct forms to conform within the tolerances specified to shapes dimensions lines elevations and positions of cast in place concrete members as indicated Forms must be supported braced and maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load 3 3 2 Design and Construction of Formwork P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 71 of 367 Provide forms that are tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placing Support form facing materials by structural members spaced close to prevent deflection of form facing material Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment to ensure a smooth completed surface within the tolerances specified Where necessary to maintain the tolerances specified such as long spans where immediate supports are not possible camber formwork for anticipated deflections in formwork due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and to construction loads Chamfer exposed joints edges and external corners a minimum of 3 4 inch by moldings placed in corners of column beam and wall forms Provide forms that are readily removable without impact shock or damage to concrete 3 3 3 Coating Before concrete placement coat the contact surfaces of forms with a nonstaining mineral oil nonstaining form coating compound or two coats of nitrocellulose lacquer Do not use mineral oil on forms for surface
352. ory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 1 5 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section 1 5 2 1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of d
353. osal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal including downed timber snags brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared Trees stumps roots brush and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off 18 inches below the original ground surface except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing Trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead branches 1 1 2 inches or more in diameter and shall be trimmed of all branches the heights of 5 above grade or directed Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches Cuts more than 1 1 2 inches in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree wound paint 3 3 TREE REMOVAL Where indicated or directed trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing This work shall include the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 3 4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 3 4 1 Nonsaleable Materials Logs stumps roots brush rotten wood and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations except for salable timber shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government controlled land at the Contractor s responsibility except when otherwise dir
354. osed to view Angle stops straight stops stops integral with the faucets or concealed type of lock shield and loose key pattern stops for supplies with threaded sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall unless otherwise specified under the item P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 218 of 367 Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown 3 3 1 Fixture Connections Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast iron floor flange special short radius fittings shall be provided Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first class joint with the closet setting compound or gasket and fixture used 3 3
355. oss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete The materials and methods of curing are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 10 6 Curing Methods Accomplish curing by moist curing by moisture retaining cover curing by membrane curing and by combinations thereof as specified Moist curing Accomplish moisture curing by any of the following methods Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover for curing concrete saturated with water and keeping absorptive cover wet by water spraying or intermittent hosing Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges with a slight overlap over adjacent absorptive covers Moisture cover curing Accomplish moisture retaining cover curing by covering concrete surfaces with specified moisture retaining cover for curing concrete Place cover directly on concrete in widest practical width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches Weight cover to prevent displacement immediately repair tears or holes appearing during curing period by patching with pressure sensitive waterproof tape or other approved method Membrane curing P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 85 of 367 Accomplish membrane curing by applying specified membrane forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as moisture film has disappeared Apply curing compound uni
356. ound the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy frozen or contain frost Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers pneumatic tired rollers steel wheeled rollers or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 323 of 367 3 5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING Fill and backfill to contours elevations and dimensions indicated Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift 3 5 1 Common Fill Placement Provide for general site and under porous fill of pile supported structures Use satisfactory materials Place in 6 inch lifts Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture content Finish to a smooth surface by blading rolling with a smooth roller or both 3 5 2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs except where select material is provided Place in 6 inch lifts Do not place over wet or frozen areas Place backfill material adjacent to structures as th
357. ovide coil with a uniformly applied phenolic type coating to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins Coating shall be applied at either the coil or coating manufacturer s factory Coating process shall encure complete coil encapsulation Coating shall be capable of withstanding a minimum 1 000 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution 2 5 1 2 Equipment and Components Unless otherwise specified equipment and component items when fabricated from ferrous metal shall be factory finished with the manufacturer s standard finish except that items located outside of buildings shall have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution Immediately after completion of the test the specimen shall show no signs of blistering wrinkling cracking or loss of adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1 8 inch on either side of the scratch mark Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot dip galvanized sheet steel is used shall be coated with a zinc rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520 Type I 2 5 2 Factory Applied Insulation P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 268 of 367 Refrigeration equipment shall be provided with factory installed insulation on surfaces subject to sweating including the suction line piping Where motors are the gas cooled type factory ins
358. p Lift Station Test pumps and controls in operation under design conditions to insure proper operation of all equipment Provide all appliances materials water and equipment for testing and bear all expenses in connection with the testing Conduct testing after all equipment is properly installed electrical services and piping are installed liquid is flowing and the pump station is ready for operation Correct all defects discovered to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and all tests repeated at the expense of the Contractor until the equipment is in proper working order End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 367 of 367
359. paragraph entitled Performance Requirements of this section Overhead Coiling Doors Hardware Counterbalancing Mechanism Electric Door Operators SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies 1 4 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which show elevations of each door type shape and thickness of materials finishes details of joints and connections and details of guides and fittings rough opening dimensions location and description of hardware anchorage locations and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator details Show locations of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for power signal and controls Include a schedule showing the location of each door with the drawings Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with manufacturer s standard brochures schematics printed instructions general operating procedures and safety precautions Provide test data that is legible and of good quality 1 5 WARRANTY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies inc
360. pe Catalog trol Item tity Size No Finish No Symbols P N 05 C05124 Section 08 71 00 Page 136 of 367 UL Mark If fire rated and BHMA Finish Designa tion 1 3 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative prior to completion of the work Include a Complete listing of all keys AA1 AA2 etc b Complete listing of all key cuts AA1 123456 AA2 123458 c Tabulation showing which key fits which door d Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers e Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in each master system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors as well as to other requirements indicated even if such hardware is not specifically mentioned under paragraph entitled Hardware Schedule Provide the label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or labeled and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 2 2 HARDWARE ITEMS Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer s name or trademark hinges pivots locks latches exit devices bolts and closers where the identifying mark will be visible after the item is installed For closers with covers the name or trademark may be beneath the cover 2 2 1 Hinges B
361. pe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material The Contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturer s instructions available at the construction site at all times and shall follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Solvents solvent compounds lubricants elastomeric gaskets and any similar materials required to install the plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendation and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions Drawings of existing conditions as specified P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 350 of 367 SD 02 Shop Drawings Drawings Installation and As Built drawings as specified SD 03 Product Data Pipeline materials Submit manufacturer s standard drawings or catalog cuts SD 06 Test Reports Reports Test and inspection reports as specified 1 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 4 1 Delivery and Storage 1 4 1 1 Piping Inspect materials delivered to site for damage store with minimum of handling Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber ga
362. pections and tests conducted and their results dimensional checks equipment and material checks data on workers by classification the mobilization and demobilization of construction equipment materials delivered to the site and any other pertinent noteworthy event e g personnel injury site visit by Coast Guard personnel etc 2 RESPONSIBILITY The Daily Reports play an important role in settling disputes and claims for both parties For this reason the On Site Representative and the Contractor s Superintendent together should review the report to ensure its completeness and accuracy Each day s report shall be submitted to the On Site Representative no later than 10 00 a m the following morning The maximum allowable retainage will be enforced for late sporadic or non submission of Daily Reports In the absence of an On Site Representative the Contractor shall mail the Daily Reports directly to the Contracting Officer every Friday Should the Daily Report indicate an accident environmental issue OSHA violation or any crisis the On Site Representative deems important the Report should be faxed to the Contracting Officer at 216 902 6278 immediately 3 DESIGNATED ON SITE REPRESENTATIVE RESPONSIBILITY After a Notice to Proceed for site work has been issued the On Site Representative shall complete a Daily Report for each day until the Contractor mobilizes After the Contractor is at the site the On Site Representative shall ensure
363. pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings or solvent cemented saddles as approved Saddles for PVC composite pipe shall conform to Figure 2 of ASTM D 2680 and saddles for PVC pipe shall conform to Table 4 of ASTM D 3034 P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 355 of 367 3 1 1 4 Connections to Existing Lines Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative before making connection to existing line Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of service on existing line 3 1 2 Special Requirements 3 1 2 1 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying and joining pipe and fittings Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for assembly of joints Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer 3 1 2 2 Installation of PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings Unless otherwise specified install pipe and fittings in accordance with
364. pposite sides of box and support raceway with approved type fastener maximum 24 inches from box When penetrating reinforced concrete members avoid cutting reinforcing steel 3 1 4 1 Pull Boxes Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 galvanized sheet steel except where cast metal boxes are required in locations specified herein Provide boxes with screw fastened covers Where several feeders pass through common pull box tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics circuit number and panel designation 3 1 4 2 Extension Rings Extension rings are not permitted for new construction Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish 3 1 5 Mounting Heights Mount panelboards and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor 3 1 6 Conductor Identification Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap splice or termination is made For conductors No 6 AWG and smaller diameter color coding shall be by factory applied color impregnated insulation For conductors No 4 AWG and larger diameter color coding shall be by plastic coated self sticking markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shrink type sleeves 3 1 7 Splices Make splices in accessible locations
365. prevent mastic from entering fitting bore leaving only a thin annular mastic line exposed internally Sheet metal screws shall be used to make assembly rigid not less than four screws per joint maximum spacing 6 inches Pop rivets shall not be used All joints shall be taped and heat sealed Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex shaped 5 16 inch diameter for ducts up to 50 inch diameter and 3 8 inch diameter for 51 inch diameter ducts and larger Flanges shall be continuously welded to duct on outside of duct and intermittently welded with 1 inch welds every 4 inches on inside joint face Excess filler metal shall be removed from inside face Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be protected with manufacturer s standard corrosion resistant coating 3 3 2 2 Duct Transitions Where the shape of a duct changes the angle of the side of the transition piece shall not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto 3 3 3 Duct Supports Install duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 Duct hangers shall meet the minimum size specified in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK Chapter 16 ASHRAE FUN IP Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 Provide two hangers where necessary to eliminate sway Support attachment to duct surfaces shall be by solid rivet 4 inches on center Hanger rods angles and straps shall be attached to beam clamps Concrete inserts masonry anchors
366. prior to construction the Contractor shall contact LT Jeremy Courtade Facilities Engineering 609 8 13 3892 or LCDR Sean Obrien Facilities Engineering 609 8 13 3891 to verify the condition of the staging area between the hours of 0800 and 1500 Monday thru Friday 3 ADJACENT AREAS The Contractor shall ensure that all land and vegetation adjacent to the staging area and access drive remain undisturbed and undamaged all damages shall be repaired at no cost to the Government End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 62 00 Page 42 of 367 SECTION 01 65 00 RECOVERED MATERIALS NOTICE l GENERAL Itis the intent of CEU Cleveland to comply with the requirements of Section 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA or the Act as amended 42 U S C 6962 and Executive Order 12873 as they apply to the procurement of the materials designated in paragraph 2 2 DESIGNATED RECOVERED MATERIALS It is the purpose of this section to designate items that are or can be made with recovered materials These designated items can be found at http www epa gov epaoswer non hw procure products htm 3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSBILITY The contractor should provide recycled materials to the extent practical provided the materials meet all other requirements of the applicable specification section End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 65 00 Page 43 of 367 SECTION 01 72 00 AS
367. rams of the system Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks which are securely mounted The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited 2 2 8 2 Alarm Wiring Signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be copper No 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum Notification appliance circuit conductors that contain audible alarm devices shall be solid copper No 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum Speaker circuits shall be copper No 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage Power wiring operating at 120 VAC minimum shall be No 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits Run conduit concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer For shielded wiring the shield shall be grounded at only one point which shall be in or adjacent to the FACP T taps are not Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained
368. razing Material Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5 8 A5 8M BCuP 5 e Brazing Flux Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material Flux shall be as follows lead free have a 100 percent flushable residue contain slightly acidic reagents contain potassium borides and contain fluorides f Solder Material Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32 g Solder Flux Flux shall be liquid form non corrosive and conform to ASTM B 813 Standard Test 1 h PTFE Tape PTFE Tape for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe i Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings hub and spigot type and hubless type ASTM C 564 j Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe ASTM D 2564 and ASTM D 2855 k Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe ASTM F 493 l Flanged fittings including flanges bolts nuts bolt patterns etc shall be in accordance with ASME B16 5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer s trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP 25 Flange material shall conform to ASTM A 105 A 105M Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A 516 A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515 A 515M for hot service Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A 193 A 193M P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 203 of 367 m Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16 18 or A
369. re 4 Ambient condensing and coolant temperatures 5 Running current voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors The actual on site setting of operating and safety controls Thermostatic expansion valve superheat value as determined by field test Subcooling High and low refrigerant temperature switch set points Low oil pressure switch set point Defrost system timer and thermostat set points Moisture content Capacity control set points Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy consumption Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently marked as an integral part of a device End of Section P N 05 C05 124 Section 23 82 02 Page 271 of 367 SECTION 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to certain sections of Divisions 22 and 23 PLUMBING and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33 ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections 1 2 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100 b The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products installation procedures
370. reinforcing bars and wire fabric in place Provide wire bar type supports conforming to ACI MCP 3 and CRSI 10MSP Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot dip galvanized or plastic coated after fabrication or stainless steel bar supports 2 6 CLASSIFICATION AND QUALITY OF CONCRETE 2 6 1 Concrete Classes and Usage Provide concrete classes compressive strength requirements for air entrainment and usage as follows MIN 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH REQUIREMENT CONCRETE POUNDS PER FOR AIR CLASS SQ IN ENTRAINMENT USAGE 3A 3 500 Air For foundation concrete entrained work exposed to freez P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 67 of 367 ing and thawing or subjected to hy draulic pressure such as foundation walls grade beams pits tunnels For exterior concrete slabs such as steps platforms walks 2 6 2 Limits for Concrete Proportions Provide limits for maximum water cement ratio and minimum cement content for each concrete class as follows MIN CEMENT FOR 3 TO CONCRETE MAX WATER CEMENT RATIO 4 INCH SLUMP NO OF 94 CLASS BY WEIGHT POUND SACKS PER CU YD 3A 0 48 5 25 Weight of water to weight of cement in pounds in one cubic yard of concrete 2 6 3 Maximum Size of Aggregate Size of aggregate designated by the sieve size on which maximum amount of retained coarse aggregate is 5 to 10 percent by weight must be as follows MAXIMUM ASTM C 33 C 33M SIZE OF SIZE AGGREGATE NUMBER TYP
371. ried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or compression connector a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer s written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire 3 1 10 Equipment Connections Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified automatic control wiring control devices and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment 3 2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 3 3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 289 of 367 Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or t
372. rier including straight runs fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following a Pipe used solely for fire protection b Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures However fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain including the trap insulated where exposed c Sanitary drain lines P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 238 of 367 d ASME stamps 3 2 1 2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less Grade 1 Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe On pipes larger than 12 inches the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1 3 of the pipe Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 239 of 367 3 2 1 3 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness TABLE 1 Insulation Material For Pip
373. rinted instructions for admixtures and waterstops Cement P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 57 of 367 Portland cement Ready Mix Concrete Vapor Barrier Concrete Curing Materials Reinforcement Reinforcement Materials SD 04 Samples Submit the following samples SD 05 Design Data Concrete mix design G Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement submit a mix design for each strength and type of concrete Submit a complete list of materials including type brand source and amount of cement fly ash pozzolans ground slag and admixtures and applicable reference specifications Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water cement ratios for each type of mixture which produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required If source material changes resubmit mix proportion data using revised source material Provide only materials that have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of this specification unless otherwise approved in writing by the Contracting Officer Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix design is used when more than one mix design is submitted Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate changes Submit copies of the fly ash and pozzolans test results in addition The approval of fly ash and pozzolans test results must be within 6 months of submittal date Obtain acknowledgement of re
374. rmation System ASSIST Department of Defense Single Stock Point DODSSP Document Automation and Production Service DAPS Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 Ph 215 697 6396 for account password issues Internet http assist daps dla mil online start account registration required Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria UFC from Whole Building Design Guide WBDG National Institute of Building Sciences NIBS 1090 Vermont Avenue NW Suite 700 Washington CD 20005 Ph 202 289 7800 Fax 202 289 1092 Internet http www wbdg org references docs_refs php U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EPA Ariel Rios Building 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue N W Washington DC 20460 Ph 202 272 0167 Internet http www epa gov Some EPA documents are available only from National Technical Information Service NTIS 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Ph 703 605 6585 P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 31 of 367 Fax 703 605 6900 E mail info ntis gov Internet http www ntis gov U S GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL USGBC 1015 18th Street NW Suite 508 Washington D C 20036 Ph 202 828 7422 Fax 202 828 5110 E mail info usbc org Internet http www usgbc org AOK 2 04 LOK 2 04 U S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION GSA General Services Administration 1800 F Street NW Washington DC 20405 Ph 202 501 1021 Internet www GSA gov Obtain documents from Acquisi
375. rmiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane 1 4 2 2 Utilities and Vents Prior to application HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide 1 4 3 Placement of Concrete Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration into the soil Time for maximum penetration shall be as recommended by the manufacturer 1 5 WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide a standard 5 year written warranty against infestations or re infestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this contract Warranty shall include annual inspections of the buildings or building additions If live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty period and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim the Contractor shall P N 05 C05124 Section 31 31 16 Page 330 of 367 a Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation b Repair damage caused by termite infestation and c Re inspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 TERMITICIDES Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such use by the appropriate agency of the host county Select non repellant
376. rmiticides and their containers in accordance with label directions Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a contractor s representative to prevent overflow Secure pesticides and related materials under lock and key when unattended Ensure that proper protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application Dispose of used pesticide containers off Government property 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 3 1 Delivery Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and manufacturer s registered uses All other materials to be used on site for the purpose of termite control shall be delivered in new or otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator 1 3 2 Inspection Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES Each label shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act FIFRA as amended or under appropriate regulations of the host county Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with specified requirements Remove un
377. roduct must be biobased material Provide product that does not bond with stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel petroleum based lubricating oils waxes or kerosene 2 5 REINFORCEMENT Galvanize bars fabrics connectors and chairs 2 5 1 Reinforcing Bars ACI MCP 2 unless otherwise specified Use deformed steel ASTM A 615 A 615M and AASHTO M 322M M 322 with the bars marked A S W Grade 60 or ASTM A 996 A 996M with the bars marked R Grade 60 or marked A Grade 60 2 5 2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors ACI MCP 2 Provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 66 of 367 2 5 3 Wire ASTM A 82 A 82M or ASTM A 496 A 496M 2 5 3 1 Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A 185 A 185M or ASTM A 497 A 497M Wire fabric may contain post consumer or post industrial recycled content Provide flat sheets of welded wire fabric for slabs and toppings 2 5 3 2 Steel Wire Wire must conform to ASTM A 82 A 82M 2 5 4 Reinforcing Bar Supports Provide bar ties and supports of coated or non corrodible material 2 5 5 Chairs and Bolsters Steel Plastic and steel may contain post consumer or post industrial recycled content 2 5 6 Supports for Reinforcement Supports include bolsters chairs spacers and other devices necessary for proper spacing supporting and fastening
378. round Cold Pipeline 30 to 60 deg F Insulation for outdoor indoor exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows a Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Type I and Type III Supply the insulation with manufacturer s recommended factory applied jacket vapor barrier b Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation ASTM C 534 C 534M Grade 1 Type I or IL Type I shall have vapor retarder vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation Insulation with pre applied adhesive shall not be used P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 236 of 367 2 3 2 Below ground Pipeline Insulation For below ground pipeline insulation the following requirements shall be met 2 3 2 1 Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 type IL 2 4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS 2 4 1 Duct Insulation Provide factory applied insulation with insulation manufacturer s standard reinforced fire retardant vapor barrier with identification of installed thermal resistance R value and out of package R value 2 4 1 1 Rigid Insulation Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612 Class 2 maximum surface temperature 400 degrees F 3 pcf average 1 1 2 inch thick Type IA IB II MI and IV 2 4 1 2 Blanket Insulation Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553 Type 1 Class B 3 3 4 pef nominal 2 0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F Also ASTM C 1290 Type II may be used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 APPLICATION GENERAL Insulation shall only be
379. rovide stirrup style panel to pilaster brackets 2 1 3 Hardware and Fittings 2 1 3 1 General Requirements Hardware for the toilet partition system must conform to CID A A 60003 for the specified type and style of partitions Provide hardware finish highly resistant to alkalies urine and other common toilet room acids Devices and hinges must be chrome plated steel or stainless steel a Conform cold rolled sheet steel to ASTM A 336 A 336M commercial quality b Zinc base alloy must conform to ASTM B 86 Alloy AC41 A c Brass must conform to ASTM B 36 B 36M Alloy C26800 d Corrosion resistant steel must conform to ASTM A 167 Type 302 or 304 2 1 3 2 Finishes a Chrome plating must conform to ASTM B 456 b Finish must conform to SAE AMS QQ C 320 Class I Type I or II c Corrosion resistant steel must have a No 4 finish d Exposed fasteners must match the hardware and fittings 2 1 4 Door Hardware 2 1 4 1 Hinges Hinges must be self lubricating with the indicated swing Hinges must be the surface mounted type 2 1 4 2 Latch and Pull Latch and pull must be a combination rubber faced door strike and keeper equipped with emergency access 2 1 4 3 Coat Hooks Coat hooks must be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 21 13 Page 164 of 367 2 2 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS Partition panels and doors must be not less than 1 inch thick 2 2 1 Toilet Enclosures Conform toilet enclosures to C
380. ructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance including pertinent safety requirements of the specified equipment or system Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications 1 6 ACCESSIBILITY Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection operation maintenance and repair are readily accessible Install concealed valves expansion joints controls dampers and equipment requiring access in locations freely accessible through access doors PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used P N 05 C05124 Section 23 03 00 Page 227 of 367 End of Section P N 05 C0512
381. s 2s COMPLIANCE The Contractor is specifically required to comply with the requirements of the U S Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual EM 385 1 1 latest version available and the Accident Prevention clause FAR 52 236 13 Once accepted this safety plan shall become part of the contract requirements Note This review acceptance does not in any way relinquish the Contractor from responsibility for work site safety nor the obligation to comply with the OSHA regulations found in 29 CFR 1910 amp 1926 or any other State or Local safety law rule or regulation applicable to the contract work The Coast Guard will cooperate fully with the Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration in their enforcement of OSHA regulations 3 SAFETY PLAN The Contractor shall submit a written safety plan At a minimum this plan shall describe the Contractor s general safety program and identify specific safety provisions for hazards incidental to the contract work e g elevated working surfaces working over water working from floating work platforms overhead crane operations etc End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 54 00 Page 35 of 367 SECTION 01 54 10 EQUIPMENT UTILITY LOCKOUT AND TAG OUT REQUIREMENTS 1 GENERAL The Contractor shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910 147 The Control of Hazardous Energy Lockout Tag out The Contractor shall provide a Lockout Tagout Plan to
382. s Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge Place concrete in one continuous operation from one end of the structure towards the other Position grade stakes on 10 foot centers maximum in each direction when pouring interior slabs and on 20 foot centers maximum for exterior slabs 3 7 1 General Placing Requirements Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete is placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section If a section cannot be placed continuously provide construction joints as specified Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing Do not subject concrete to procedures which cause segregation Concrete to receive other construction must be screeded to proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting Do not use concrete which becomes nonplastic and unworkable or does not meet quality control limits as specified or has been contaminated by foreign materials Use of retempered concrete is permitted Remove rejected concrete from the site 3 7 2 Footing Placement Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Excavatio
383. s The area of bearing will be as shown Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair Steel rods and clamps protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks 3 1 1 7 Commercial Type Water Hammer Arresters Commercial type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot and cold water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201 Water hammer arresters where concealed shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels Commercial type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010 Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted 3 1 2 Joints Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended 3 1 2 1 Threaded Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1 20 1 Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound or with an inert filler and oil or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied 3 1 2 2 Unions and Flanges Unions flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in
384. s scratches cuts dents ridges holes warp and buckle Molded members shall be clean cut straight and true with joints coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth Design door frame sections for use with the wall construction indicated Corner joints shall be well formed and in true alignment Conceal fastenings where practicable Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive caulking compound PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION 3 1 1 Frames Set frames in accordance with SDI DOOR A250 11 Plumb align and brace securely until permanent anchors are set Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or powder actuated fasteners Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction Coat inside of frames with corrosion inhibiting bituminous material 3 1 2 Doors Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI DOOR A250 8 After erection and glazing clean and adjust hardware 3 2 PROTECTION Protect doors and frames from damage Repair damaged doors and frames prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new as directed Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed Clean thoroughly Apply an all over coat of rust inhibitive paint of the same type used for shop coat 3 3 CLEANING Upon completion clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly Remov
385. s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 1 2 4 Modification of References In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer 1 2 4 1 Definitions For the International Code Council ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory the word should shall be interpreted as shall Reference to the code official shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer s Technical P N 05 C05124 Section 23 03 00 Page 225 of 367 Representative For Coast Guard owned property references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer For leased facilities references to the owner shall be interpreted to mean the lessor References to the permit holder shall be interpreted to mean the Contractor 1 2 4 2 Administrative Interpretations For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents the provisions of Chapter 1 Administrator do not apply These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR included in this contract and by the authori
386. s of anchoring framing at openings type and spacing of bridging requirements for field welding and details of accessories as applicable 1 4 2 Certification of Compliance Prior to construction commencement submit Material Safety Data Sheet per 29 CFR 1910 1200 for steel joists and certification for welder qualification compliance with AWS B2 1 B2 1M welding operation and tacker stating the type of welding and positions qualified for the code and procedure qualified under date qualified and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests Submit certification of compliance for the following SJI TD 8 SJI TD 9 SJI TD 10 29 CFR 1926 29 CFR 1926 757 PART2 PRODUCTS 2 1 JOISTS AND ACCESSORIES Provide design data from SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated 2 2 PAINTING 2 2 1 Shop Painting Clean and prime joists in accordance with SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC PS 14 01 Steel Joist Shop Painting System using only Type I Red Oxide Paint Finish coat of paint is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION 3 1 1 Handling and Erection Conform to SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated 3 1 2 Welding All welding must conform to AWS B2 1 B2 1M and AWS D1 1 D1 1M P N 05 C05124 Section 05 21 19 Page 92 of 367 3 2 BEARING PLATES Provide bearing plates to accept full bearing after the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned but prior to placing superimpose
387. s or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90 1 IP Insulation exterior shall be cleanable grease resistant non flaking and non peeling Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion soften or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements Materials shall be asbestos free and conform to the following 2 2 1 Adhesives 2 2 1 1 Adhesives Adhesive shall be a nonflammable fire resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C 916 Type I 2 2 2 Caulking ASTM C 920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use A 2 2 3 Corner Angles Nominal 0 016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing Aluminum shall be ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003 3105 or 5005 2 2 4 Finishing Cement ASTM C 449 Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C 795 2 2 5 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape Fibrous glass cloth with 20X20 maximum mesh size and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls Class 3 tape shall be 4 5 ounces square yard 2 2 6 Staples Outward clinching type monel 2 2 7 Jackets 2 2 7 1 Aluminum Jackets P N 05 C05124 Section 23 07 00 Page 234 of 367 Aluminum jackets shall be corrug
388. s or other voids laps brush marks and variations in color texture and finish Hiding shall be complete Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material a Drying Time Allow time between coats as recommended by the coating manufacturer to permit thorough drying but not to present topcoat adhesion problems Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat b Primers and Intermediate Coats Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days or longer than recommended by manufacturer before applying P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 157 of 367 subsequent coats Follow manufacturer s recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats c Finished Surfaces Provide finished surfaces free from runs drops ridges waves laps brush marks and variations in colors 3 5 2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint except when thinning is mandatory to suit surface temperature weather conditions application methods or for the type of paint being used Obtain written permission from the C
389. s to the floor with the anchorage device specified Make all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling plumbing and tightening the installation Tops of doors must be level with tops of pilasters when doors are in a closed position Expansion shields must have a minimum 2 inch penetration into the concrete slab P N 05 C05 124 Section 10 21 13 Page 166 of 367 3 4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT After completion of the installation make final adjustments to the pilaster leveling devices door hardware and other working parts of the partition assembly Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of approximately 3 16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees when unlatched 3 5 CLEANING Clean all surfaces of the work and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the work in an approved manner compliant with the manufacturers recommended cleaning and protection from damage procedures until accepted Remove all equipment tools surplus materials and work debris from the site End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 10 21 13 Page 167 of 367 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Finishes G Accessory Items G Manufacturer s descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating materials of construction fasteners proposed for use for each type of wall construction mounting instructions operation i
390. s to which adhesive paint or other finish material is to be applied 3 3 4 Reshoring Reshore concrete elements where forms are removed prior to the specified time period Do not permit elements to deflect or accept loads during form stripping or reshoring Forms on columns walls or other load bearing members may be stripped after 2 days if loads are not applied to the members After forms are removed reshore slabs and beams over 10 feet in span and cantilevers over 4 feet for the remainder of the specified time period in accordance with paragraph entitled Removal of Forms Perform reshoring operations to prevent subjecting concrete members to overloads eccentric loading or reverse bending Provide reshoring elements with the same load carrying capabilities as original shoring and spaced similar to original shoring Firmly secure and brace reshoring elements to provide solid bearing and support 3 3 5 Reuse Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the aesthetics of exposed concrete are not compromised 3 3 6 Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish Give rough form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed by other construction unless otherwise specified Form facing material for standard rough form finish must be the specified concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that produces concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced by new concrete form plywoo
391. same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test 3 3 CLEANUP Upon completion of the installation of water lines and appurtenances all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 349 of 367 SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline Provide laterals 6 inch lines of ductile iron pipe or polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pipe at the Contractor s option Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping and appurtenances Provide each system complete and ready for operation The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment materials installation and workmanship as specified herein more than 5 feet outside of building walls 1 1 2 Sanitary Sewer Pressure Lines Provide pressure lines of polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic pressure pipe 1 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The construction required herein shall include appurtenant structures and building sewers to points of connection with the building drains 5 feet outside the building to which the sewer system is to be connected The Contractor shall replace damaged material and redo unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Government Backfilling shall be accomplished after inspection by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Before during and after installation plastic pi
392. scribed and approved in accordance with FAR 52 243 4 CHANGES P N 05 C05124 Page 50 of 367 SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Do not begin demolition or until Notice to Proceed authorization is received from the Contracting Officer Remove rubbish and debris from the project site do not allow accumulations inside or outside the buildings In the interest of occupational safety and health perform the work in accordance with EM 385 1 1 Section 23 Demolition and other applicable Sections 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions G SD 07 Certificates Demolition Plan G Notifications G Proposed demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started 1 3 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Comply with federal state and local hauling and disposal regulations In addition to the requirements of the Contract Clauses conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE SAFE A10 6 1 3 1 Notifications 1 3 1 1 General Requirements Furnish timely notification of demolition projects to Federal State regional and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M Notify the State s environmental protection agency and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M P N 05 C05124 Secti
393. se apply compound immediately after the surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance and before joints are sawed Mechanically agitate curing compound thoroughly during use Use approved power spraying equipment to uniformly apply two coats of compound in a continuous operation The total coverage for the two coats must be 200 square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer s written instructions The compound must form a uniform continuous coherent film that does not check crack or peel Immediately apply an additional P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 84 of 367 coat of compound to areas where the film is defective Re spray concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound application 3 10 3 2 Protection of Treated Surfaces Prohibit pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion at least 72 hours after compound application Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and immediately repair any damage 3 10 4 Requirements for Type HI High Early Strength Portland Cement The curing periods are required to be not less than one fourth of those specified for portland cement but in no case less than 72 hours 3 10 5 Curing Periods ACI MCP 2 Begin curing immediately after placement Protect concrete from premature drying excessively hot temperatures and mechanical injury and maintain minimal moisture l
394. sewer lines pass below water lines lay pipe so that no joint in the sewer line will be closer than 3 feet horizontal distance to the water line a Sanitary piping installation parallel with water line 1 Normal conditions Sanitary piping or manholes shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from a water line whenever possible The distance shall be measured edge to edge 2 Unusual conditions When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet the sanitary piping or manhole may be laid closer to a water line provided that a The top crown of the sanitary piping shall be at least 18 inches below the bottom invert of the water main b Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained the sanitary piping shall be constructed of AWWA approved ductile iron water pipe pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling c The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place b Installation of sanitary piping crossing a water line P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 354 of 367 1 Normal conditions Lay sanitary sewer piping by crossing under water lines to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the top of the sanitary piping and the bottom of the water line whenever possible 2 Unusual conditions When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above use the following construction a Sanitary piping passing over or under water lines shall b
395. sions for Metal Panels Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements or allow for field trimming metal panels Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions locations of structural members and openings correspond to established dimensions 1 7 2 3 Verification Record Verify locations of all framing and opening dimensions by field measurements before metal panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings 1 8 COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section Cast in Place Concrete Coordinate installation of mechanical plumbing and electrical work indicated on the drawings Coordinate installation of pipe bollards railings and other work indicated on the drawings Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work flashing trim and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leak proof secure and non corrosive installation 1 9 WARRANTY 1 9 1 Building System Warranty P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 183 of 367 Furnish manufacturer s standard no dollar limit warranty for the metal building system The watranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date
396. skets under cover out of direct sunlight Do not store materials directly on the ground Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris 1 4 1 2 Metal Items Check upon arrival identify and segregate as to types functions and sizes Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials 1 4 1 3 Cement Aggregate and Reinforcement As specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 1 4 2 Handling Handle pipe fittings and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition Carry do not drag pipe to trench P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 351 of 367 1 5 DRAWINGS a Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail both plan and side view details with proper layout and elevations b Submit As Built Drawings for the complete sanitary sewer system showing complete detail with all dimensions both above and below grade including invert elevation 1 6 EXISTING CONDITIONS Submit drawings of existing conditions after a thorough inspection of the area by the Contractor in the presence of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Details shall include the environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas Submit copies of the records for verification before starting work 1 7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS Install specified materials by a licensed underground util
397. spection by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment 3 9 PAINT TABLES All DFT s are minimum values 3 9 1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES DIVISION 4 EXTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE A New concrete masonry on uncoated surface 1 Latex New MPI EXT 4 2A G5 Semigloss Existing MPI REX 4 2A G5 Semigloss P N 05 C05124 Section 09 90 00 Page 159 of 367 Block Filler Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 4 N A MPI 11 MPI 11 System DFT 11 mils DIVISION 5 EXTERIOR METAL FERROUS AND NON FERROUS PAINT TABLE STEEL FERROUS SURFACES A New Steel 1 Alkyd New MPI EXT 5 1Q G6 Gloss Existing MPI REX 5 1D G6 Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 23 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 5 25 mils EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES B New Galvanized surfaces 1 Cementitious primer Latex MPI EXT 5 3A G5 Semigloss Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 26 MPI 11 MPI 11 System DFT 4 5 mils EXTERIOR SURFACES OTHER METALS NON FERROUS I Aluminum aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non ferrous metal items not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces roof surfaces and new prefinished equipment Match surrounding finish 1 Alkyd MPI EXT 5 4F G6 Gloss Primer Intermediate Topcoat MPI 95 MPI 9 MPI 9 System DFT 5 mils 3 9 2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES DIVISION 4 INTERIOR CONCRETE MAS
398. sposable diapers and wooden articles into a finely ground slurry with particle dimensions no greater than 1 4 inch Pump capacity and motor characteristics as indicated Design pump to operate in a submerged or partially submerged condition Provide an integral sliding guide bracket and two guide bars capable of supporting the entire weight of the pumping unit P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 362 of 367 2 3 1 Casing Provide hard close grained cast iron casing which is free from blow holes porosity hard spots shrinkage defects cracks and other injurious defects Design casings to permit replacement of wearing parts Design passageways to permit smooth flow of sewage and to be free of sharp turns and projections 2 3 2 Impeller Provide non clogging type cast iron impeller Make impeller with smooth surfaces free flowing with the necessary clearance to permit objects in the sewage to pass Fit and key spline or thread impeller on shaft and lock in such manner that lateral movement will be prevented and reverse rotation will not cause loosening 2 3 3 Shaft and Shaft Seals Provide shaft of stainless steel Provide mechanical seal of double carbon and ceramic construction with mating surfaces lapped to a flatness tolerance of one light band Hold rotating ceramics in mating position with stationary carbons by a stainless steel spring Oil lubricate bearings 2 3 4 Bearings Provide heavy duty ball thrust bearing or roller type
399. sposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction 3 1 2 1 Drainage So that construction operations progress successfully completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry The Contractor shall establish construct storm drainage features ponds basins at the earliest stages of site development and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and or provide temporary ditches swales and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils prevent erosion and undermining of foundations When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing Excavation shall be performed so that the site the area immediately surrounding the site and the area affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively drained 3 1 2 2 Dewatering Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of exc
400. ss 3 or cover may be cotton mats as approved 2 3 3 2 Moisture Retaining Cover P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 62 of 367 Provide waterproof paper cover for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C 171 regular or white or polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM C 171 or polyethylene coated burlap consisting of a laminate of burlap and a white opaque polyethylene film permanently bonded to the burlap burlap must conform to ASTM C 171 Class 3 and polyethylene film must conform to ASTM C 171 When tested for water retention in accordance with ASTM C 156 weight of water lost 72 hours after application of moisture retaining covering material must not exceed 0 039 gram per square centimeter of the mortar specimen surface 2 3 3 3 Membrane Forming Curing Compound Provide liquid type compound conforming to ASTM C 309 Type 1 clear Type 1D with fugitive dye for interior work and Type 2 white pigmented for exterior work 2 4 MATERIALS 2 4 1 Cement ASTM C 150 Type I or II Provide blended cement that consists of a mixture of ASTM C 150 Type I cement and one of the following materials ASTM C 618 pozzolan or fly ash For exposed concrete use one manufacturer for each type of cement fly ash and pozzolan 2 4 1 1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan ASTM C 618 Type N F or C except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must be 6 percent for Types N and F Add with cement Where the use of fly ash cannot meet the minimum level provide t
401. st brass or cast iron ferrule with countersunk cast brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor Cleanouts in connection with other pipe where indicated shall be T pattern 90 degree branch drainage fittings with cast brass screw plugs except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks at the foot of interior downspouts on each connection to building P N 05 C05 124 Section 22 00 00 Page 217 of 367 storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated and on each building drain outside the building Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze nickel bronze nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw Square access covers may be provided with matching frames anchoring lugs and cover screws Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome plated cast brass nickel brass or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface Wher
402. sulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 200 degrees F Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured A brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed The adhesive shall be allowed to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced 3 1 3 Welding No welding shall be done on piping duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct 3 1 4 Pipes Ducts which Require Insulation Insulation is required on all pipes or ducts except for omitted items as specified 3 2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 3 2 1 Pipe Insulation 3 2 1 1 General Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder bar
403. t Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt water chemicals and mechanical injury Upon completion of the work the fixtures materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned adjusted and operated Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment 3 1 1 4 Mains Branches and Runouts Piping shall be installed as indicated Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top bottom or side of main using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions Supply pipes valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1 2 inch between finished covering on the different services Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated comp
404. t to direct the expansion movement and to prevent buckling swaying and undue strain Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent 3 1 5 2 Structural Attachments Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast in concrete inserts built in anchors or masonry anchor devices Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5 Supports shall not be attached to metal decking Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only 3 1 6 Pipe Cleanouts Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required A cleanout installed in connection with cast iron soil pipe shall consist of a long sweep 1 4 bend or one or two 1 8 bends extended to the place shown An extra heavy ca
405. t cavities as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant used to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces Carefully apply the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker 3 3 6 Sealants Provide a sealant compatible with the material s to which it is applied Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and cannot be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions with a gun having a nozzle that fits the joint width Force sealant into joints to fill the joints solidly without air pockets Tool sealant after application to ensure adhesion Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles Upon completion of sealant application roughen partially filled or unfilled P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 115 of 367 joints apply sealant and tool smooth as specified Apply sealer over the sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer 3 4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 3 4 1 Protection Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears Masking tape may be used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled 3 4 2 Final Cleaning Upon completion of sealant application remove remaining smears and stains and leave the work in a clean and neat condition a Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces
406. t has been bent incorrectly is not be permitted Bending must be in accordance with standard approved practice and by approved machine methods Tolerance on nominally square cut reinforcing bar ends must be in accordance with ACI MCP 3 Deliver reinforcing bars bundled tagged and marked Tags must be metal with bar size length mark and other information pressed in by machine Marks must correspond with those used on the placing drawings Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects a Bar lengths depths and bends beyond specified fabrication tolerances b Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop drawings c Bars with reduced cross section due to rusting or other cause P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 75 of 367 Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having required shape form and cross section area 3 5 9 Placing Reinforcement Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI MCP 4 For slabs on grade over earth or over capillary water barrier and for footing reinforcement support bars on precast concrete blocks spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of slab or footing Contractor must cooperate with other trades in setting of anchor bolts inserts and other embedded items Where conflicts occur between locating reinforcing and embedded items the Contractor must notify the Contracting
407. t the requirements which control strength of structure in place including following conditions Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of temperature during curing not conforming to requirements specified Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances particularly load stresses heavy shock and excessive vibration Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength 3 11 2 6 Testing Concrete Structure for Strength When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place does not meet specification requirements make cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination in accordance with ASTM C 42 C 42M and as follows Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient Location of cores will be determined by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 88 of 367 Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42 C 42M if concrete they represent is more than superficially wet under service Air dry cores 60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60 percent for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete they repr
408. talled insulation shall be provided on the cold gas inlet connection to the motor in accordance with manufacturer s standard practice Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be fire rated As a minimum factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150 Factory insulated items no jacket installed indoors and which are located in air plenums in ceiling spaces and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84 Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material Jackets facings and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 EXAMINATION After becoming familiar with all details of the work perform Verification of Dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative of any discrepancy before performing any work 3 2 INSTALLATION Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer s published diagrams recommendations and equipment warranty requirements Where equipment is
409. talled system as recommended by the manufacturer Lubricating oil shall be of a type and grade recommended by the manufacturer for each compressor Where color leak indicator dye is incorporated charge shall be in accordance with manufacturer s recommendation 2 4 2 Fans Fan wheel shafts shall be supported by either maintenance accessible lubricated antifriction block type bearings or permanently lubricated ball bearings Unit fans shall be selected to produce the cfm required at the fan total pressure Motor starters if applicable shall be magnetic across the line type with a totally enclosed enclosure Thermal overload protection shall be of the manual or automatic reset type Fan wheels or propellers shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel Centrifugal fan wheel housings shall be of galvanized steel and both centrifugal and propeller fan casings shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel Steel elements of fans except fan shafts shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or fabricated of mill galvanized steel Mill galvanized steel surfaces and edges damaged or cut during fabrication by forming punching drilling welding or cutting shall be recoated with an approved zinc rich compound Fan wheels or propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced Direct drive fan motors shall be of the multiple speed variety Belt driven fans shall have adjustable sheaves to provide not less than 33 percent fan speed adjus
410. tch and device as specified or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style 2 16 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes seams dents weld marks loose scale or other imperfections Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer s standard practice Exterior surfaces shall be primed filled where necessary and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI Light Gray Provide manufacturer s coatings for touch up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING P
411. ted or written directions 3 4 2 Tolerances ACI MCP 4 and as indicated 3 4 3 As Cast Form Provide form facing material producing a smooth hard uniform texture on the concrete Arrange facing material in an orderly and symmetrical manner and keep seams to a practical minimum Support forms as necessary to meet required tolerances Do not use material with raised grain torn surfaces worn edges patches dents or other defects which can impair the texture of the concrete surface 3 5 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ACI MCP 2 Provide bars wire fabric wire ties supports and other devices necessary to install and secure reinforcement Reinforcement must not have rust scale oil grease clay or foreign substances that would reduce the bond Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the effective cross sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced Remove loose rust prior to placing steel Tack welding is prohibited 3 5 1 General Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with and ACI MCP 4 and as specified 3 5 2 Vapor Barrier Provide beneath the on grade concrete floor slab Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to eliminate joints wherever possible Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and tape or cement joints Remove torn punctured or damaged vapor barrier material and provide with new vapor barrier prior to placing concrete Concrete placement must not damag
412. ted zinc alloy or polished chromium plated P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 220 of 367 copper alloy Escutcheons shall be either one piece or split pattern held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew 3 6 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system shall be posted where directed Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures methods of checking the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems 3 7 TABLES TABLE I PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS SERVICE Item Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D 1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hub X X X X and spigot ASTM A 74 with compression gaskets Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark 2 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X alloy solder joint drainage fittings ASME B16 29 3 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X drainage fittings DWV ASME B16 23 4 Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene ABS X X X X plastic drain waste and vent pipe and fittings ASTM D 2661 ASTM F 628 SERVICE A Underground Building Soil
413. ter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 3 3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 26 00 00 Page 275 of 367 SECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Panelboards G Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices SD 03 Product Data Receptacles G Switches G Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves SD 06 Test Reports 600 volt wiring test G Grounding system test G SD 10 Operation and Maintenan
414. ter of frames at doors White and access panels which adjoin exposed interior concrete and masonry surfaces c Joints of interior masonry walls and White partitions which adjoin columns pilasters concrete walls and exterior walls unless otherwise detailed d Interior locations not otherwise indicated White or specified where small voids exist between materials specified to be painted e Joints between items adjoining ceramic tile White joints between shower receptors and ceramic tile joints formed where nonplaner tile surfaces meet f Joints formed between tile floors and tile White base cove joints between tile and dissimilar materials joints occurring where substrates change g Behind escutcheon plates at valve pipe White penetrations and showerheads in showers 2 1 2 Exterior Sealant For joints in vertical surfaces provide ASTM C 920 Type S or M Grade NS Class 25 Use NT For joints in horizontal surfaces provide ASTM C 920 Type S or M Grade P Class 25 Use T Provide location s and color s of sealant as follows LOCATION COLOR a Joints and recesses formed where frames Match adjacent and subsills doors louvers surface color and vents adjoin masonry concrete or P N 05 C05124 Section 07 92 00 Page 112 of 367 metal frames Use sealant at both exterior and interior surfaces of exterior wall penetrations b Voids where items pass through exterior Match adjacent walls surface color c Metal
415. terior and materials and equipment from the weather at all times 1 5 6 Utility Service Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations Prior to start of work utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor upon written request from the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 1 5 7 Facilities Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated provide approved barricades temporary covering of exposed areas and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities Floors roofs walls columns pilasters and other structural components that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring and are determined to be in stable condition must remain standing without additional bracing shoring or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing shoring or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting removal deconstruction or demolition work performed under this contract 1 5 8 Protection of Personnel Before during and after the demolition work the Contractor shal
416. that are not toxic and emit low or no Volatile Organic Compounds VOC Consider the use of admixtures that offer high performance to increase durability of the finish product but also have low toxicity and are made from bio based materials such as soy and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds VOC 2 4 7 1 Impervious Sheeting ASTM C 171 waterproof paper clear or white polyethylene sheeting or polyethylene coated burlap 2 4 7 2 Pervious Sheeting AASHTO M 182 P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 65 of 367 2 4 7 3 Liquid Membrane Forming Compound ASTM C 309 white pigmented Type 2 Class B 2 4 8 Liquid Chemical Sealer Hardener Compound Provide magnesium fluorosilicate compound which when mixed with water seals and hardens the surface of the concrete Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing conditions Provide compound that does not reduce the adhesion of resilient flooring tile paint roofing waterproofing or other material applied to concrete 2 4 9 Joint Sealants 2 4 9 1 Horizontal Surfaces 3 Percent Slope Maximum ASTM D 1190 or ASTM C 920 Type M Class 25 Use T ASTM D 7116 for surfaces subjected to jet fuel 2 4 9 2 Waterstops Provide hydrophyllic waterstops 2 4 10 Biodegradable Form Release Agent Provide form release agent that is colorless biodegradable and rapeseed oil based or soy oil based with a low maximum of 55 grams liter g 1 VOC content A minimum of 85 percent of the total p
417. the Contracting Officer prior to starting any work affected by the energy in the equipment utility system 2 APPLICATION The Contractor shall be responsible for locking out and tagging out of service all equipment utility systems involved in the work under this contract After the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative has approved an outage Government personnel and the Contractor shall independently secure the equipment utility system and tag the respective system out of service The Contractor shall provide their own locks and chains that are required to secure the equipment utility systems e g steam water air and or electricity End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 54 10 Page 36 of 367 SECTION 01 54 20 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS AND MATERIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES 1 DATA SHEETS Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS for all materials containing hazardous substances required for contract execution Information provided in MSDS s shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910 1200 MSDS s require Contracting Officer review and acceptance prior to bringing these materials on site 2s MATERIAL STORAGE Limit the quantity of these materials stored on site to the amount needed for execution of work Storage of excess materials will not be permitted Assure that the storage of these materials comply with all applicable federal state and local laws and regulations and provide additional storage facilities p
418. the Contract Item Acceptance Request as Urgent and provide a FAX number for prompt return The Coast Guard will make every effort to accelerate the review of each urgent submittal however the Contractor should not anticipate a reduced time schedule and shall plan project progress accordingly 3 ACCEPTANCE Submittals will be stamped Accepted Accepted with Comments or Resubmit Acceptance Acceptance with comments or Resubmit for each item will be indicated on the Contract Item Acceptance Request form and one copy returned to the Contractor 3 1 Prompt re submittal of items is required The Contractor shall furnish a new Contract Item Acceptance Request numbered in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2 1 4 DEFECTIVE WORK Acceptance of Submittals does not restrict the Government s right to reject departures from contract requirements use of damaged or improperly installed items materials or latent defects nor does it prejudice the Government s rights of rejecting any work found defective at Final Inspection and Acceptance 4 1 Work started or completed prior to submittal acceptance is solely at Contractor s risk and may jeopardize contract performance End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 30 00 Page 16 of 367 SECTION 01 31 00 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1 In accordance with the Notice to Proceed letter the Contractor shall submit the following a Construction
419. the rim 17 inches above the floor Provide urinal with the rim 24 inches above the floor Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 0 5 gallons per flush Provide ASME A112 6 1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control stop valve vacuum breaker tail pieces slip nuts and wall plates exposed to view components shall be chromium plated or polished stainless steel Flush valves shall be nonhold open type Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture Provide solenoid activated flush valves including electrical operated light beam sensor to energize the solenoid 2 4 4 Wall Hung Lavatories ASME A112 19 2 white vitreous china straight back type minimum dimensions of 19 inches wide by 17 inches front to rear with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets and openings for concealed arm carrier installation Provide aerator with faucet Water flow rate shall not exceed 0 5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi Provide ASME A112 6 1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory Mount lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor Provide top mounted solenoid activated lavatory faucets including electrical operated light beam sensor to energize the solenoid
420. throughout the circuit 2 2 8 3 Conductor Terminations Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets FACP and remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor connection Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation Each terminal cabinet FACP and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing which indicates each conductor its label circuit and terminal The laminated drawing shall be neat using 12 point lettering minimum size and mounted within each cabinet panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment All conductor termianl connections shall be screw terminals 2 2 9 Fire Alarm Control Panel FACP Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel the unit enclosures shall match exactly Each control unit shall provide power supervision control and logic for the entire system utilizing solid state modular P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 306 of 367 components internally mounted and arranged for easy access Each control unit shall be suitable for operation
421. tion 31 31 16 Page 333 of 367 3 5 3 Protection of Treated Area Immediately after the application the area shall be protected from other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed 3 6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT 3 6 1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory re treatment will be required 3 6 2 Testing Should an analysis performed by a third party indicate that the samples of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label and or if soils are treated to a depth less than specified or approved re treatment will be required 3 6 3 Disturbance of Treated Soils Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re treated before placement of slabs or other covering structures 3 6 4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered during the warranty period re treat the site 3 7 RE TREATMENT Where re treatment is required comply with the requirements specified in paragraph WARRANTY End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 31 31 16 Page 334 of 367 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 1 Stand of Turf 95 percent ground cover of the established species 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL 1 3 SUBMITTALS
422. tion SSS 33 3000 1 6 Existing Conditions SCS S S SSSCSCSCSCSCS e SSSSCSCSCSCSCSCC d a Pipeline Materials OOOO O SSCS E SSSCSC SSSS SSSOSCSCSSSCC d 333216 2 1 Pipe andFiuings SSCS P P22 Check Valves OO O OOS P21 Gate Valves O OO oOo 23 Submersible sewage grinder pumps T SSCSC iSC CSSSOOOCOCOC C CSCSY is Flexible flanged coupling sd O O O O O O O OOOO i P N 05 C05124 Page 49 of 367 CONTRACT ITEM ACCEPTANCE REQUEST Contract Number HSCG83 HSCG83 Contract Specialist Project Number Contractor Name URGENT YES NO if yes CONTRACTOR FAX Submittal Job Location NOTE Contractor must mark Deviation column if submittal deviates from contract requirements Item Spec Section Description of Material Deviation Status No and Paragraph Include Type Model Manufacturer Etc STATUS ABBREVIATION GUIDE AC Accepted AC w CMT Accepted with Comment R Resubmit Comments NOTE Review and acceptance of submittals by the Government is intended to verify general conformance with the design intent as shown on the contract drawings and in the specifications Acceptance by the Contracting Officer Technical Representative does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any errors and or omissions in the submittals nor from the responsibility for complying with the requirements of the contract except with respect to variations de
423. tion Streamlining and Standardization Information System ASSIST Department of Defense Single Stock Point DODSSP Document Automation and Production Service DAPS Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 Ph 215 697 6396 for account password issues Internet http assist daps dla mil online start account registration required U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 8601 Adelphi Road College Park MD 20740 6001 Ph 866 272 6272 Fax 301 837 0483 Internet http www archives gov Order documents from Superintendent of Documents U S Government Printing Office GPO 732 North Capitol Street NW Washington DC 20401 Ph 202 512 1800 Fax 202 512 2104 E mail contactcenter gpo gov Internet http www gpoaccess gov End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 32 of 367 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1 GENERAL All temporary utility connections shall be compatible with existing materials and equipment to provide safe and efficient installation operation and removal 2 ELECTRICITY AND WATER Electrical power and water are available on the site The Contractor will be permitted to utilize these utilities in performing the work provided that the existing systems are not overloaded The Contractor is responsible for installing and removing all connections to existing systems and shall ensure work and materials are in accordance with local codes The use
424. tion to stand for minimum of 24 hours Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0 2 and 0 5 parts per million or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping analyze by a certified laboratory and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 2 1 Field Tests and Inspections Prior to hydrostatic testing obtain Contracting Officer s Technical Representative s approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section The Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor equipment and incidentals required for testing The Contractor shall produce evidence when required that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications 3 2 2 Testing Procedure Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard except for the special testing requirements given in paragraph entitled Special Testing Requirements Test ductile iron water mains and water service lines in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for
425. tment The sheave size shall be selected so that the fan speed at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment will produce the specified air quantity Centrifugal scroll type fans shall be provided with P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 266 of 367 streamlined orifice inlet and V belt drive Each drive will be independent of any other drive V belt driven fans shall be mounted on a corrosion protected drive shaft supported by either maintenance accessible lubricated antifriction block type bearings or permanently lubricated ball bearings Each drive will be independent of any other drive Drive bearings shall be protected with water slingers or shields V belt drives shall be fitted with guards where exposed to contact by personnel and adjustable pitch sheaves 2 4 3 Primary Supplemental Heating 2 4 3 1 Electric Heating Coil Coil shall be an electric duct heater in accordance with UL 1995 and NFPA 70 Coil shall be unit mounted Coil shall be of the nickel chromium resistor single stage strip type Coil shall be provided with a built in or surface mounted high limit thermostat interlocked electrically so that the coil cannot be energized unless the fan is energized Coil casing and support brackets shall be of galvanized steel or aluminum Coil shall be mounted to eliminate noise from expansion and contraction and be completely accessible for service 2 4 4 Air Filters Air filters shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL
426. to ASME B18 21 1 2 1 6 Aluminum Alloy Products Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26 B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings as applicable Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1 8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0 050 inch thick P N 05 C05124 Section 05 50 00 Page 101 of 367 2 2 FABRICATION FINISHES 2 2 1 Galvanizing Hot dip galvanize items specified to be zinc coated after fabrication where practicable Galvanizing ASTM A 123 A 123M ASTM A 153 A 153M ASTM A 653 A 653M or ASTM A 924 A 924M G90 as applicable 2 2 2 Galvanize Anchor bolts grating fasteners washers and parts or devices necessary for proper installation unless indicated otherwise 2 2 3 Repair of Zinc Coated Surfaces Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A 780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing as approved by Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material 2 2 4 Shop Cleaning and Painting Cleaning and painting shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00 2 3 GUARD POSTS BOLLARDS PIPE GUARDS Provide galvanized sta
427. to metal joints where sealant is Match adjacent indicated or specified surface color 2 2 PRIMERS Provide a nonstaining quick drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application 2 3 BOND BREAKERS Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint 2 4 BACKSTOPS Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene butyl polyurethane or polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material unless otherwise indicated Make backstop material compatible with sealant Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops 2 5 CLEANING SOLVENTS Provide type s recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 SURFACE PREPARATION Clean surfaces from dirt frost moisture grease oil wax lacquer paint or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion Remove oil and grease with solvent Surfaces must be wiped dry with clean cloths When resealing an existing joint remove existing caulk or sealant prior to applying new sealant For surface types not listed below contact sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations
428. to the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative and the Contracting Officer a written report endorsed by Erector listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3 2 PREPARATION Provide temporary shoring guys braces and other supports during erection to keep the structural framing secure plumb and in alignment against temporary construction loading or loads equal in intensity of the building design loads Remove temporary support systems when permanent structural framing connections and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment and performance Miscellaneous Framing Install sub purlins girts angles furring and other miscellaneous support members or anchorage for the metal roof or wall panels doors ventilators and louvers according to metal building manufacturer s written instructions 3 3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING Erect metal building system according to manufacturer s written erection instructions approved shop drawings and other erection documents in accordance with MBMA MBSM Metal Building Systems Manual Do not field cut drill or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer s professional engineer and the Contracting Officer s Technical
429. tor shall provide evidence that he has furnished full payment to the surety 3 Materials To request progress payments for materials delivered to the construction or fabrication site the particular category of work associated with the materials must be broken down into separate material and labor costs 2 UPDATES Each month and or with each progress payment request the Contractor shall submit the following P N 05 C05124 Section 01 31 00 Page 17 of 367 Progress Schedule This schedule shall be an update of the Construction Schedule It shall show the current schedule of all work 1 Modifications If modifications are made to the contract the work added shall be tracked separately from the original Construction Schedule and shall maintain its individuality on the Progress Schedule throughout the life of the contract Progress Payment requests shall not lump modification costs into the original contract price End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 31 00 Page 18 of 367 SECTION 01 37 00 CONSTRUCTION DAILY REPORTS 1 GENERAL The Contractor shall complete a Daily Report for each and every day after mobilization The importance of an accurate fully detailed Daily Report promptly delivered to the designated On Site Representative cannot be overemphasized The report shall provide an accurate cumulative summary of the history and performance of the work The Daily Report shall document weather work hours work in place ins
430. tp www csa america org CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION CEC Media and Public Communications Office 1516 Ninth Street MS 29 Sacramento CA 95814 5512 Ph 916 654 4287 Internet http www energy ca gov CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE CISPI 5959 Shallowford Road Suite 419 Chattanooga TN 37421 Ph 423 892 0137 Fax 423 892 0817 Internet http www cispi org CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE CRSD 933 North Plum Grove Road Schaumburg IL 60173 4758 Ph 847 517 1200 Fax 847 517 1206 Internet http www crsi org COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION CDA 260 Madison Avenue New York NY 10016 Ph 212 251 7200 Fax 212 251 7234 E mail questions cda copper org Internet http www copper org FM GLOBAL FM 1301 Atwood Avenue P O Box 7500 Johnston RI 02919 Ph 401 275 3000 Fax 401 275 3029 E mail information fmglobal com P N 05 C05124 Section 01 42 00 Page 24 of 367 Internet http www fmglobal com GYPSUM ASSOCIATION GA 810 First Street NE Suite 510 Washington DC 20002 Ph 202 289 5440 Fax 202 289 3707 E mail info gypsum org Internet http www gypsum org ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA IESNA 120 Wall Street 17th Floor New York NY 10005 Ph 212 248 5000 Fax 212 248 5018 E mail iesna iesna org Internet http www iesna org INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE 445 Hoes Lane Piscataway NJ 08855 1331 Ph
431. tracting Officer s Technical Representative at least one week prior to beginning construction 2s MILITARY STATION REGULATIONS Dok The Contractor his employees and subcontractors shall become familiar with and obey all station regulations All personnel employed on the project shall keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress and shall not enter any other areas outside of the site of the work unless required to do so in the performance of their duties The Contractor s equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification D2 There shall be NO SMOKING in any Coast Guard building 2 3 Storage Areas The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative will determine exact location and boundaries of staging areas Under no circumstances shall materials be stored in areas that will interfere with aircraft operations 2 4 Storm Protection If a gale force wind warning or higher is issued take precautions to minimize any danger to persons and protect the work and nearby Government property Precautions shall include but not be limited to closings removing loose materials tools and equipment from exposed locations Remove and secure scaffolding and temporary work Close openings in the work area if storms of lesser intensity are imminent End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 04 00 Page 11 of 367 SECTION 01 04 10 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS 1 The Contracting Officer s Technical Representative may
432. tracting Officer s Technical Representative Verification of Dimensions A letter at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction including the date the site was visited confirmation of existing conditions and any discrepancies found Coil Corrosion Protection Product data on the type coating selected the coating thickness the application process used the estimated heat transfer loss of the coil and verification of conformance with the salt spray test requirement System Performance Tests A schedule at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing for the system performance tests The schedules shall identify the proposed date time and location for each test A schedule at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course which identifies the date time and location for the training SD 06 Test Reports Refrigerant Tests Charging and Start Up G P N 05 C05 124 Section 23 82 02 Page 261 of 367 Six copies of each test containing the information described below in bound 8 1 2 by 11 inch booklets Individual reports shall be submitted for the refrigerant system tests The date the tests were performed A list of equipment used with calibration certifications Initial test summaries Repairs adjustments performed Final test results oad goeg System Performance Tests G Six copies of the report provided in bound 8 1 2 by 11 inch booklets The report shall document compliance w
433. ts gravel having the same minimum compressive strength P N 05 C05124 Section 33 30 00 Page 356 of 367 3 1 3 Concrete Work Cast in place concrete is included in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE The pipe shall be supported on a concrete cradle or encased in concrete where indicated or directed 3 1 4 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation 3 1 4 1 Connecting to Existing Manholes or Concrete Structures Pipe connections to existing manholes shall be made so that finish work will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes including all necessary concrete work cutting and shaping The connection shall be centered on the manhole Holes for the new pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1 5 times the diameter of the pipe Cutting the manhole shall be done in a manner that will cause the least damage to the walls 3 1 4 2 Metal Work a Workmanship and finish Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries Form iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced Make castings sound and free from warp cold shuts and blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance Give exposed surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well defined lines and ar
434. tware program than the software for the FACP the software program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power The software shall be reprogrammable in the field 2 2 12 Manual Stations Provide metal or plastic semi flush mounted double action addressable manual stations which are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor Stations which require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted Stations shall be finished in fire engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station 2 2 13 Notification Appliances 2 2 13 1 Visual Alarm Signals Provide strobe light visual alarm signals which operate on a supervised 24 volt DC circuit The strobe lens shall comply with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 310 of 367 degree angle on both sides of the strobe The strobe flash output shall be a minimum of 15 candela based on the UL 1971 test The strobe shall have a xenon flash tube Visible appliances may be part of an audio visual assembly Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor provide synchronized operation 2 2 13 2 Fire Alarm Horns Provide
435. ty granted to the Contracting Officer to administer the construction of this project References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1 shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR 1 3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle store and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and as approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative Replace damaged or defective items 1 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein 1 4 1 New Work Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment such as motors motor starters except starters controllers which are indicated as part of a motor control center control or push button stations float or pressure switches solenoid valves integral disconnects and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted The interconnecting power wiring and conduit control wiring rated 120 volts nominal and conduit the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers and the electrical power circuits shall be provide
436. type vacuum breakers and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be meet the above requirements Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012 Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013 Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011 Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 208 of 367 conform to ASSE 1001 Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020 Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112 1 2 2 6 DRAINS 2 6 1 Floor and Shower Drains Shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body integral seepage pan and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium plated bronze nickel bronze or nickel brass strainer consisting of grate and threaded collar Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required Drains shall be provided with threaded connection Between the drain outlet and waste pipe a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be installed provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint Floor and s
437. ubricated D Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses Type L Hard Type K Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K soft temper without joints in or under floors xk In or under slab floors only brazed joints End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 224 of 367 SECTION 23 03 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 01 07 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to all sections 22 PLUMBING and 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual section 1 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 2 1 Material and Equipment Qualifications Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products which are of a similar material design and workmanship Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period 1 2 2 Service Support The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations 1 2 3 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer
438. uipment associated with another construction contract in progress may require access to the site during execution of this contract The contractor shall coordinate work and ensure that work operations do not interfere with the contract currently in progress The contractor shall allow service contract personnel access to the site for trash removal snow removal grounds maintenance or the performance of other related service contracts The Coast Guard will advise the contractor of the trash removal grounds maintenance or other recurring maintenance schedules End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 01 20 Page 6 of 367 SECTION 01 01 30 PROJECT PHASING l To minimize interference with Coast Guard operations utilize a predetermined phasing sequence to accomplish contract work Coordinate timing between successive phases with Coast Guard personnel to allow for necessary relocations Some of the work will be performed after normal hours and on weekends to accommodate Coast Guard Operations End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 01 30 Page 7 of 367 SECTION 01 01 50 CONTRACTOR WORK HOURS 1 WORK HOURS Accomplish work during normal unit operational hours of 7 30 a m to 4 30 p m Monday through Friday unless otherwise approved by the Coast Guard Note any departures from these work hours on the Daily Reports 2 SATURDAY SUNDAY AND HOLIDAYS The contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer s Technical Representati
439. uitry to automatically recharge the battery after main power is restored Full charge of battery shall take no more than 20 hours Use panels with power on light push to test button for horn and light and push to silence button for horn and light with automatic reset for next alarm Use alarm designed to activate under the following conditions a High liquid level as sensed by float switch b Loss of main power c No flow light as sensed by limit switch on the check valve 2 5 4 Electrical Requirements Furnish motors with their respective pieces of equipment Motors controllers contactors and disconnects shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM P N 05 C05124 Section 33 32 16 Page 364 of 367 Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment 2 5 5 Electric Motor Use hermetically sealed electric motor The power cable shall be sealed inside the motor end bell The cable shall be neoprene covered with a flexible metal cover over it for its full length 2 6 UNDERGROUND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE 2 6 1 Access Hatch Cover Provide aluminum access hatch cover as indicated The access hatch shall include lifting mechanism automatic hold open arm slam lock with handle and flush lift handle with red vinyl grip Use automatic hold open arm that locks in the 90 degree position Use cover that is 1 4 inch diam
440. ular 0 25 to 1 5 inches graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral slag cinders crushed stone and crushed shells b Class Il Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 5 inches including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines generally granular and noncohesive either wet or dry Soil Types GW GP SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 2 4 BORROW Obtain borrow materials from sources outside of Government property P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 319 of 367 2 5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic faced acid and alkali resistant polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines Provide tape on rolls 3 inch minimum width color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length Warning and identification to read CAUTION BURIED intended service LINE BELOW or similar wording Color and printing shall be permanent unaffected by moisture or soil Warning Tape Color Codes Yellow Electric Blue Water Systems Green Sewer Systems 2 5 1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping Acid and alkali resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width color and printing requirem
441. um and 1 00 maximum Current crest factor shall be 1 7 maximum P N 05 C05124 Section 26 51 00 Page 293 of 367 f Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of A g Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast h Ballasts shall be instant start unless otherwise indicated Ballasts shall be programmed start where indicated Instant start ballasts shall operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration that permits the operation of remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are removed Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration Provide series parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available i Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start j Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated k Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled Electronic Ballast Warranty herein 2 1 1 1 T 8 Lamp Ballast a Total harmonic distortion THD Shall be 20 percent maximum b Input wattage 1 62 watts maximum when operating two F32T8 lamps c Ballast efficacy factor 1 1 44 minimum when operating two F32T8 lamps 2 1 2 Fluorescent Lamps a T 8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts maximum 2800 initial lumens minimum CRI of 75 minimum col
442. und pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings wrappings or tanks Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of the walls As far as practicable backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall 3 6 BORROW Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations approved borrow materials shall be obtained as specified herein P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 324 of 367 3 7 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade under pavements and slabs bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade 3 8 BURIED DETECTION WIRE Bury detection wire directly above non metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken from manhole to manhole The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe with a minimum of 3 feet of wire coiled remaining accessible in each manhole The wire shall remain insulated over its entire length The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal For force mains the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe 3 9 COMPACTION Determine in place density of
443. vailable nitrogen 8 percent available phosphorus 8 percent available potassium 2 4 2 Hydroseeding Fertilizer Controlled release fertilizer to use with hydroseeding and composed of pills coated with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6 months and containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients 8 percent available nitrogen 8 percent available phosphorus 8 percent available potassium 2 5 MULCH Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds mold and other deleterious materials 2 5 1 Straw P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 338 of 367 Stalks from oats wheat rye barley or rice Furnish in air dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Straw shall contain no fertile seed 2 5 2 Hay Air dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Hay shall be sterile containing no fertile seed 2 5 3 Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Use recovered materials of either paper based 100 percent or wood based 100 percent hydraulic mulch Processed to contain no growth or germination inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of materials application Composition on air dry weight basis 9 to 15 percent moisture pH range from 5 5 to 8 2 Use with hydraulic application of grass seed and fertilizer 2 6 WATER Source of water shall be approved by Contracting
444. ve at least forty eight hours advance notice prior to working on weekends or Federal holidays The Government may reject any such request without impacting the completion time of the contract 3 CONTRACT COMPLETION The contractor shall complete work within the time frame indicated upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed Limitations imposed by these work hours will not entitle the Contractor additional time to complete the project Refer to FAR Clause 52 211 10 Commencement Prosecution and Completion of Work End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 01 01 50 Page 8 of 367 SECTION 01 02 80 PRE BID SITE VISITS 1 GENERAL Bidders are responsible for visiting the site to field verify existing conditions and determine actual dimensions and the nature of the work required Failure to visit the site does not relinquish the bidder from determining the extent and scope of the work required and estimating the difficulty and cost to complete the project Requests for equitable adjustments in either time or money arising from failing to field verify site conditions may be denied Provisions regarding the site visit requirements are outlined in FAR Clause 52 236 3 Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work 2 SITE VISIT Arrange pre bid site visits to Sector North Carolina to verify existing conditions with CWO Scott Romero Facilities Engineering 252 240 8486 or SCPO Don Beckler Facilities Engineering 252 240 8487 betw
445. ve boxes shall be of cast iron or precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable Precast concrete boxes installed in locations subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed to withstand the following HS 20 AASHTO load designation as outline in AASHTO HB 17 Provide a round head Cast the word WATER on the lid The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1 4 inches Cast iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint 2 1 2 4 Disinfection Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following Chlorine Liquid AWWA B301 Hypochlorite Calcium and Sodium AWWA B300 P N 05 C05124 Section 33 11 00 Page 344 of 367 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES 3 1 1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in the Special Requirements paragraphs 3 1 1 1 Location of Water Lines Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings do not lay water line closer horizontally than 10 feet from any sewer line Where water lines cross under gravity sewer lines encase sewer line fully in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet on each side of the crossing unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber gasketed joints and n
446. ved manner 1 5 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH BTEX and full TCLP including ignitability corrosivity and reactivity Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per million ppm of total petroleum hydrocarbons TPH and less than 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene Toluene Ethyl Benzene and Xylene BTEX and shall not fail the TCPL test TPH concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 600 4 79 020 Method 418 1 BTEX concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 530 F 93 004 Method 5030 8020 TCLP shall be performed in accordance with EPA 530 F 93 004 Method 1311 Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site with at least one test from each borrow site Material shall not be brought on site until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative P N 05 C05124 Section 31 23 00 Page 317 of 367 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 6 1 Utilities Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor s risk Excavation made with power driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government owned utility or subsurface construction For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction excavate by hand Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and conti
447. ver 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below existing surface 3 2 2 Stripping Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from other excavated material Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be wasted Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading Where sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed 3 2 3 Unsuitable Material Remove vegetation debris decayed vegetable matter sod mulch and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs 3 3 EXCAVATION Excavate to contours elevation and dimensions indicated Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location Keep excavations free from water Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor s operations soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed Refill with satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Unless specified otherwise refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill and fi
448. vervoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay 2 11 4 Wiring and Conduit Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment as specified herein Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein Control wiring shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment 2 12 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910 147 Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23 Mechanical P N 05 C05124 Section 26 20 00 Page 283 of 367 2 13 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT 2 13 1 Ground Rods UL 467 Ground rods shall be sectional type copper clad steel with minimum diameter of 3 4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet 2 14 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 2 15 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay swi
449. walls ceilings or partitions Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2 1 2 inches and smaller flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger 3 1 2 3 Cast Iron Soil Waste and Vent Pipe Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer s recommendations 3 1 2 4 Copper Tube and Pipe a Brazed Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2 2 MSS SP 73 and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper phosphorus or copper phosphorus silver brazing metal without flux P N 05 C05124 Section 22 00 00 Page 214 of 367 Brazing of dissimilar metals copper to bronze or brass shall include the use of flux with either a copper phosphorus copper phosphorus silver or a silver brazing filler metal b Soldered Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31 5 and CDA A4015 Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver c Copper Tube Extracted Joint Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC d Press connection Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer s installation instructions for manufactured rated size The joints shall be pressed using the tool s approved
450. water flow during heating cycle P N 05 C05124 Section 23 82 02 Page 265 of 367 2 2 4 Unit Controls Unit shall be internally prewired with a 24 volt control circuit powered by an internal transformer Terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring and external control wiring Unit shall have cutoffs for high and low pressure and low oil pressure for compressors with positive displacement oil pumps supply fan failure and safety interlocks on all service panels Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with ambient temperature of 37 degrees F Adjustable cycle timers shall prevent short cycling Multiple compressors shall be staged by means of a time delay Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a circuit breaker in accordance with UL 1995 Low cost cooling shall be made possible by means of a control circuit which will modulate dampers to provide 100 percent outside air while locking out compressors 2 3 EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCY Unit shall have an efficiency as indicated on the drawings 2 4 UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS 2 4 1 Refrigerant and Oil Refrigerant shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases Refrigerants shall have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with ASHRAE 15 amp 34 Refrigerants shall meet the requirements of AHRI 700 as a minimum Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential ODP of less than or equal to 0 05 Provide and install a complete charge of refrigerant for the ins
451. weled Use for floors intended as walking surfaces and for reception of floor coverings First provide a floated finish Next the finish must be power troweled three times and finally hand troweled The first troweling after floating needs to produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some trowel marks Perform additional trowelings done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently The final troweling is done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface Thoroughly consolidate the surface by the hand troweling operations The finished surface must be essentially free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance The finished surface must produce a surface level to within 1 4 inch in 10 feet On surfaces intended to support floor coverings remove any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering by grinding 3 9 1 2 Broomed Use on surfaces of exterior walks platforms patios and ramps unless otherwise indicated Perform a floated finish then draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to produce a coarse P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 82 of 367 scored texture Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab 3 9 2 Flat Floor Finishes 3 9 2 1 Measurement of Floor Tolerances Test slab within 24 hours of the final troweling Provid
452. with acid rinse and thorough drying b Prime Coating A base coat of epoxy paint specifically formulated to interact with the top coat is to be applied to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0 20 0 05 mils This prime coat must be oven cured prior to application of finish coat c Exterior Finish Coating Apply the finish coating over the primer by roll coating to dry film thickness of 0 80 5 mils 3 80 0 50 mils for Vinyl Plastisol for a total dry film thickness of 1 00 0 10 mils 4 00 0 10 mils for Vinyl Plastisol This finish coat must be oven cured d Interior Finish Coating Apply a wash coat on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0 30 0 05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 0 50 0 10 mils The wash coat must be oven cured P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 190 of 367 e Color The exterior finish chosen from the manufacturer s color charts and chips f Physical Properties Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer s standard performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports Chalking ASTM DEF Color Change and Conformity ASTM D 2244 Weatherometer ASTM G 23 and ASTM D 822 Humidity ASTM D 2247 and ASTM D 714 Salt Spray ASTM B 117 Chemical Pollution ASTM D 1308 Gloss at 60 ASTM D 523 Pencil Hardness ASTM D 3363 Reverse Impact ASTM D 2794 Flexibility ASTM D 522 Abrasion ASTM D 968 Flame Spread
453. with the additions and modifications specified herein 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1 2 1 Scope This work includes designing and providing a new complete analog addressable fire alarm system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the Atlantic Beach USCG project The system shall include wiring raceways pull boxes terminal cabinets outlet and mounting boxes control equipment alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices alarm notification appliances supervising station fire alarm system transmitter and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described Provide system complete and ready for operation Equipment materials installation workmanship inspection and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72 except as modified herein The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations Final quantity layout and coordination is the responsibility of the Contractor Existing Base system is Honeywell Notifier Model MSSZ 320 Network Radio System 1 3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Fire alarm control panel FACP G Manual stations G Transmitters including housing G Batteries G Battery chargers G Notification appliances G P N 05 C05124 Section 28 31 63 Page 299 o
454. ws powder actuated fasteners or pneumatically driven fasteners and in accordance with manufacturer s recommended procedure and SDI 30 Clamp or weight deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and structural supports while performing welding or fastening Attachment of adjacent deck units by button punching is prohibited 3 2 1 1 Welding Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1 3 D1 3M using methods and electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being used Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in AWS D1 1 D1 1M and AWS D1 3 D1 3M make welds Immediately recertify or replace qualified welders that are producing unsatisfactory welding Conform to the recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute and the steel deck manufacturer for location size and spacing of fastening Do not use welding washers at sidelaps Holes and similar defects will not be acceptable Lap 2 inch butted deck ends Attach all partial or segments of deck units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2 5 of SDI DDMO3 Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire brushing Heavily coat welds cut edges and damaged portions of coated finish with zinc dust paint conforming to ASTM A 780 A 780M 3 2 1 2 Fastening Anchor deck to structural supports and adjoining units with mechanical deck fasteners as recommended by the Steel Deck Institute and the steel deck manufacturer as approved by the Contracting Offi
455. xcess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width If seeding is performed with cultipacker type seeder or by hydroseeding rolling may be eliminated 3 2 5 Erosion Control Material Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions where indicated or as directed by the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative 3 2 6 Watering Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off During the germination process seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out 3 3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS Immediately after turfing protect area against traffic and other use End of Section P N 05 C05124 Section 32 92 19 Page 341 of 367 SECTION 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 03 Product Data Piping materials Water service line piping fittings joints valves and coupling Valve boxes Submit manufacturer s standard drawings or catalog cuts except submit both drawings and cuts for push on and rubber gasketed bell and spigot joints Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings SD 06 Test Reports Bacteriological Disinfection G Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection SD 07 Certificates Water serv
456. xplosion proof fan cooled enclosures shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1 Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer s instructions Each motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 and NEMA MG 2 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor Motors shall be continuous duty with the enclosure specified Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated Motors shall be furnished with a magnetic across the line or reduced voltage type starter as required by the manufacturer Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop Motors shall be sized for the applicable loads Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified but not shown shall be provided 1 2 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS SD 02 Shop Drawings Drawings Drawings provided
457. xposed surfaces of work in place shall have a smooth finish and unless otherwise approved exposed riveting shall be flush Where tight fits are required joints shall be milled Corner joints shall be coped or mitered well formed and in true alignment Work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer s installation instructions and approved drawings cuts and details 3 3 ANCHORAGE FASTENINGS AND CONNECTIONS Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts expansion shields and powder driven fasteners when approved for concrete toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry machine and carriage bolts for steel through bolts lag bolts and screws for wood Do not use wood plugs in any material Provide non ferrous attachments for non ferrous metal Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials generally matching in color and finish to which fastenings are applied Conceal fastenings where practicable 3 4 BUILT IN WORK P N 05 C05 124 Section 05 50 00 Page 104 of 367 Form for anchorage metal work built in with concrete or masonry or provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses 3 5 WELDING Perform welding weldi
458. y Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A 792 A 792M and ASTM A 463 A 463M 2 1 9 High Strength Bolts Nuts and Washers ASTM A 325 heavy hex steel structural bolts ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel nuts and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel washers Finish Hot dip zinc coating ASTM A 153 A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc coating ASTM B 695 Tension Control High Strength Bolt Nut Washer Assemblies ASTM F 1852 heavy hex head steel structural bolts with spline Finish Mechanically deposited zinc coating ASTM B 695 or Mechanically deposited zinc coating ASTM B 695 baked epoxy coated 2 1 10 Non High Strength Bolts Nuts and Washers ASTM A 307 ASTM A 563 and ASTM F 844 Finish ASTM A 153 A 153M or ASTM B 695 2 1 11 Anchor Rods ASTM F 1554 Configuration Straight Nuts ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel Plate Washers ASTM A 36 A 36M carbon steel Washers ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel e Finish Hot dip zinc coating ASTM A 153 A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc coating ASTM B 695 aa oror 2 1 12 Threaded Rods ASTM A 193 A 193M a Nuts ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel b Washers ASTM F 436 hardened or ASTM A 36 A 36M carbon steel c Finish Hot dip zinc coating ASTM A 153 A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc coating ASTM B 695 2 1 13 Primer P N 05 C05124 Section 13 34 19 Page 186 of 367 SSPC Paint 15 Type I red oxide 2 2 FABRICATION 2 2 1 General Comply with MBMA MBSM Metal
459. y identified after bundles are broken and tags removed Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound VOC emissions Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers in occupied spaces 1 4 1 Reinforcement Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting Protect from contaminants such as grease oil and dirt Ensure bar sizes can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 5 1 Drawings 1 5 1 1 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings for concrete formwork for Reinforcement Materials must indicate concrete pressure calculations with both live and dead loads along with material types Provide all design calculations in accordance with ACI MCP 2 and ACI MCP 3 1 5 1 2 Reinforcing Steel P N 05 C05124 Section 03 30 00 Page 59 of 367 ACI MCP 4 Indicate bending diagrams assembly diagrams splicing and laps of bars shapes dimensions and details of bar reinforcing accessories and concrete cover Do not scale dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars 1 5 2 Test Reports 1 5 2 1 Concrete Mix Design Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix must be suitable for the job conditions Include mill
460. y lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings the Contracting Officer s Technical Representative shall be notified prior to further work in that area 3 1 2 Concrete P N 05 C05124 Section 02 41 00 Page 54 of 367 Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work and the remaining concrete is sound At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete 3 1 3 Patching Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces using on site materials when available Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish Patching shall be as specified and indicated and shall include a Concrete and Masonry Completely fill holes and depressions left as a result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions 3 2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL 3 2 1 Title to Materials Exc
461. y stops check valves unions and sediment strainers on the inlets Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F of any setting 2 4 FIXTURES Fixtures shall be water conservation type in accordance with ICC IPC Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117 1 Vitreous China nonabsorbent hard burned and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided White No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks crazes blisters thin spots or other flaws Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps faucets stop valves and drain fittings Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system except grease interceptors shall be equipped with a trap Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports and polished chromium plated pipe valves and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers Internal parts of flush and or flushometer valves shower mixing valves shower head face plates pop up stoppers of lavatory waste drains shall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome plated Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees F water temperature 2 4 1 Automatic Controls Provide automatic sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with ASSE 1037 and UL 1951 for lavatory faucets
462. zardous Waste Staging Areas and Access Recovered Materials Notice As Built Drawings Operating Instructions and Training List of Submittals Contract Item Acceptance Request DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete DIVISION 05 METALS 05 21 19 Open Web Steel Joist Framing P N 05 C05124 Page 2 of 367 51 57 91 05 30 00 Steel Decks 05 50 00 Metal Miscellaneous and Fabrications DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 16 Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames 08 11 16 Aluminum Windows 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 22 00 Supports for Gypsum Board 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 90 00 Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing General Purpose DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 03 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 00 Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 37 13 Diffusers Registers and Grills 23 82 02 Unitary Heating and

Spec - Seashore Builders, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents